Vax C90-P2 SERIES Specifications

TECHNICAL MANUAL
888-2857-001
Platinum VAX-C
Compact Class Transmitter
Platinum VAX-C
Compact Class Transmitter
Technical Manual
Harris Broadcast
This document covers the following modulations:
ATSC/MH
DVB-T/H
DVBT-2
ISDB-T/H
CTTB
CMMB
DAB
DMB
T.M. No. 888-2857-001
© Copyright Harris Broadcast 2012, 2013
All rights reserved
07May2013
Rev: B
ii
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Technical Assistance
Technical and troubleshooting assistance for Harris transmission products is available from
Harris field service (factory location: Quincy, Illinois, USA) during normal business hours
(8:00 AM - 5:00 PM Central Time). Telephone +1-217-222-8200 to contact the field service
department; FAX +1-217-221-7086; or E-mail questions to tsupport@harris.com.
Emergency service is available 24 hours a day, seven days a week, by telephone only.
Online assistance, including technical manuals, white papers, software downloads, and
service bulletins, is available at http://support.broadcast.harris.com/eservice_enu.
Address written correspondence to Field Service Department, Harris Broadcast, P.O. Box
4290, Quincy, Illinois 62305-4290, USA. For other global service contact information, please
visit: http://www.broadcast.harris.com/contact.
NOTE: For all service and parts correspondence, you will need to provide the sales order
number, as well as the serial number for the transmitter or part in question. For future
reference, record those numbers here: ___________________/____________________
Please provide these numbers for any written request, or have these numbers ready in the
event you choose to call regarding any service, or parts requests. For warranty claims it will be
required. For out of warranty products, this will help us to best identify what specific
hardware was shipped.
Replaceable Parts Service
Replacement parts are available from Harris service parts department from 7:00 AM to 11:00
PM Central Time, seven days a week. Telephone +1-217-222-8200 or email
servicepartsreq@harris.com to contact the Service Parts Department.
Emergency replacement parts are available by telephone only, 24 hours a day, seven days a
week by calling +1-217-222-8200.
Unpacking
Carefully unpack the equipment and perform a visual inspection to determine if any apparent
damage was incurred during shipment. Retain the shipping materials until it has been verified
that all equipment has been received undamaged. Locate and retain all packing check lists.
Use the packing check list to help locate and identify any components or assemblies which are
removed for shipping and must be reinstalled. Also remove any shipping supports, straps, and
packing materials prior to initial turn on.
Returns And Exchanges
No equipment can be returned unless written approval and a Return Authorization is received
from Harris Broadcast. Special shipping instructions and coding will be provided to assure
proper handling. Complete details regarding circumstances and reasons for return are to be
included in the request for return. Custom equipment or special order equipment is not
returnable. In those instances where return or exchange of equipment is at the request of the
customer, or convenience of the customer, a restocking fee will be charged. All returns will be
sent freight prepaid and properly insured by the customer. When communicating with Harris
Broadcast, specify the Harris order number or invoice number.
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
iii
Service Centres
Europe
Harris Broadcast
Eskdale Road, Winnersh,
Wokingham, Berkshire, U.K. RG41 5TS
Telephone: +44 (0) 118 964 8100.
FAX: +44 (0) 118 964 8054
e-mail: TransmittersSupport.Europe@harris.com
Asia
Leitch Asia Limited & Harris Communications Limited
Rm 1015-18, 10/F,
Tower 1, Grand Century Place,
193 Prince Edward Road West,
Kowloon,
Hong Kong
Telephone: +852-2174 2504
FAX: +852-2776 0227
email: service.asia@harris.com
Americas / Factory
Harris Broadcast
P.O. Box 4290, Quincy, Illinois
62305-4290, USA.
Telephone: +1 217 222 8200 (24/7/365 emergency support)
FAX: +1 217 221 7086
e-mail: tsupport@harris.com (tech assistance)
servicepartsreq@harris.com (parts only)
For other global service contact information, please visit: http://
www.broadcast.harris.com/contact.
At Harris Broadcast, we endeavor to offer the finest equipment manuals available
today in the broadcast industry. If you encounter errors, omissions, or other areas in
which this manual might be improved, we strongly encourage your to send your
comments to training@harris.com. Our ability to continually improve our technical
documentation depends on your inputs!
iv
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Manual Revision History
Platinum VAX-C Compact Class Technical Manual
REV.
DATE
ECN
A
OCT 2012
P53357
Initial release.
B
07May2013
62739
Updates to Sections 1 2 5
5/9/13
Pages Affected / Description
888-2857-001
MRH-1
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
Guide to Using Parts List Information
The Replaceable Parts List Index portrays a tree structure with the major items being left most in the index. The
example below shows the Transmitter as the highest item in the tree structure. If you were to look at the bill of
materials table for the Transmitter you would find the Control Cabinet, the PA Cabinet, and the Output Cabinet. In the
Replaceable Parts List Index the Control Cabinet, PA Cabinet, and Output Cabinet show up one indentation level
below the Transmitter and implies that they are used in the Transmitter. The Controller Board is indented one level
below the Control Cabinet so it will show up in the bill of material for the Control Cabinet. The tree structure of this
same index is shown to the right of the table and shows indentation level versus tree structure level.
Example of Replaceable Parts List Index and equivalent tree structure:
Replaceable Parts List Index
Part Number
Table 7-1. Transmitter
Table 7-2. Control Cabinet
Table 7-3.
Controller Board
Table 7-4. PA Cabinet
Table 7-5.
PA Amplifier
Table 7-6.
PA Amplifier Board
Table 7-7. Output Cabinet
Transmitter
994 9283 001
Page
994 9283 001
992 9244 002
992 8344 002
992 9400 002
994 7894 002
992 7904 002
992 9450 001
7-2
7-3
7-6
7-7
7-9
7-10
7-12
Control Cabinet
992 9244 002
PA Cabinet
992 9400 002
Controller Board
992 8344 002
PA Amplifier
992 7894 002
Output Cabinet
992 9450 001
PA Amplifier Board
992 7904 002
The part number of the item is shown to the right of the description as is the page in the manual where the bill for that
part number starts. Inside the actual tables, four main headings are used:
•
•
•
•
•
Table #-#. ITEM NAME - PART NUMBER - this line gives the information that corresponds to the
Replaceable Parts List Index entry;
P/N column gives the ten digit part number (usually in ascending order);
DESCRIPTION column gives a 25 character or less description of the part number;
REF. SYMBOLS/EXPLANATIONS column 1) gives the reference designators for the item (i.e., C001,
R102, etc.) that corresponds to the number found in the schematics (C001 in a bill of material is equivalent
to C1 on the schematic) or 2) gives added information or further explanation (i.e., “Used for 208V operation
only,” or “Used for HT 10LS only,” etc.).
NOTE: Inside the individual tables some standard conventions are used:
•
•
•
A # symbol in front of a component such as #C001 under the REF. SYMBOLS/EXPLANATIONS column
means that this item is used on or with C001 and is not the actual part number for C001.
In the ten digit part numbers, if the last three numbers are 000, the item is a part that has been purchased and
has not manufactured or modified. If the last three numbers are other than 000, the item is either manufactured or is purchased from a vendor and modified for use in the product.
The first three digits of the ten digit part number tell which family the part number belongs to - for example,
all electrolytic (can) capacitors will be in the same family (524 xxxx 000). If an electrolytic (can) capacitor
is found to have a 9xx xxxx xxx part number (a number outside of the normal family of numbers), it has
probably been modified in some manner at the factory and will therefore show up farther down into the individual parts list (because each table is normally sorted in ascending order). Most made or modified assemblies will have 9xx xxxx xxx numbers associated with them.
The term “SEE HIGHER LEVEL BILL” in the description column implies that the reference designated part number
will show up in a bill that is higher in the tree structure. This is often the case for components that may be
frequency determinant or voltage determinant and are called out in a higher level bill structure that is
more customer dependent than the bill at a lower level.
vi
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
vii
Item
______________________________
Quantity
Part Number
________________________________
______________________________
Ref Des
e.g. C21,
R100, etc.
Item Used On Assembly if Known e.g.
C21 used on 992-8025-001
& Schematic 839-8038-991
Comments
Guide for Ordering Parts: Please provide as much information as possible to facilitate part
substitution as required. Equipment name, part number and serial number is found on a metal
ID plate on the rear of the unit. Describe the unit using the parts list if possible. Include
schematic information, schematic number, or number of next higher assembly. The next higher
assembly usually has a part number that begins with a 9xx-xxxx-xxx.
Shipping Method : ________________________
Preferred
FAX:
Telephone: ______________________________
________________________________
________________________________
________________________________
Address: ________________________________
Description of Part Part’s Name, Description, and
Specification from Parts List
Equipment Serial Number:___________________
Equipment Part Number:____________________
Frequency & Channel: ______________________
Payment Method : ________________________
Preferred
FAX:
Telephone: ______________________________
________________________________
________________________________
________________________________
Address: ________________________________
Shipping Information
Phone: 217-222-8200
FAX: 217-221-7096
Ship To (If different from billing information):
PARTS ORDER FORM
Billing Information
Customer Name: ________________________
Harris Broadcast
PO Box 4290
3200 Wismann Lane 62305
viii
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
!
WARNING:
THE CURRENTS AND VOLTAGES IN THIS EQUIPMENT ARE DANGEROUS. PERSONNEL
MUST AT ALL TIMES OBSERVE SAFETY WARNINGS, INSTRUCTIONS AND REGULATIONS.
This manual is intended as a general guide for trained and qualified personnel who are aware of the
dangers inherent in handling potentially hazardous electrical/electronic circuits. It is not intended to
contain a complete statement of all safety precautions which should be observed by personnel in using
this or other electronic equipment.
The installation, operation, maintenance and service of this equipment involves risks both to personnel
and equipment, and must be performed only by qualified personnel exercising due care. Harris Broadcast
shall not be responsible for injury or damage resulting from improper procedures or from the use of
improperly trained or inexperienced personnel performing such tasks. During installation and operation
of this equipment, local building codes and fire protection standards must be observed.
The following National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) standards are recommended as reference:
- Automatic Fire Detectors, No. 72E
- Installation, Maintenance, and Use of Portable Fire Extinguishers, No. 10
- Halogenated Fire Extinguishing Agent Systems, No. 12A
!
WARNING:
ALWAYS DISCONNECT POWER BEFORE OPENING COVERS, DOORS, ENCLOSURES,
GATES, PANELS OR SHIELDS. ALWAYS USE GROUNDING STICKS AND SHORT OUT HIGH
VOLTAGE POINTS BEFORE SERVICING. NEVER MAKE INTERNAL ADJUSTMENTS, PERFORM MAINTENANCE OR SERVICE WHEN ALONE OR WHEN FATIGUED.
Do not remove, short-circuit or tamper with interlock switches on access covers, doors, enclosures, gates,
panels or shields. Keep away from live circuits, know your equipment and don’t take chances.
!
WARNING:
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY ENSURE THAT POWER HAS BEEN DISCONNECTED.
IF OIL FILLED OR ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITORS ARE UTILIZED IN YOUR EQUIPMENT, AND IF A
LEAK OR BULGE IS APPARENT ON THE CAPACITOR CASE WHEN THE UNIT IS OPENED FOR
SERVICE OR MAINTENANCE, ALLOW THE UNIT TO COOL DOWN BEFORE ATTEMPTING TO
REMOVE THE DEFECTIVE CAPACITOR. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO SERVICE A DEFECTIVE
CAPACITOR WHILE IT IS HOT DUE TO THE POSSIBILITY OF A CASE RUPTURE AND
SUBSEQUENT INJURY.
!
WARNING:
THERE IS DANGER OF EXPLOSION AND CHEMICAL EXPOSURE IF THE BATTERY IS NOT
HANDLED, REMOVED, AND INSTALLED PROPERLY.
!
WARNING:
BATTERIES MUST NOT BE DISPOSED OF WITH DOMESTIC WASTE! SEND USED BATTERIES BACK TO THE MANUFACTURER OR SUPPLIER.
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
ix
x
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
FIRST-AID
Personnel engaged in the installation, operation, maintenance or servicing of this equipment
are urged to become familiar with first-aid theory and practices. The following information is
not intended to be complete first-aid procedures, it is a brief and is only to be used as a
reference. It is the duty of all personnel using the equipment to be prepared to give adequate
Emergency First Aid and there by prevent avoidable loss of life.
Treatment of Electrical Burns
1. Extensive burned and broken skin
a. Cover area with clean sheet or cloth. (Cleanest available cloth
article.)
b. Do not break blisters, remove tissue, remove adhered particles of
clothing, or apply any salve or ointment.
c. Treat victim for shock as required.
d. Arrange transportation to a hospital as quickly as possible.
e. If arms or legs are affected keep them elevated.
NOTE:
If medical help will not be available within an hour and the victim is conscious and
not vomiting, give him a weak solution of salt and soda: 1 level teaspoonful of salt
and 1/2 level teaspoonful of baking soda to each quart of water (neither hot or
cold). Allow victim to sip slowly about 4 ounces (a half of glass) over a period of
15 minutes. Discontinue fluid if vomiting occurs. (Do not give alcohol.)
2. Less severe burns - (1st & 2nd degree)
a. Apply cool (not ice cold) compresses using the cleanest available
cloth article.
b. Do not break blisters, remove tissue, remove adhered particles of
clothing, or apply salve or ointment.
c. Apply clean dry dressing if necessary.
d. Treat victim for shock as required.
e. Arrange transportation to a hospital as quickly as possible.
f. If arms or legs are affected keep them elevated.
REFERENCE:
ILLINOIS HEART ASSOCIATION
AMERICAN RED CROSS STANDARD FIRST AID AND PERSONAL SAFETY
MANUAL (SECOND EDITION)
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
xi
Glossary of Terms
Analog Input Board (AIB):
An optional circuit card for the modulator section of the low power unit (LPU). It
provides the necessary interface to allow the modulator to accept analog video and
audio inputs according to the PAL, NTSC, or SECAM standards.
ASI (Asynchronous Serial Interface):
A streaming format used to carry the MPEG transport stream from the network
origination point to the transmitter for modulation onto the RF carrier(s).
ATSC (Advanced Television Subcommittee):
A digital television standard featuring a single, vestigial-sideband carrier and an 8VSB modulation constellation. The transport stream format may be either
SMPTE310 or ASI:
The data rate before forward error correction is 19.392658 Mbit/s. The transmitted
data rate with error correction is 32.28 Mbit/s.
Back Porch:
The portion of the analog video horizontal line waveform following the sync pulse
but before the start of active video.
Band III:
The VHF radio frequency band from 174 MHz to 230 MHz. In this manual, taken to
mean the broadcast band from 168 MHz to 242 MHz covered by the VAX
transmitter.
BPF (Band pass filter):
A high power filter centered about the desired channel bandwidth and located at the
transmitter output port to eliminate out-of-band intermodulation products arising
from the power amplification process. Also commonly referred to as the mask filter
or critical mask filer.
CAN (Controller Area Network):
A serial communications standard designed to allow microcontrollers and devices
to communicate with each other.
xii
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
COFDM (Coded Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplex):
A transmission technique in which the information content of a complete ensemble
(multiplex) is divided and modulated onto a multitude of closely neighboring RF
carriers within a channel bandwidth (frequency block). The division of the
information payload among a large number of RF carriers ensures that each
individual RF carrier has a very low data rate (symbol rate). The long symbol period
of the individual RF carriers allows the receiver to wait until all delayed signal
reflections have arrived and been added to the direct signal (...during a guard
interval to be discarded). This permits recovery a stable signal in difficult reception
conditions, especially during mobile reception.
CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Checksum):
A procedure for error detection in digital signals. Before distribution to the
transmitter, a CRC is computed for the transport stream signal. This CRC is sent in
the transport stream. Upon reception at the transmitter site, another CRC is
computed from the received transport stream and compared to the transmitted value.
If the CRCs are identical, no error has occurred during the distribution to the
transmitter site.
DAB Mode (Digital Audio Broadcast):
A digital radio/multimedia standard for transmitting multiple programs within a 1.5
MHz RF frequency block. The original DAB standard has been extended by two
different enhancements to the encoding layer: DAB-Plus and DMB. All three
standards use the original DAB modulation format in the transmitter (changes are
upstream in the encoder). Four different DAB modes exist. All VAX transmitters
use DAB mode I.
DAC (Digital Analog Converter):
A circuit that converts digital values inside the processing stages of the LPU
modulator into analog RF waveforms for amplification and transmission by the
transmitter.
dBm (Decibels over 1 milliwatt):
A logarithmic signal power measurement scale referenced to 1 mW. 0 dBm is
equivalent to 1 mW. 10dBm = 10mW, 20dBm = 100mW, 30dBm = 1000mW.
DMB (Digital Multimedia Broadcasting):
A modification of the basic DAB system according to ETSI standard (TS 102 427
and TS 102 428) using MPEG-4 (H.264) and BSAC/HE-AAC V2 compression to
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
xiii
permit sending of multimedia information (radio, TV, and data casting) to mobile
devices such as mobile phones. Originally developed in South Korea.
DUC (Digital Upconverter):
A circuit in the LPU modulator section that converts the digital modulated baseband
signal to the 140 MHz digital intermediate frequency.
Dynamic Delay:
A processing function provided in the exciter to compensate for different delays of
the program data stream in the data distribution network between the network
origination point and various transmitter sites. A time-stamp contained in the
transport stream serves as a reference. The present time is delivered by a GPS
receiver at the transmitter (1pps signal, rising slope). Comparing these two sources,
the dynamic delay function is able to synchronize the program input to all
transmitters over a one-second correction range.
Ensemble:
The complete information payload being received and processed by the transmitter,
typically when transmitting according to the DAB standard. In general, the
ensemble includes audio programs, data services, and possibly video content.
ETI (Ensemble Transport Interface):
The transport stream format for DAB/DMB broadcasting (2.048 Mbit/s, G.703)
used to send program material from the ensemble provider to all DAB transmitters
in a network. The ETI format has two varieties: ETI-NA and ETI-NI.
ETI(NA) (Network Adapted Layer):
A protocol is suited for transmitting the ETI signal via telecom networks. It has a
frame structure that complies with G.704 specifications and contains error
protection information (Reed Solomon Code). The bit clock frequency is 2.048
MBit/s.
ETI(NI) (Network Independent Layer):
A protocol is suited for transmission with connections that have a low error rate and
a constant signal delay. It does not contain any error protection information. The bit
clock frequency is 2.048 MBit/s.
ETI Input Board (EIB):
xiv
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
An optional circuit card for the modulator section of the low power unit (LPU). It
provides the necessary interface to allow the modulator to accept ETI transport
streams according to the DAB digital transmission standard.
Ethernet:
The physical interface by which the VAX transmitter may be connected to a LAN
and/or the Internet to provide web-based supervision. It generally employs an RJ45
connector.
EVM (Error Vector Magnitude):
A measure used to quantify the performance of the quality the digital being
transmitted. A signal sent by an ideal transmitter would have all constellation points
precisely at the ideal locations. However, various imperfections in the signal path
cause the actual constellation points to deviate from the ideal locations by finite
error vectors. Generally associated with the ATSC modulation standard. Analogous
to the modulation error ration (MER) used for the DVB, DAB and other modulation
standards.
FPGA (Field Programmable Gate Array):
An integrated circuit designed to be configured by the customer or designer after
manufacturing. FPGAs perform many of the intensive digital processing steps used
to synthesize the transmitted RF signal in the LPU modulator section.
GPS (Global Positioning System):
A satellite-based navigation system commonly used for determining position and
navigating. In a single frequency network context, it delivers an extremely precise
time reference (UTC... universal time, coordinated) used to synchronize all
transmitters.
Guard Interval:
A time interval at the start of each transmitted symbol in a digital COFDM system.
Distortions to the received signal due to time-delayed reflections or interfering
transmitters falling in this interval are ignored by the receiver.
GUI (Graphical User Interface):
A type of user interface that allows users to interact with electronic devices via
images rather than text commands. In this application, the user interface provided
by the TCU touch screen in dual drive systems or the web-based remote interface
served over the Ethernet interface.
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
xv
Hierarchical modes:
A transmission technique whereby the transmitted data payload is divided into a
lower data rate high priority (HP) stream and a higher data rate low priority (LP)
stream. Those receivers with difficult reception conditions decode only the more
robust HP data stream, while receivers with good reception conditions receive both
data streams.
Hot-pluggable:
Term to denote that the device in question can be removed while transmitter is
operating without suffering damage or causing damage to other devices.
HTML (Hypertext Markup Language):
The predominant markup language for web pages. HTML is the basic building
block of web pages.
IP Address (Internet Protocol Address):
A numerical label assigned to each device (e.g., computer, printer) participating in a
computer network that uses the Internet Protocol (IP) for communication. An IP
address serves two principal functions: host or network interface identification and
location addressing.
LCD (Liquid Crystal Display):
A thin, flat electronic visual display that uses the light modulating properties of
liquid crystals to display text and images. In the VAX transmitter, the blue display
screen on the front panel of the low power unit(s).
LPF (Low Pass Filter):
A high power filter located at the transmitter output port used to attenuate out-ofband emissions at the signal harmonic frequencies arising from the high power
amplification process. May also be referred to as a harmonic filter.
LPU (Low Power Unit):
May also be referred to as the exciter. The LPU contains both an upper, modulator
section and a lower, amplifier section.
MER (Modulation Error Ratio):
A measure used to quantify the performance of the quality the digital being
transmitted. A signal sent by an ideal transmitter would have all constellation points
xvi
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
precisely at the ideal locations. However various imperfections in the signal path
cause the actual constellation points to deviate from the ideal locations by finite
error vectors. The modulation error ratio quantifies the ratio of the desired signal to
the undesired error vectors. MER is typically associated with COFDM modulation
formats such as DVB or DAB.
MCM (Master Control Module):
A circuit card in the transmitter control unit (TCU) in dual drive systems. The MCM
card provides most of the core control functions, whereas the TCU card controls the
user remote & GUI interface.
PA (Power amplifier):
An electronic circuit that accepts a low level RF signal and outputs an amplified
replica.
PAB (Power amplifier block):
A high power amplifier stage. May refer to the LPU power block (PAB zero in
lower-half amplifier section of LPU chassis) or one or more external high power
amplification stages (PAB 1…4).
PCB (Printed Circuit Board):
A circuit board in the transmitter.
PCM (Processor Control Module):
A circuit card in the transmitter control unit (TCU) in dual drive systems. The MCM
card provides most of the core control functions, whereas the TCU card controls the
user remote & GUI interface.
PFRU (Precise Frequency Reference Unit):
A circuit sub-assembly inside the LPU modulator section responsible for supplying
the various high-stability oscillator signals required to synthesize the transmitted RF
waveform.
PRBS (Pseudo-random binary sequence):
An endless series of random numbers typically used for transmitter test purposes,
often when a valid transport stream does not exist.
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
xvii
PS (Power supply):
A device that supplies DC electrical energy to one or more electric loads, typically
via the rectification of an AC mains electrical input.
RF (Radio frequency):
An electrical oscillation at the frequency of radio waves in the range of 3 kHz to 300
GHz. In this application, typically a signal in the 168 MHz to 242 MHz frequency
range of the VAX transmitter.
RS-485:
A TIA/EIA standard for serial multipoint communications lines. The signal
communication protocol used for serial communications between various
subassemblies in the transmitter system. Also known as EIA-485 or TIA-485.
RTAC (Real Time Adaptive Correction):
A signal processing technique applied in the modulator signal generation stage
which seeks to correct deficiencies in the high power amplification and filtering
stages by means of complementary pre-distortion.
RU:
An abbreviation for rack unit.One rack unit equals 1.75" (44.45mm). The rack unit
is used to describe the height of components that will be placed in racks.
SFN (Single Frequency Network):
A transmission network in which all transmitters are synchronized in frequency and
phase (symbol). This transmission technique guarantees high frequency economy,
as a single frequency can be used in a large geographic area.
SMA (SMA connector):
A coaxial connector for RF cables featuring a 0.250 x 36 thread and a .312 inch
(7.925mm) hex nut in the male connector.
SMPTE (SMPTE 310 transport stream):
A transport stream format sometimes employed with the ATSC digital television
standard.
xviii
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Static Delay:
A delay function provided by the exciter over a manually settable range of 0 to 1000
ms to compensate for differences in signal processing delays or local propagation
conditions for individual transmitters in a single frequency network.
Sync (Sync pulse):
The horizontal synchronization pulse in the video waveform which, when
transmitted, creates the highest level of peak envelope power in the transmitter.
TII (Transmitter Identification Information):
A data field transmitted during the null in the DAB RF frame containing transmitter
identification information for use by the receiver. Each transmitter in a single
frequency network has its own unique TII identifier.
Time stamps:
Data fields in the transmission protocol (e.g. in the ETI signal) containing timing
information for the purposes of signal monitoring and synchronization.
TS (Transport Stream):
A standard format for transmission and storage of audio, video, and data for
broadcast systems such as DVB and ATSC. The transport stream specifies a
container format encapsulating packetized elementary streams, with error correction
and stream synchronization features for maintaining transmission integrity when the
signal is degraded. Depending on the digital transmission standard, the transport
stream may be in the SMPTE310, ASI, or ETI format.
TPO (Transmitter Power Output):
The desired transmitter forward output power level.
UDC (Up-Down Converter):
A circuit in the LPU modulator section that converts an 140 MHz intermediate
frequency signal to the final desired VHF RF channel frequency (upconversion) or
vice versa (downconversion)
UPS (Uninterruptable Power Supply):
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
xix
A battery-based system designed to provide power during an AC mains failure
event.
VGA (Video Graphics Array):
A video display standard used by the personal computer industry based on a 640 x
480 pixel resolution. The standard used by the TCU touchscreen in dual drive
systems.
VHF (Very High Frequency):
The radio frequency range of 30 MHz to 300 MHz. In this application, the 168 MHz
to 242 MHz frequency band covered by the VAX transmitter.
WEB:
A device or interface that uses HTML formatted documents transmitted according
to the IP protocol, typically over LAN/WAN/Internet servers, but also locally via
1:1 communications.
References
Please also consult the following references for additional information on DAB
technical requirements:
xx
•
TR 101 496: "Digital Audio Broadcasting (DAB); Guidelines and rules
for implementation and operation"
•
ETS 300 401: ”Radio broadcast systems; Digital Audio Broadcasting
(DAB) to mobile, portable, portable and fixed receivers”
•
ETS 300 799: "Digital Audio Broadcasting (DAB); Distribution
Interfaces; Ensemble Transport Interface (ETI)"
•
ITU-T Recommendation G.703: “General Aspects of Digital
Transmission Equipment; Terminal Equipment. Physical/electrical
Characteristics of Hierarchical Digital Interfaces, Geneva, 1994”
•
ITU: “Radio Regulations, Appendix 8, Geneva, 1994”
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Table of Contents
User Remote Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11
Transmitter Interface Connector. . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
TS (Transport Stream) Connections . . . . . . . . . .2-14
External Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
RF Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
RF Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
RF Sample Connections and Level . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Transmitter Power Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Battery Backup Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
Glossary of Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-xii
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-xx
Section 1
Introduction
Purpose of Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
VAX-C Features / Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
General Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Transmitter Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
VAX Transmitter System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Transmitter RF Power Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Remote Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Operating Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Transmitter Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Rack Integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Directional Coupler or Wattmeter . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
VAX-C Exciter/Controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Inputs and Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
VAX-C Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
COFDM Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
ATSC Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
DAB/DMB Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Section 3
Operation
Transmitter Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-1
Transmitter Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2
LCD Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3
Front Panel LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6
Xmtr Home Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8
Output Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10
Amplifier Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-11
Configuration Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12
System Calibration Screens. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14
Exciter Home Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17
Fault Log screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-20
SETUP SCREENS, All Modulation Systems. . . .3-21
ISP (In-System Programming) Screen . . . . . . . .3-22
Save Settings Soft Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Section 2
Installation /
Initial Turn-On
RTAC Setup Screens 1 & 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24
Storing an RTAC Correction Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Operate RTAC from a Stored Filter Set. . . . . . . . . . 3-26
DUC/RTAC Setup Screen 3 & 4 . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Returns and Exchanges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Technical Manual and Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Transmitter Placement and Operating Environment2-3
Rack Mounting Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Transmitter AC and Ground Connections. . . . . . . 2-5
Surge Suppression Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Voltage Regulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Safety Ground. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Cabinet Ground Strap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Connecting AC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Signal and Sample Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Rear Panel Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Nonlinear Correction Range Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Max Crest Factor Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
RTAC Profiles sub window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Transmitter I/O Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31
PFRU Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-33
Remote Communications Screens . . . . . . . . . . .3-35
User Settings Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37
System Settings Screens. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-39
Setup Screens - ATSC Modulation . . . . . . . . . . .3-41
Setup Screens - CTTB/CMMB Modulation . . . .3-44
SETUP - ISDB-T MODULATION . . . . . . . . . . .3-49
Setup Screens - DVB-T Modulation . . . . . . . . . .3-53
Setup Screens - DVB-T2 Modulation . . . . . . . . .3-63
Setup Screens - DAB Modulation. . . . . . . . . . . . .3-76
Status Screens, All Modulation Systems . . . . . . .3-81
Signal Processor Status Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-82
1
Table of Contents
PS Module Removal/Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Power Calibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
System Factory Fwd/Rfld Calibration . . . . . . . 5-12
DUC/RTAC or UDC Output Status Screen. . . . 3-84
Transmitter I/O Status screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-85
PFRU Status Screens. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-87
Battery Backup Status Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-90
Revisions Status Screens (1 & 2) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-91
Status Screens - ATSC Modulation . . . . . . . . . . 3-92
Status Screens - CTTB/CMMB Modulation . . . 3-97
Status Screens - ISDB-T Modulation . . . . . . . . 3-102
Status Screens - DVB-T Modulation . . . . . . . . 3-106
Status Screens - DVB-T2 Modulation . . . . . . . . 3-109
Status Screens - DAB Modulator. . . . . . . . . . . . 3-111
Calibration Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Field Fwd/Rfld Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Calibration Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Pre-correction for Digital TV & DAB. . . . . . . . . 5-17
Precorrection Setup Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Troubleshooting Precorrection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Storing Precorrection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fan Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air Filter Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing Date and Time Battery . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting VAX-C Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery Backup (UPS) Option . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing Feature Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting To The VAX-C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VAX-C Front and Rear RJ45 Connectors . . . .
Log- In Authorization Levels & Passwords . . .
Changing Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection Via Front Ethernet Connector . . . .
Section 4
Theory of Operation
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Active Logic Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Block Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Modulator Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Signal Processor Board Overview . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
The Modulation Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
RF Sample Processing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Low Voltage Power Supply Board . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Battery Backup Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
ASI / SMPTE 310 Inputs / Output . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
PFRU (Precise Frequency Reference Unit) Board4-12
Assigning Computer IP Address in DHCP Client Mode5-35
Assigning Computer IP Address Without Rebooting5-35
Making the Connection to the VAX-C . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
Obtaining Rear Ethernet Connector Address . . . . . 5-36
PFRU Board 1st LO PLL for the DAC Clock Circuit4-12
PFRU Board Local Oscillator-2 Circuit, For UDC 4-14
PFRU Board Reference Oscillator Circuit . . . . . . . 4-15
PFRU Board GPS Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Connecting Via VAX-C Rear Panel Ethernet Connector537
Connecting To VAX-C Via Existing Ethernet Network5-37
Direct Connection, Computer To VAX-C Rear Ethernet Connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
Up/Downconverter Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Upconverter Major Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Functional Description of Upconverter . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Downconverter Major Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Downconverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
LO Distribution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Changing PC Operating Mode Static/DHCP . . 5-38
Verifying The Computer IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
VAX-C Screen Captures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
Updating VAX-C Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
Saving and Recalling Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
Web Browser Screen Captures . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
Bootloader Recovery Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48
Connecting to the VAX via SNMP . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52
SNMP Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52
Supported MIBs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53
Harris Base MIB Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53
Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53
Harris SMI (Structure of Managed Information)5-54
DAB Single Frequency Network (SFN) Setup . 5-56
Dynamic Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
Static Delay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
VAX-C Transmitter PAs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Fault Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
RF Power Detection and Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
+50 VDC Power Supply Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Section 5
Maintenance and Alignments
Technical Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PA Module Removal and Replacement . . . . . . . . .
PA Module Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PA Module Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-18
5-20
5-23
5-24
5-25
5-26
5-27
5-27
5-29
5-31
5-31
5-32
5-33
5-34
5-1
5-2
5-2
5-6
2
Table of Contents
Offset Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DAB EDI/IP Input Option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation and Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inputs/Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M2X, LPU or VAX Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GUI Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EDI Software Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Typical Test Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-57
5-58
5-58
5-58
5-59
5-59
5-59
5-60
5-60
5-60
5-62
Section 6
Diagnostics
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Web Browser Fault Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Fault Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
PA Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Section 7
Parts List
Replaceable Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
3
Table of Contents
4
Platinum VAX-C Series
Section 1
Introduction
1.1
1
Purpose of Manual
This manual provides important information for the proper operation and maintenance
of the VAX family of air cooled, solid state, VHF transmitters. Schematics and
diagrams are provided in an accompanying drawing package. This manual is written for
the skilled broadcast maintenance technician and assumes previous experience working
with RF broadcast equipment. The various sections of this technical manual provide
the following types of information:
•
Section 1: Introduction, identifies the versions of the product available and the possible options.
•
Section 2: Installation, details the procedures to receive, install, and commission the
transmitter for use, including initial start-up procedure.
•
Section 3: Operation, describes operation of the equipment and is intended to be the
primary section referenced by operating personnel.
•
Section 4: Theory of Operation, is included to help service personnel understand the
inner workings of the transmitter.
•
Section 5: Maintenance, lists and explains alignments and adjustments that could be
required to maintain the transmitter.
•
Section 6: Troubleshooting, included as a service aid to be used along with Sections 4
and 5 by qualified service personnel to identify and correct an equipment malfunction.
•
Section 7: Parts List, a comprehensive listing of the components that may be replaced
in the field.
NOTE:
If a "customer-special" manual is included with a custom-built transmitter, the
information in that manual supercedes that contained in this manual.
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
1-1
Section 1 Introduction
1.2
Platinum VAX-C Series
VAX-C Features / Benefits
The Harris VAX-C Compact Class transmitter offers the following useful features and
benefits:
•
Easy migration between different modulation standards. Nearly all digital TV and
DAB/DMB standards are available by software upgrade.
NOTE:
If different modulation standards are required, then a new feature key must be
entered into the controller to activate additional modulation types and options.
Contact Harris sales to obtain information and pricing for new feature keys.
1-2
•
Rugged, reliable design and construction - Compact design utilizing only 2 RU (rack
unit) space.
•
New 50-volt LDMOS device technology delivers a dramatic increase in power density.
•
PowerSmart technology, for best-in-class power efficiency and lowest operating
costs
•
•
Digital power levels 5 to 100 W COFDM, 5 to 150 W DAB, 5 to 180 W ATSC
•
•
•
•
Fully Broadband PA Modules — VHF, bands III, 168 to 242 MHz
All-digital linear and non-linear pre-correction utilizing Real-Time Adaptive Correction (RTAC™)
Automatic restart after AC mains interruption - returns to previous operational mode
Modular control system for straightforward monitoring and in-depth diagnostics
Harris® web-enabled remote GUI interface
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Platinum VAX-C Series
1.3
Section 1 Introduction
General Description
This section contains a general description of the Platinum VAX-C Series of television
transmitters. Included in this section will be descriptions of the control system,
amplifier, block diagrams of the various models and system specifications.
The VAX-C series of solid state, air cooled, transmitters is designed to synthesize and
amplify radio- frequency signals in the VHF broadcast bands III (168 to 242 MHz).
VAX-C transmitters contain the following assemblies: control panel, exciter, controller
and amplifier. The major components are shown in Figures 1-1, 1-2 & 1-3.
Figure 1-1 VAX-C Transmitter - Front Panel
Figure 1-2 VAX-C Transmitter - Top (cover removed)
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
1-3
Platinum VAX-C Series
Section 1 Introduction
Figure 1-3 VAX-C Rear Panel
The Platinum VAX-C series of solid state, air-cooled transmitters is designed to
synthesize and amplify radio frequency signals in the VHF TV and DAB/DMB
broadcast band III 168-242 MHz.
As of this printing, VAX transmitters support the following TV and radio formats:
DAB = Digital Audio Broadcasting
DABPlus = Digital Audio Broadcasting
DMB = Digital Multimedia Broadcasting
ATSC = American Television Standards Committee DTV
ATSC A110 = Single frequency network standard for ATSC
ATSC-M/H = Mobile TV standard for ATSC
ISDB-T = South American and Japanese digital DTV
DVB-T = Digital Video Broadcasting – Terrestrial
DVB-T2 = Digital Video Broadcasting – Terrestrial
DVB-H = Digital Video Broadcasting – Handheld
CMMB = Chinese multimedia standard
CTTB(DTMB) = Chinese multimedia standard
1-4
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Section 1 Introduction
Platinum VAX-C Series
1.4
Transmitter Models
VAX-C transmitter model numbers are formed based on the following:
‘V’ stands for VHF Band, while ‘A’ means that air is used for cooling, ‘X’ indicates that
the unit is a TV Transmitter, and ’C’ stands for compact class. The number following
the VAX prefix stands for the transmitter power level. The suffix indicates the
modulation type. The suffix ‘AT’ indicates ‘ATSC’. Other abbreviations include: MH
for ATSC Mobile Handheld, DV for ‘DVB-T/H’, T2 for DVB-T2, IS for ’ISDB-T’, CT
for CTTB, CM for ’CMMB’, DA for DAB, and DM for DMB digital modulations
standards. The suffix set will be extended for additional modulation standards as
required.
For example:
VAX-180AT-C = VHF, air cooled, TV transmitter, 180W, compact class, ATSC (digital)
VAX-100DV-C = VHF, air cooled, TV transmitter, 100W, compact class, DVB-T
(digital)
The Platinum VAX-C Compact Class transmitters are available in four air cooled power
levels. The models are listed below in Table 1-1.
Table 1-1
Platinum VAX-C DAB Transmitter Models
Tx Models
Configuration
Output Power
(average)
VAX-75DA-C
2RU
75 W
VAX-150DA-C
2RU
150 W
NOTES:
All power levels given in average power at the transmitter output (prefilter).
RU = rack unit. 1RU = 4.45 cm (1.75")
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
1-5
Platinum VAX-C Series
Section 1 Introduction
Table 1-2
Platinum VAX-C COFDM TV Transmitter Models
Tx Models
Configuration
Output Power
(average)
VAX-50XX-C
2RU
50 W
VAX-100XX-C
2RU
100 W
NOTES:
All power levels given in average power at the transmitter output (prefilter).
RU = rack unit. 1RU = 4.45 cm (1.75")
NOTE:
In the table above the suffix XX is an indicator of modulation type. The following suffixes are used: DV=DVB-T/H, T2=DVB-T2, IS=ISDB-T, CT=CTTB,
CM=CMMB.
Table 1-3
Platinum VAX-C ATSC Transmitter Models
Tx Models
Configuration
Output Power
(average)
VAX-90AT-C
2RU
90 W
VAX-180AT-C
2RU
180 W
NOTES:
All power levels given in average power at the transmitter output (prefilter).
RU = rack unit. 1RU = 4.45 cm (1.75")
1-6
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Platinum VAX-C Series
1.5
Section 1 Introduction
VAX Transmitter System
VAX-C transmitters feature solid-state design and utilize a FET-based power amplifier
(PA) module to amplify the RF signal. In addition to RF drive power from the exciter
stage, the PA module utilizes 50V DC power, supplied by a switch mode power supply
(PS) module.
The PA module type varies with power level. The VAX-C features two cooling fans that
can be changed by removing the front panel while the transmitter is on-air. Transmitters
are typically supplied without a rack. Rack mounting is available as an option.
The VAX-C system control is provided by the microprocessor daughter board which is
mounted on the signal processing board, as shown in Figure 1-2 on page 1-3. SNMP
communications and IP connectivity are standard offerings and available in all
transmitter models. The VAX-C transmitter has an LCD display and control buttons on
the front panel to allow the user to locally control the transmitter as shown in Figure 11 on page 1-3. LCD panel and push button control provides limited control of the
transmitter system. The feature key and modulation settings can’t be changed using the
LCD control panel push buttons. The web browser must be used to change these
parameters.
1.5.1
Transmitter RF Power Control
The PA module itself operates in open loop mode (no gain or level adjustment). The
transmitter RF power control is done via automatic level control located in the VAX-C
upconverter.
1.5.2
Software
The transmitter is shipped from the factory with software preloaded and ready to run. If
a software update is required, follow the instructions in the maintenance and alignment
section. Software can be easily updated using the web browser and ISP (In System
Programming). ISP is a Harris programming utility that is selectable as part of the web
browser interface. See 3.4.1 for further details.
1.5.3
Remote Control
The Platinum VAX-C transmitter has a wired parallel remote control with the standard
connections for control, status and analog monitoring located on the customer I/O card
in the rear panel. Detailed information on the remote control connections to the VAX-C
and cabinet can be found in Section 2.7.
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
1-7
Section 1 Introduction
Platinum VAX-C Series
Platinum VAX-C transmitters include a Web enabled remote GUI interface that
provides comprehensive remote control and monitoring of data points within the
transmitter. It includes an SNMP (simple network management protocol) manager
which allows integration with most control systems via the Internet or LAN.
1.6
Operating Voltages
Single phase, 100 to 240 V AC, auto-ranging, +/-10%, 50/60 Hz, one IEC C15 inlet.
!
CAUTION:
CHECK THE AC POWER FEEDING THE VAX-C. IT MUST BE BETWEEN 100
VAC AND 240 VAC +/-10%. ANY VOLTAGE OUTSIDE THAT RANGE WILL
CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE EQUIPMENT. THE VOLTAGE SHOULD BE
MEASURED LINE TO LINE, OR WHEN A NEUTRAL IS USED, LINE TO
NEUTRAL.
!
CAUTION:
IF VOLTAGE VARIATIONS IN EXCESS OF +/-10% ARE ANTICIPATED, THE
TRANSMITTER POWER INPUT MUST BE EQUIPPED WITH AUTOMATIC VOLTAGE
REGULATORS (OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT) CAPABLE OF CORRECTING THE MAINS
VOLTAGE.
1-8
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Section 1 Introduction
Platinum VAX-C Series
1.7
Block Diagram
Figure 1-4 on page 1-9 contains a system block diagram showing the basic RF signal
flow and configuration for a Platinum VAX-C transmitter.
PA Module
Battery
Backup
Option
Figure 1-4 VAX-C Simplified Block Diagram
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
1-9
Section 1 Introduction
1.8
Platinum VAX-C Series
Transmitter Accessories
The VAX-C chassis contains the basic VAX transmitter. Additional options are
available and may be present in a VAX-C transmitter system. In as much as these
accessories do not significantly change the functioning of the core transmitter itself, it is
understood that this manual addresses customized transmitter configurations that may
contain one or more of these options.
In the case of a relatively high level of customization, this manual may also be
accompanied by a supplemental “customer-special” manual. In the case where
conflicting information is presented in the two manuals, the information given by the
customer-special manual supersedes any information contained in this manual.
1.8.1
Rack Integration
VAX-C digital transmitters are purchased as an individual component (sometimes
referred to as stand alone models) and can be mounted in an equipment rack provided
by the customer. Harris can provide a complete rack integration package, including
filters and other RF components. The VAX-C needs to have rear support as the back of
the unit has the majority of the weight, adjustable rack rails can be provided by Harris to
support the VAX-C in a rack.
1.8.2
Directional Coupler or Wattmeter
Optional precision directional couplers are available. A through-line wattmeter capable
of measuring the output power directly may be supplied as another option. External
couplers are required to provide sample ports for test and monitoring equipment. An
additional directional coupler is required after the filter to provide a signal source for
RTAC operation.
1-10
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Platinum VAX-C Series
1.9
Section 1 Introduction
VAX-C Exciter/Controller
The VAX-C exciter section is a transmitter RF signal source. It receives the program
material to be transmitted in the form of a digital transport stream and generates a lowlevel on-channel RF signal. It performs pre-corrections for non-linear distortions which
occur in the transmitter RF power amplifier and for linear distortions/group delay which
occur in the high power filter.
The VAX-C can be operated with multiple digital modulation platforms by changing the
software and updating the feature key (feature key updates may not be required, it
depends on how the system was initially purchased).
The heart of the VAX control system is a microprocessor daughter board located on the
signal processing board in the VAX-C chassis. The front of the VAX-C includes a
control panel and LCD screen. There are two RJ45 ethernet connectors. One ethernet
connector is located on the front control panel. This connector has a static IP address
and acts as a DHCP server. The other RJ45 ethernet connector is on the rear of the unit
and can be configured as a DHCP client or assigned a static network IP.
The VAX-C contains two muffin fans mounted in the right and left sides of the chassis
front. Cooling air is drawn into the assemblies from the front and forced over the top
and bottom sides of the circuit boards, and exits from the rear of the VAX-C exciter
section. The left fan cools the exciter part of the unit and the right fan cools the PA
section. The fans are not redundant.
The VAX-C top cover may be removed to provide access to the circuit boards, power
should be disconnected before the top cover is removed. See Figure 1-2 on page 1-3 for
the names and locations of the various circuit boards in the VAX-C.
All system interconnections are via the rear panel, see Figure 1-3 on page 1-4.
A vertical column of seven LEDs on the front panel provide status for TS Input, Drive
Chain, Power Amp, Power Supply, Output, System and Mute. Refer to Section 3.1.3 on
page 3-6 for descriptions of the front panel LEDs.
1.9.1
Inputs and Outputs
The RF output can be set to any VHF channel and the output power is maintained via
automatic level control (ALC).
The VAX-C has four digital input program streams via the rear panel BNC input
connectors, shown in Figure 1-5. Most modulation standards only use two of them at a
time as a main and alternate inputs. The program inputs may be ASI or SMPTE310
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
1-11
Section 1 Introduction
Platinum VAX-C Series
depending on the modulation standard. See section 3 for modulation dependent input
connector configurations. The modulation process is fully digital, with analog circuits
used after the D/A converter to up-convert the IF signal to the desired channel.
ATSC Modulator Status Screen
Transport Stream Indicators
Rear Panel Transport Stream
Input Connectors
Figure 1-5 Transport Stream Input Presence Indicators and Rear Panel Input Connectors
The VAX-C upconverter will produce an RF output that can be set to any VHF channel
and may be adjusted to any level up to 6dBm average power when operated in the
digital mode.
NOTE:
In a VAX-C transmitter, the adjusted output of the exciter will determine the
overall system output power. The output power of the exciter should not exceed
6dBm. The output power of the upconverter will vary depending on the desired
transmitter output power, as well as the gain of the PA(s) that are in the system.
The VAX-C can accept a 10 MHz external frequency standard input or a 1PPS (Pulse
Per Second) input via rear-panel, BNC, connectors. An SMA (female) GPS input is also
available. An external standard is used whenever the user requires increased frequency
precision, or a precise frequency offset. Use 1PPS or GPS input for SFN operation.
The VAX-C uses RTAC™ (Real Time Adaptive Correction) to monitor and manage
pre-correction for the transmitter system’s linear and nonlinear distortion. No manual
correction circuits are employed. Low power RF samples from various stages of the
transmitter are required by the RTAC circuits.
1-12
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Section 1 Introduction
Platinum VAX-C Series
1.10 VAX-C Specifications
NOTE:
Specifications subject to changed without notice. Unless otherwise noted, these
specifications apply at the output of a Harris supplied mask filter.
1.10.1 General Specifications
Table 1-4
General Specifications
Item
Specification
RF Output Frequency Range
VHF Band III, 168 to 242 MHz
ATSC A110
Single frequency network standard for ATSC
RF Input Samples for Adaptive
1 x SMA, 50 ohms; dynamic range: -20 to +5 dBm
Transport Stream Inputs
2 x BNC, 75 ohms terminated (50 ohms connector per ASI rec.),
configurable as SPMTE 310M, DVB-ASI, or DVB-T2MI
2 x BNC, 75 ohms terminated (50 ohms connector per ASI rec.),
additional for DVB-ASI hierarchical modulation
10 MHz Reference Input
1 x BNC, 50 ohms
1 PPS Reference Input
1 x BNC, 50 ohms/Hr-2
10 MHz Reference Output
1 x SMA, 50 ohms, front access
1 PPS Reference Output
1 x SMA, 50 ohms, front access
Ethernet
1 front, RJ-45, customer access
1 rear, RJ-45, DHCP enabled network interface (SNMP)
Parallel Remote Control
1 rear, user remote
1 rear, transmitter interface
Serial Connectivity
1 rear CAN interface
1 rear RS-232
GPS Antenna Input
1 x SMA, 50 ohms, rear access (option)
RF Monitor Output
1 x SMA, 50 ohms, front access
AC Power Input
Single Phase, 100 to 240 VAC, auto-ranging, +/-10%, 50/60 Hz
Power Factor
>0.95
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
1-13
Platinum VAX-C Series
Section 1 Introduction
Table 1-4
General Specifications
Item
Specification
Environmental
32° to 113° F (0° to 45° C) up to 6,560 ft (2,000 m) AMSL, de-rate 3.6° F
(2° C) per 984 ft (300 m) of elevation. 95% relative humidity, noncondensing
Physical (H X W x D)
2RU x 19" x 23" (2RU x 483 mm x 584 mm); 2RU= 3.5" (88.9 mm)
Weight
25 lbs (11.3 kg) excluding packing
Compliance
RoHS 2002/95/EC
R&TTE 1999/5/EC
Safety: EN 60215
EMC: EN 301-489-1
FCC Part 73, A/153
CE Marked
1-14
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Section 1 Introduction
Platinum VAX-C Series
1.10.2 COFDM Specifications
Table 1-5
COFDM Transmitter Specifications (DVB-T/T2, ISDB-T, CMMB)
Item
Specification
Power Output (before
filter)
50 W, 100 W
Output Power Reduction
0 dB to -10 dB
Power Stability
±0.5 dB
Shoulder Level
<-37 dB
MER
>34 dB
END
≤0.7dB
Frequency Stability
±150 Hz/month without PFC/GPS
<0.5 Hz per 1% supply variation
<50 Hz over ambient temperature range
<100 Hz at 5 minutes during warm up
Frequency Offsets 1
Any frequency within band plan, 1Hz increments
Standards
DVB-T: ETSI EN 300 744
DVB-T2: ETSI EN 302 755
ISDB-Tb: Brazil ANATEL standard
CTTB:
CMMB:
Response Variation
0.2 dB, typical
Phase Noise
10 Hz <-55 dBc/Hz
100 Hz <-85 dBc/Hz
1 kHz <-90 dBc/Hz
10 kHz <-95 dBc/Hz
100 kHz <-112 dBc/Hz
1 MHz <-130 dBc/Hz
Spurious Output
-60dB (after mask filter)
Spectrum Mask
Per standard. Filters for critical and non-critical mask available
Central Carrier
Suppression
>75 dB relative to average power
Note 1: High-stability external 10 MHz reference or optional built-in GPS required for SFN
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
1-15
Platinum VAX-C Series
Section 1 Introduction
1.10.3 ATSC Specifications
Table 1-6
ATSC Transmitter Specifications
Item
Specification
Power Output (before
filter)
40 W, 180 W
Output Power Reduction
0 dB to -10 dB
Power Stability
±0.5dB
Shoulder Level
<-35dB
EVM
>27dB (<4%)
Frequency Stability 1
±150 Hz/month without PFC/GPS
<0.5 Hz per 1% supply variation
<50 Hz over ambient temperature range
<100 Hz at 5 minutes during warm up
<±3Hz with internal or external GPS clock
Frequency Offsets
Any frequency within band plan, 1Hz increments
Standards
ATSC: A/53 & A/110B
Input Bit Rate
19.39 Mbit/s
Response Variation
0.2 dB, typical
Phase Noise
<-104 dBc/Hz @ 20kHz offset (ATSC A/64)
Spurious Output
Meets FCC 5th and 6th report and order
Spectrum Mask
Per ATSC standard
Note 1: High-stability external 10 MHz reference or optional built-in GPS required for SFN
1-16
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Section 1 Introduction
Platinum VAX-C Series
1.10.4 DAB/DMB Specifications
Table 1-7
DAB/DMB Transmitter Specifications
Item
Specification
Power Output (before
filter)
75 W, 150 W
Output Power Reduction
0 dB to -10 dB
Power Stability
±0.25 dB
MER
DAB/DMB (OFDM) ETSI TR101 496-1
25 dB MER prior to optional mask filter.
Frequency Stability
<5x10-10 per day (OCXO aging)
Standards
DAB ETSI EN 302077
Response Variation
0.2 dB, typical
Phase Noise
10 Hz <-55 dBc/Hz
100 Hz <-85 dBc/Hz
1 kHz <-90 dBc/Hz
10 kHz <-95 dBc/Hz
100 kHz <-112 dBc/Hz
1 MHz <-130 dBc/Hz
Harmonics/Spurious Output
Complies with EN 302077-2 when used in conjunction with filter
having following attenuation specifications:
Critical mask:
fc +/- < 768 kHz: < 1.0 dB
fc +/- 970 kHz: > 15 dB
fc +/- 1.75 MHz: > 45 dB
fc +/- > 3 MHz: > 45 dB
fc +/- > 10 MHz: > 50 dB
Non-critical mask: fc +/- < 768 kHz: < 1.0 dB
fc +/- 970 kHz: > 0 dB
fc +/- 1.75 MHz: > 15 dB
fc +/- > 3 MHz: > 45 dB
fc +/- > 10 MHz: > 50 dB
Shoulder before filter: 35 dB min., >36-40 dB typical
(compensated). Mask specification is dependent on output power
of transmitter per EN303077-2.
ETI Inputs/Outputs
BNC-female 75 ohm. 2x ETI(NA, G704) resp. 2 x ETI(NI, G703) seamless input
signal switch-over automatic. ETI(NI) select.2.048 Mb/s, unbalanced / balanced
with optional 2 Mb adaptor.
GPS Input
SMA-female, 50 ohm, 1.57542 GHz, -130 to -100 dBm. (+5 V DC @ 100 mA
max output for active antenna)
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
1-17
Platinum VAX-C Series
Section 1 Introduction
Table 1-7
DAB/DMB Transmitter Specifications
Item
Specification
1 pps input
BNC-female, 50 ohm (high Z), TTL level
Reference Frequency Input
SMA-female, 50 ohm, 0.1/0.5/1/2.048/5/10 MHz, -7 to + 15 dBm
Monitoring Outputs
- ETI OUT
- ETI-frame
- RF monitor (low power stage)
- 1 Hz (1 pps signal)
- Reference frequency 10 MHz
- Incident and reflected signal Tx output (optional)
1-18
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Platinum VAX-C Series
Section 2
Installation /
Initial Turn-On
2.1
2
Introduction
This section includes the information necessary for installation and initial turn on of a
Platinum VAX-C, solid state, air cooled, VHF TV transmitter. Due to the modular
nature of the VAX-C, all models have similar installation and testing procedures.
2.2
Unpacking
Upon receipt of the transmitter shipment, carefully unpack the transmitter and perform
a visual inspection to ensure that no apparent damage was incurred during shipment.
Retain the shipping materials until it has been determined that the unit is not damaged.
The contents of the shipment should be as indicated on the packing list. If the contents
are incomplete or if the unit is damaged electrically or mechanically, notify the carrier
and Harris Corporation, Broadcast Division.
2.3
Returns and Exchanges
Damaged or undamaged equipment should not be returned unless written approval and
a Return Authorization is received from HARRIS CORPORATION, Broadcast
Division. Special shipping instructions and coding will be provided to assure proper
handling. Complete details regarding circumstances and reasons for return are to be
included in the request for return. Custom equipment or special order equipment is not
returnable. In those instances where return or exchange of equipment is at the request of
the customer, or convenience of the customer, a restocking fee will be charged. All
returns will be sent freight prepaid and properly insured by the customer. When
communicating with Harris Corporation, Broadcast Division, specify the Harris Order
Number or Invoice Number.
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
2-1
Platinum VAX-C Series
Section 2 Installation / Initial Turn-On
2.4
Documentation
The following is a list of documentation that ships with the transmitter. Find and save
all documentation.
A Document Package includes:
1. Technical manual
2. Drawing Package with a set of applicable system level schematics for the
transmitter system
3. Application notes and manuals for ancillary equipment may be packed
individually with system components.
2.4.1
Technical Manual and Drawings
Review the technical manual and drawing package to become familiar with installation
and planning information provided there.
Table 2-1
2-2
Platinum VAX-C System Drawings
Drawing Title
Drawing Number
Drawing Package
917-2323-235
Wiring Diagram, VAX-CC
843-5618-002
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Platinum VAX-C Series
2.5
Section 2 Installation / Initial Turn-On
Installation
NOTE:
This equipment is intended only for installation in a RESTRICTED ACCESS
LOCATION.
Steps in the installation section are numbered in each section. As each step is
completed, the step number can be circled to indicate completion. This provides a quick
confidence check at the end of the procedure that no steps were skipped.
NOTE:
In case of discrepancy between the connections listed in diagrams versus information given in this installation section, the wiring information in the diagrams
should be considered the most accurate. All connections listed in this section
should be verified with the schematics before initial turn on.
When performing the installation, after the transmitter is in place, plan to run the
transmitter output transmission lines first, then the air cooling system components (if
ducting is used), and finally the electrical conduit runs.
NOTE:
If air handling duct work is to be installed, plan all of the RF and conduit runs to
leave room for the duct work.
The reason for this installation order is that rigid coax runs need to be installed using
minimum elbows. Installation of RF lines is more complicated if obstacles like conduit,
and ductwork are in place. The RF lines should have a minimum number of elbows for
best performance.
NOTE:
RF coaxial lines must be properly supported.
2.5.1
Transmitter Placement and Operating Environment
The selection of a proper installation location is essential for equipment longevity and
reliability. Do not install the transmitter in places where it may be exposed to
mechanical shocks, excessive vibration, dust, water, or acidic gas.
Ambient temperature and relative humidity should always range between the following
limits at the installation location:
•
•
5/9/13
Ambient temperature: 0 to +45oC. (0 to +40oC. for UL 60950)
Relative humidity:
0 to 90% non-condensing
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
2-3
Section 2 Installation / Initial Turn-On
Platinum VAX-C Series
NOTE:
Failure to follow these installation instructions may void the warranty.
The transmitter should be placed where it will have adequate room to access the front
and rear panels. There are several drawings included in the drawing package to help
plan the transmitter placement:
STEP 1
Open the box and remove the packing material that surrounds the
transmitter.
STEP 2
Place the transmitter in position.
2.5.2
Rack Mounting Components
In many instances, VAX-C transmitter components will ship without a mounting rack.
The transmitter may be installed in customer supplied equipment racks. In these
instances, it is the customer’s responsibility to properly support and mount the
equipment in the racks. Equipment installed in racks must be properly installed on
shelves or use brackets that safely and adequately support the weight of the equipment.
!
WARNING:
EQUIPMENT RACKS AND TRANSMITTER COMPONENTS MUST BE PROPERLY
GROUNDED. SEE 2.6.3 ON PAGE 2-5 AND 2.6.4 ON PAGE 2-7 FOR GROUNDING
DETAILS.
2-4
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Platinum VAX-C Series
2.6
Section 2 Installation / Initial Turn-On
Transmitter AC and Ground Connections
NOTE:
AC connections will be similar across all Platinum VAX-C models. Be sure to
verify all connections using the correct schematic drawings.
The VAX-C does not have an AC ON/OFF switch. Power is applied to the unit by
plugging an energized power cord into the AC connector (IEC C15) on the back of the
unit. All VAX-C power levels will operate over a voltage range of 100 - 240VAC, 50-60
Hz, and is auto ranging.
2.6.1
Surge Suppression Devices
Harris strongly recommends the use of surge protection devices on the incoming AC
mains lines. These devices protect against damages due to transients arising from both
natural and man-made sources. (e.g. lightning and inductive load switching). Clear
preference is to be given to “series” type surge protection devices -- featuring protection
by both a series inductance / shunt capacitor filter and shunt threshold device -- over
simple shunt-only clamping devices. The surge protector must be sized to handle the
full amperage of the load it is protecting (plus a nominal safety margin) and be
connected to the building ground system by short, direct connections. In the case where
the shunt protection elements are protected by a fuse, it is necessary to periodically
check the integrity of the fuse to ensure continued transient protection.
2.6.2
Voltage Regulation
If voltage variations in excess of +/-10% are anticipated, the transmitter power input
must be equipped with automatic voltage regulators (optional equipment) capable of
correcting the mains voltage.
2.6.3
Safety Ground
The VAX-C stand-alone transmitter is equipped with a safety ground lug connection on
the rear panel just below the AC connection (see Figure 2-1). This safety ground should
be connected to the site ground system.
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
2-5
Section 2 Installation / Initial Turn-On
Platinum VAX-C Series
Figure 2-1 VAX-C Safety Ground Connection (without rack)
A safety ground wire is required for each AC mains input and they should be connected
to the station ground system.
In instances where the VAX-C is installed in customer or harris supplied racks each
component should have a safety ground connection to the rack.
2-6
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Platinum VAX-C Series
2.6.4
Section 2 Installation / Initial Turn-On
Cabinet Ground Strap
Connect a ground strap from the cabinet's copper ground buss bar (shown in Figure 2-2)
to the station ground. The copper strap must be at least 5cm wide and 0.5mm thick. To
prevent ground loops, do not connect this strap to the ground of another piece of
equipment, but instead, connect directly to the main station ground system.
Connect Ground
Strap Here and to
Station Ground
Figure 2-2 Typical Cabinet Ground Strap Connection
2.6.5
!
Connecting AC Power
CAUTION:
CHECK THE AC POWER THAT WILL FEED THE VAX-C. IT MUST BE BETWEEN 100
VAC AND 240 VAC +/-10%. ANY VOLTAGE OUTSIDE THIS RANGE WILL CAUSE
DAMAGE TO THE EQUIPMENT. THE VOLTAGE SHOULD BE MEASURED LINE TO
LINE, OR IF A NEUTRAL IS USED, LINE TO NEUTRAL.
!
WARNING:
AN EXTERNAL CIRCUIT PROTECTION DEVICE (BREAKER OR FUSE) IS REQUIRED
FOR EACH COMPONENT AC INPUT. THIS IS PROVIDED BY THE CUSTOMER IN
ACCORDANCE WITH THE AC INTERCONNECT DRAWING OR BY HARRIS IF AN INRACK AC DISTRIBUTION CHASSIS IS PURCHASED (OPTIONAL). IN THE LATTER
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
2-7
Section 2 Installation / Initial Turn-On
Platinum VAX-C Series
CASE, AN EXTERNAL CIRCUIT PROTECTION DEVICE TO HANDLE THE ENTIRE
TRANSMITTER LOAD AT THE MAIN AC DISTRIBUTION POINT IS STILL REQUIRED,
IN ACCORDANCE WITH PREVAILING LOCAL SAFETY NORMS.
!
WARNING:
USER SHOULD NOT ALTER OR DISCONNECT ANY PROTECTION DEVICES.
!
CAUTION:
WHEN THE SINGLE PHASE INPUTS TO THE TRANSMITTER ARE DERIVED FROM A
WYE (STAR) MAINS SERVICE, SPECIAL CARE MUST BE PAID TO THE NEUTRAL
CONNECTION, AS THE NEUTRAL CONNECTION SERVES AS THE COMMON VOLTAGE REFERENCE TO ALL THREE PHASES. SHOULD THE NEUTRAL CONNECTION
BREAK, THE LINE-TO-LINE VOLTAGE OF EACH PHASE WILL BECOME UNSTABLE
AND INVARIABLY RESULT IN SEVERE DAMAGE TO ALL LOADS FROM AN OVERVOLTAGE CONDITION. ACCORDINGLY, ALL NEUTRAL CONNECTIONS SHOULD BE
DOUBLE CHECKED FOR INTEGRITY, ESPECIALLY WHEN MODULAR MAINS
DISONNECT PLUGS ARE IN USE. NEVER ALLOW THE NEUTRAL TO BE BROKEN
BEFORE THE INVIDUAL LINE CONNECTIONS. THIS RECOMMENDATION HOLDS
FOR ALL SINGLE-PHASE EQUIPMENT WITH A 380-415V WYE-DERIVED FEED, NOT
JUST THE HARRIS VAX TRANSMITTER.
!
STEP 1
Confirm presence of safety ground wire connection as shown in Figure
2-1.
STEP 2
Unplug the AC power connector from the rear of the VAX-C.
STEP 3
Activate the AC mains supplying the AC power connector.
STEP 4
Use an AC voltmeter to confirm the AC voltage. It should stable and
between 100 and 240VAC.
STEP 5
After confirming the voltage on the connector, plug it in to the VAX-C
rear IEC15 port. The AC connector is shown in Figure 2-1.
STEP 6:
The LCD and the LEDs on the front panel should light.
CAUTION:
DO NOT PRESS THE TRANSMITTER FRONT PANEL ON BUTTON UNTIL THE RF
CONNECTIONS DEFINED IN Section 2.10 HAVE BEEN MADE.
2-8
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Section 2 Installation / Initial Turn-On
Platinum VAX-C Series
2.7
Signal and Sample Connections
This section contains descriptions of signal and sample connections on the rear of the
VAX-C transmitter.
Figure 2-3 VAX-C Rear Panel
2.7.1
Table 2-2
Connection
GPS
(SMA)
Rear Panel Connections
Rear Panel Connections
Description
GPS antenna input to the internal GPS receiver. Provides +5 VDC at 0.15
Amps maximum for an amplified GPS antenna. GPS receiver normal
signal input level is -130 dBm to -100 dBm, its antenna input impedance
is 50 ohms, and its center frequency is 1.57542 GHz.
POST-FILTER
(SMA)
RTAC RF input signal connector for an RF sample from output of high
power filter. It is used by RTAC ™ (Real Time Adaptive Correction) to
correct for the linear distortions of the output filter. Normal input signal
range is -20 to +5 dBm. The input impedance is 50 ohms.
RS232
Female 9 Pin D sub connector. It is used to communicate with various
computer applications.
CAN
Female 9 Pin D sub connector. This connector is used for the CAN
(Controller Area Network) interface to some transmitters.
1 PPS INPUT
BNC, female connector is the one pulse per second input from an external
GPS receiver. This is a TTL pulse which is typically 100 nsec wide, and
is read at the leading edge. Accuracy requirement is 15 nsec.
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
2-9
Platinum VAX-C Series
Section 2 Installation / Initial Turn-On
Table 2-2
Connection
Rear Panel Connections
Description
10MHZ REF INPUT
BNC, female connector is the (optional) 10 MHz reference frequency
input. It is used when precise control of the exciter’s pilot frequency is
required. Normal signal input range is -10 to +10 dBm. The input
impedance is 50 ohms.
USER REMOTE
25 pin, female, D sub connector. See pinout in Table 2-3 below.
TRANSMITTER
INTERFACE
25 pin male D sub connector. See pinout in Table 2-4 below.
TS LOOP OUT
Female BNC connector is an output sample of the on the air ASI or
SMPTE signal
10/100 Base T
RJ45 connector is the rear panel Ethernet connector. This connector can
be set to the DHCP mode.
RF Out
50 ohm, type N, female connector. RF output up to 50 W depending on
model.
2-10
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Platinum VAX-C Series
2.7.2
Section 2 Installation / Initial Turn-On
User Remote Connector
This 25 pin female connector is labeled ’User Remote’ and located on the rear panel. It
can be used for remote control and monitoring on standalone transmitters (non-racked
systems).
Table 2-3
Rear Panel, ’User Remote’ Connector
1
Signal
Forward Power
2
Reflected Power
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Spare Analog In 1
Spare Analog In 2
+12Vdc
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
Alarm O Common
Alarm 0 Normally Closed
13
Alarm 0 Normally Open
14
15
Alarm 1 Common
Alarm 1 Normally Closed
16
Alarm 1 Normally Open
17
18
Alarm 2 Common
Alarm 2 Normally Closed
19
Alarm 2 Normally Open
20
21
Alarm 3 Common
Alarm 3 Normally Closed
22
Alarm 3 Normally Open
23
24
Alarm 4 Common
Alarm 4 Normally Closed
25
Alarm 4 Normally Open
5/9/13
User Remote - 25 Pin Female
Direction
Description
Output
0 – 4.096VDC output representing
Forward power level
Output
0 – 4.096VDC output representing
reflected power level
Input
Input
+12Vdc, 200mA max
Output
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Alarm 0 Relay Common
Alarm 0 Relay Normally Closed
(Faulted) Position
Alarm 0 Relay Normally Open (NonFaulted) Position
Alarm 1 Relay Common
Alarm 1 Relay Normally Closed
(Faulted) Position
Alarm 1 Relay Normally Open (NonFaulted) Position
Alarm 2 Relay Common
Control I/O Assignment
Analog Output 0
Analog Output 1
Analog Input 2
Analog Input 3
Alarm 2 Relay Normally Closed
(Faulted) Position
Alarm 2 Relay Normally Open (NonFaulted) Position
Alarm 3 Relay Common
Alarm 3 Relay Normally Closed
(Faulted) Position
Alarm 3 Relay Normally Open (NonFaulted) Position
Alarm 4 Relay Common
Alarm 4 Relay Normally Closed
(Faulted) Position
Alarm 4 Relay Normally Open (NonFaulted) Position
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
2-11
Section 2 Installation / Initial Turn-On
Platinum VAX-C Series
NOTE:
The alarms noted in the above table report the following functions and are
mapped to the Front Panel LEDs as follows:
2-12
•
Alarm 0: Output/Mute (If either Output or Mute LED is RED or ORANGE,
Alarm is Faulted.)
•
•
Alarm 1: System (If System LED is RED or ORANGE, Alarm is Faulted.)
Alarm 2: Power Supply (If Power Supply LED is RED or ORANGE, Alarm
is Faulted.)
•
Alarm 3: Drive Chain/Power Amp (If either Drive Chain or Power Amp
LED is RED or ORANGE, Alarm is Faulted.)
•
Alarm 4: TS Input (If TS Input LED is RED or ORANGE, Alarm is
Faulted.)
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Section 2 Installation / Initial Turn-On
Platinum VAX-C Series
2.7.3
Transmitter Interface Connector
The 25 pin, male, connector is labeled Transmitter Interface and located on the VAX-C
rear panel. It can be used for remote control and monitoring on standalone transmitters.
Table 2-4
Rear Panel, ’Tx Interface’ Connector
1
2
3
4
5
6
Signal
/Power Raise
/Power Lower
TX On
/TX Off
Not Used
/RF Mute Command
7
8
9
/Sum Fault
/RF Mute Status
/UPS Shutdown
LPU TX Interface Connector -25 Pin Male
Direction Description,
Input
Power Raise Command
Input
Power Lower Command
Transmitter On Command
Input
Transmitter
Off Command
Input
Input
Input
RF Mute Command
Output
Output
Input
Summary Fault Status
RF Mute Status
Disables battery backup functionality
10 /EQ Reset
Input
11 EQ/Hold
Input
12 Not Used
13 Not Used
14 Not Used
15 /RF Present
Input
Input
Input
Output
Resets adaptive correction tables to
default
Holds current adaptive correction
tables
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Output
Input
Input
Input
Output
Output
On/Off Status
/Remote Fault Reset
Not Used
Not Used
Exciter/LPU Sum Flt
Remote Enable/Disable
GND
GND
GND
GND
5/9/13
Indicates that the exciter RF output is
valid
Transmitter On/Off Status
Restrike Command
Exciter LPU Summary Fault Status
Remote Control Status
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Control I/O Assignment
I/O Bus 0
I/O Bus 1
I/O Bus 2
I/O Bus 3
I/O Bus 4
Indirectly to Signal Processing board
I/O Bus 5
I/O Bus 6
Indirectly to Signal Processing board
I/O Bus 16
I/O Bus 7
Analog Input 0
Analog Input 1
I/O Bus 8
I/O Bus 9
I/O Bus 10
I/O Bus 11
I/O Bus 12
I/O Bus 13
I/O Bus 14
I/O Bus 15
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
2-13
Section 2 Installation / Initial Turn-On
2.7.4
Platinum VAX-C Series
TS (Transport Stream) Connections
The TS input connectors are type BNC, female. TS input connector impedances are 75
ohms. Belden 8281 or similar high-quality video cable can be used to deliver this signal
to the VAX-C over a distance of up to 1000 feet.
Figure 2-4 Rear TS & Ethernet Connections
Table 2-5
TS Inputs
Connector Label
ATSC
DVBT/CTTB/CMMB/
ISDBT
DVBT Hierarchial
1
ASI Primary
ASI Primary
ASI High Priority Primary
2
ASI Auxiliary
ASI Auxiliary
ASI High Priority Auxiliary
LP 1
SMPTE Primary
Not used
ASI Low Priority Primary
LP2
SMPTE Auxiliary
Not used
ASI Low Priority Auxiliary
2.8
External Interlock
Due to VAX-C output power levels, an external interlock is not currently provided. If an
external interlock is required, please contact Harris.
2.9
Cooling System
The VAX-C contains two 12V fans in the front of the unit. The front panel contains
washable filter material which should be in place when the unit is operating.
2-14
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Platinum VAX-C Series
Section 2 Installation / Initial Turn-On
The front panel can be removed for maintenance while the transmitter is operating but
the panel should be in place during normal operation. The 12Vdc fans can be changed
while the transmitter is operating. See Section 5.7 on page 5-23 for replacement
instructions.
NOTE:
Prior to start-up, the cooling fans should be visually checked to make sure there
are no obstructions.
Job site environmental conditions should be evaluated periodically to assure filter
cleanliness. Schedule maintenance activities to accommodate changing environmental
conditions at the site. See Section 5.8 on page 5-24 for instructions on cleaning filters.
NOTE:
Special note concerning stand alone units: Rack selection is key to maintaining
proper cooling of stand alone units. To provide proper cooling, a rack with ample
venting through the front and rear doors should e selected to ensure proper air
flow from the front and rear of the rack.
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
2-15
Section 2 Installation / Initial Turn-On
Platinum VAX-C Series
2.10 RF Connections
2.10.1 RF Output
Prior to operation the transmitter RF output connector must be connected to a known
good test load or antenna with a high quality 50 ohm RF cable. A patch panel may also
be used if switching between load and antenna is desired.
A type N male connector is needed for the transmitter output side of the cable. The
VAX-C output connection is located on the rear panel see Section Figure 2-5 on page 217. The connector needed for the load, filter or antenna end of the cable may vary
depending on the customer’s system. Initial testing into a 50 ohm test load is
recommended. VSWR (voltage standing wave ratio) of the test load should be <1.05:1,
antenna system <1.2:1, and filter <1.1:1. The VAX-C will operate into a VSWR of 1.5:1
maximum but a lower system VSWR is recommended for reliable operation.
2.10.2 RF Sample Connections and Level
An RTAC post-filter RF feedback signal is required for RTAC to perform linear
precorrection. If the unit is running in RTAC stored mode then this post-filter sample is
not required.. The RF sample input connector is located on the VAX-C rear panel and
shown in Figure 2-5. The feedback sample is taken from the directional coupler located
after the system mask filter. If no mask filter is used or required then the feedback
should be via a coupler at the output of the system. The coupler can be ordered from
Harris as an option. If the transmitter system is a 1+1 (main/standby) configuration,
feedback samples for each transmitter are obtained by splitting the post filter sample
cable.
With the transmitter operating at full TPO the post-filter RTAC sample signals at the
VAX-C input should be padded to yield a nominal 0 to -5 dBm at the highest expected
transmitter output power. The post filter sample input power range is -20 to +5 dBm.
2-16
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Platinum VAX-C Series
Section 2 Installation / Initial Turn-On
Figure 2-5 VAX-C RF Connections
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
2-17
Section 2 Installation / Initial Turn-On
Platinum VAX-C Series
2.11 Transmitter Power Up
The VAX-C transmitter is now ready to produce RF power. The critical setup steps have
been performed. Some additional setup may be required to setup transport stream
handling, set RTAC states, system references, etc.
If valid transport streams are not present RF output may be inhibited for DVB-T
systems. In that case, the user must connect to the transmitter with a PC and web
browser in order to activate the PRBS test mode in the modulation setup pages.
Other modulation types do not require a valid TS to produce output as long as the
modulator settings are correct. This procedure does not attempt to describe modulator
settings (web browser Setup screens) that need to be set for the various modulation
types. For more detailed setup instructions refer to the transmitter technical manual
(section three).
The initial transmitter power up is as follows:
STEP 1
!
Refer to information provided above to confirm that grounding, AC
power, signal inputs, load or antenna hook-up and initial setup steps
have been performed.
CAUTION:
THE VAX-C TRANSMITTER MUST BE CONNECTED TO A KNOWN GOOD LOAD OR
ANTENNA BEFORE TURNING IT ON.
2-18
STEP 2
Disconnect the post-filter RF sample line at the VAX-C rear panel.
STEP 3
Press the Power menu button below the LCD screen to display the
forward and reflected power levels.
STEP 4
Press the ON button on the transmitter front panel to activate RF power.
STEP 5
Press the Raise button on the front panel to slowly increase the
transmitter power to full TPO while monitoring forward and reflected
levels on the LCD Power screen.
STEP 6
Check the RF power level at the post filter RF sample line where they
connect to the transmitter rear panel.
STEP 7
Use pads to set the level within the -20 to +5 dBm range (-5dbm optimal)
STEP 8
Connect the post filter RF sample line at the rear panel of the VAX-C
transmitter.
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Section 2 Installation / Initial Turn-On
Platinum VAX-C Series
STEP 9
Use the LCD screen and control buttons to set RTAC to Adapt mode.
Navigate to Setup>Adaptive>Power on LIN and set to Adapt. Navigate
to Setup>Adaptive>Power on NON-LIN and set to Adapt.
STEP 10
It may take a few minutes for RTAC to adapt and correct the signal.
STEP 11
End of procedure.
2.12 Battery Backup Activation
Units that ship with the optional battery backup (UPS) system installed will have a
connector/jumper installed on the Tx Interface connector on the UAX-C chassis rear
panel.
Figure 2-6 Battery Backup (UPS) Jumper
Once the transmitter has been placed into service the battery backup connector/jumper
can be removed to activate the battery backup (UPS) system. Retain the connector/
jumper for future use should the transmitter be placed in storage or shipped to another
location.
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
2-19
Section 2 Installation / Initial Turn-On
2-20
Platinum VAX-C Series
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Platinum VAX-C Series
Section 3
Operation
3.1
3
Transmitter Control
This section gives detailed operational information for the Platinum VAX-C Series
Solid-State VHF TV transmitter. Information pertains to the operation and navigation of
the front panel controls and the web interface.
The VAX-C can be operated from the LCD control panel on the front of the unit or with
the web browser interface which is accessed via computer. The LCD and control
buttons on the front of the unit can be used to control and monitor most transmitter
operations. However, in order to control the modulation settings a computer must be
connected to the VAX-C’s front or rear RJ45 ethernet connector. The computer can be
connected directly (front panel connection) or via a network connection to the rear
panel.
The web browser interface can be used either remotely if the VAX-C is connected to a
network or locally by connecting to the RJ45 Ethernet port on the rear of the VAX-C.
Simply enter the IP address of the VAX-C into the web browser. The IP address can be
found either at the bottom of the LCD Power screen or by navigating to the Setup >
Remote Comms screen on the LCD.
The default user name is admin. The default password is admin.
The ethernet port on the front of the VAX-C can also be used, but it has a fixed IP
address which is 192.168.117.88. See Section 5.12.4, Connection Via Front Ethernet
Connector, on page 5-34 for additional information on VAX-C Ethernet connections.
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
3-1
Section 3 Operation
3.1.1
Platinum VAX-C Series
Transmitter Control Panel
The VAX-C transmitter front control panel is shown in Figure 3-1. It contains an LCD
screen, control buttons and LED’s.
Figure 3-1 VAX-C Front Panel.
Table 3-1
Front Panel Control Buttons
Field
Explanation
STATUS
Displays the Status Menu.
POWER
Displays model number, forward/reflected power levels and allows
selection of linear and non-Linear correction - Stored, Adapt, Hold or
Bypass.
SETUP
Displays the set-up menus on the LCD.
UP/DOWN/LEFT/
RIGHT
Used for LCD menu navigation. The up and down buttons are used to
move the arrow cursor, which indicates the menu line that will be
activated by pressing the black enter button. The left button is primarily
used as a back button to return to a previous menu selection.
ENTER
This is the black button in the center of the UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT
buttons. Used to select or expand LCD menu items.
REMOTE ENABLE/
DISABLE
Enables or disables remote control of the transmitter.
Enable: The transmitter system can be remotely controlled by either the user
parallel interface or the remote web interface.
Disable: The transmitter will only respond to local commands issued from the
various front panel controls.
POWER RAISE/
LOWER
3-2
Pressing raise will increase RF power output. Lower decreases power
output.
Caution: There may be a slight lag in system power level response time. Holding
buttons in may cause undesired overshoots.
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
NOTE:
Neither the feature key nor the modulation settings can be changed using the
LCD interface. These settings can only be changed with the web browser interface.
3.1.2
LCD Menus
LCD menu trees can be found below in Figures 3-2 Power, 3-3 Status, & 3-4 Setup.
Web screens are organized in a similar fashion.
VAX90MHC(ModelNumber)
FORWARD90W(ForwardPower)
RFLD23mW(ReflectedPower)
LINEARADAPT(LinearCorrection:Adapt/Bypass/Hold/Stored)
NONLINEARADAPT(NonlinearCorrection:Adapt/Bypass/Hold/Stored)
IP:XX.XX.XX.XX(LPURearIPAddress)
Figure 3-2 VAX-C LCD Power Menu
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
3-3
Section 3 Operation
ON-AIR DATA
DIG SIGNAL PATH
PFRU (PLL)
UP/DOWN CONVERTER
AMP
PA:
PA1:
PA VOLTAGE: 50V
OUTPUT:
FWD PWER: 50.0W
RFLD PWR: 0.0W
VSWR: 1.0:1
Platinum VAX-C Series
UPCONVERTER:
IF LEVEL: 757
RF LEVEL: 2484
DOWNCONVERTER:
PRE-FILTER LEVEL: 93%
POST FILTER LEVEL: 0%
LO:
LO LEVEL: 1.1 dBm
PFRU FPGA PROG: OK
PFRU COMM: OK
EXT 1PPS: N/A
EXT 10 MHz: N/A
INT 1PPS: OK
54 MHz CLOCK: OK
10 MHz CLOCK: OK
IF PLL LOCK: OK
RF PLL LOCK: OK
IF LO REF: 54MHz
GPS PWR: OK
#SAT DETECT: 9
LAT: N39.956
LONG: W91.364
GPS TIME: xx:xx:xx
MOD FPGA PROG: OK
MOD FPGA COMM: OK
MOD HPI: OK
DAC CLOCK: OK
MOD CLOCK: OK
MOD 4X CLOCK:OK
25 MHz: ClOCK: OK
54 MHz: CLOCK: OK
DUC FPGA PROG: OK
DUC FPGA COMM: OK
DUC INPUT BUF: OK
SRC BUF: OK
ADAPT DSP COM: OK
MOD FPGA: 40C
DUC FPGA: 47C
AMBIENT: 32C
+24VDC: +24.1V
+12VDC: +11.9V
+5VDC: +4.9V
+3.3VDC: +3.3V
+1.4VDC: +1.4V
LINEAR: OK
SUCCESS: 0
ATTEMPT: 0
NON-LINEAR: OK
SUCCESS: 0
ATTEMPT: 0
LSB: xx dB
USB:xx dB
SNR: 0 dB
EVM: 0 %
-12VDC: -12.1V
BATTERY BACK-UP
TRANSMITTER I/O
REVISIONS
SOFTWARE:
BUILD VERSION:
HARDWARE:
MICROBRD:
SIGBRD:
PFRU BRD:
AMP CTRL BRD:
BASE I/O BRD:
UDC2 BRD:
FP BRD:
TX IO BRD:
FAULT LOG
F/W, DESC, DATE, TIME
APPLICATION:
GUI:
BOOTLOADER:
DSP:
MOD FPGA:
DUC FPGA:
PFRU FPGA:
EXP FPGA:
FP FPGA:
SIG CPLD:
AMP CTRL CPLD:
AMP CTRL CPLD:
TX IO CPLD:
INP OPT CPLD:
TCU PRESENT: INACTIVE
RF MUTE: INACTIVE
RTAC RESET: INACTIVE
RTAC HOLD: INACTIVE
XMTR ON: INACTIVE
XMTR OFF: ACTIVE
RESTRIKE COMMAND: INACTIVE
BATBACKUP: NONE
BAT DISABLED: NO
BAT EXPIRED: NO
REMAINING DISCHARGE: 0%
UPS VERSION: xx
EXPIRATION: xx
+12VDC BAT: +12.1V
Figure 3-3 VAX-C LCD Status Menu
3-4
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
SYSTEM SETTINGS
ADAPTIVE
XMTR POWER SETTINGS
FWD POWER REF: 50W
%OFFWDPOWERREF:100%
FWD POWER THRESH.: 40W
MAXFWDPOWER:50
NOMINAL POWER : 50W
RF MUTE: DISABLE
F/B THRESHOLD: 4%
F/B MAX: 100%
POWER CAL: FACTORY FWD/RFLD
PFRU (PLL)
REMOTE COMMS
DEFAULTS
RESTORE FACTORY: NO
RE-INIT MOD FPGA: NO
POWER ON LIN: ADAPT
POWER ON NON-LIN: ADAPT
LIN PROFILE: BASIC
NON-LIN PROFILE: BASIC
STORED FILTER SET: 1
FILTER SET TITLE: SET 1
REAR MAC ADDRESS: xx-xx-xx-xx
REAR MODE: DHCP
REAR IP ADDRESS: xx.xx.xx.xx
REAR GATEWAY: xx.xx.xx.xx
REAR SUBNET MASK: xx.xx.xx.xx
FRONT MAC ADDRESS:
FRONT IP ADDRESS: 192.168.117.88
RS232 BAUD RATE: 115200
RS232 DATA BITS: 8
RS232 PARITY: NONE
RS232 STOP BITS: 1
CAN EXCITER ID: A
CAN BAUD RATE: 250 kHz
DATE: MM/DD/YYYY
TIME: HH:MM:SSAM/PM
FEATURE KEY: 16 digits
DRIVER MODE: MASTER
CENTER FREQ (MHz): 665
FREQ OFFSET (Hz): 0
SFN OFFSET (Hz): 0
NEW CTR FREQ (Hz): 665000000
SYSTEM REFERENCE: MANUAL
DISCIPLINE REF: 59.5%
MUTE UNDISCIPLINED: ENABLE
Figure 3-4 VAX-C LCD Setup Menu
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
3-5
Section 3 Operation
3.1.3
Platinum VAX-C Series
Front Panel LEDs
Table 3-2 provides information on the front panel LEDs. Additional information on
LEDs and the faults that activate them are given in the fault tables in Section 6.3.
Table 3-2
Status LEDs
Status LEDs
States
Explanation
TS INPUT
Green = OK
Amber/Yellow = Warning
Red = Fault
Represents the availability of the Transport Stream
input data to the Modulator. The behavior of the TS
INPUT LED varies with modulation standard.
DRIVE CHAIN
Green = OK
Amber/Yellow = Warning
Red = Fault
Represents a summary status of the LPU PA Block.
i.e. The amplifier section occupying the lower half of
the LPU chassis.
POWER AMP
Green = OK
Amber/Yellow = Warning
Red = Fault
Off = N/A
Represents a summary status of the external PA
blocks 1-4. If no external PA blocks are present for
the current TX model, LED is OFF.
POWER SUPPLY
Green = OK
Red = Fault
Represents a summary status of the Signal Processor
Power Supplies (+24V, +12V, +5V, +3.3V, +1.4V, 12V).
3-6
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
Table 3-2
Status LEDs
OUTPUT
Status LEDs
States
Green = OK
Amber/Yellow = Warning
Red = Fault
Explanation
Represents the status of the RF output for the system.
When the transmitter is switched off, the OUTPUT
LED is either off or green, depending on the factory
system setup.
Green: The transmitter is switched on, and the RF
output level is greater than the FWD POWER
THRESH (also called FWD LOW PWR WARNING)
setting.
Yellow: The transmitter is switched on, but the RF
output level is below the FWD POWER THRESH
setting.
Red: The transmitter is switched on, but the RF
output is muted.
Note: In a dual system, the OUTPUT LED for the
inactive (reserve) LPU will be green if the unit is
switched on and not muted. The FWD POWER
THRESH threshold check is not applied to the
inactive LPU.
SYSTEM
Green = OK
Amber/Yellow = Warning
Red = Fault
Represents a summary status of the exciter subsystem
of the LPU. This includes the Signal Processor
(including the Modulator, DUC, RTAC) UDC,
Transmitter I/O Board, PFRU, Battery Backup, and
MCU.
MUTE
Green = OK
Red = Fault
Indicates that the transmitter is switched on, but the
RF output is presently muted.
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
3-7
Section 3 Operation
3.2
Platinum VAX-C Series
Xmtr Home Screen
The web browser interface is designed to provide complete control and monitoring of
the transmitter. The menu sections are described in this section of the manual.
Generally, the information found on the web browser screens can also be found on the
LCD menus.
NOTE:
Neither the feature key nor the modulation settings can be changed using the
LCD interface. These settings can only be changed with the web browser interface.
NOTE:
If remote control is disabled, navigation and monitoring using the web browser is
still possible, but transmitter control is not.With remote control enabled, navigation and control is accomplished via HTML web browser interface screens.
Figure 3-5 VAX-C Front Panel
Upon initial logon via a web browser, the full VAX-C front panel (see Figure 3-5) is
displayed. Status indicators displayed are: TS Input, Drive Chain, Power Amp, Power
Supply, Output, System, Mute, Remote Enabled. Colors indicate status: Green = OK.
Amber = Warning. Red = Error. ON and OFF soft keys are provided.
Using the recommended Firefox browser, increase the display size by pressing <ctrl>
and <+>. Buttons and areas that are selectable are indicated by a ’hand’ pointer on
mouse over.
The term ’Xmtr Home’ refers to the top level transmitter GUI (graphical user interface)
screen.
3-8
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
Figure 3-6 Xmtr Home Screen
Table 3-3
Xmtr Home Screen
Window
Description
LPU Sub Window
Exciter
Displays the Exciter Home screen which is the access point for exciter
settings, status and fault log screens.
Drv
Displays the LPU Driver and PA screen which gives amplifier FET
current, temperature and voltage.
Output
Displays the Output information screen which displays forward power,
reflected power and VSWR levels.
Softkeys
LPU PAs
Displays the LPU Driver and PA screen which gives amplifier FET
current, temperature and voltage.
Config
Displays System Configuration pages which allow set up of power level,
foldback thresholds and warnings.
Exciter Home
Displays the Exciter Home screen which is the access point for exciter
settings, status and fault log screens.
Each VAX-C web browser screen has a transmitter ON/OFF status icon at the upper left
as shown in Figure 3-6.
represents ON, and
represents OFF.
To the right of the ON/OFF icon, ’ON’, ’OFF’, ‘TEST’, or ’MUTE’ will be displayed.
The forward and reflected power bars are always visible at the top of each screen.
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
3-9
Section 3 Operation
3.2.1
Platinum VAX-C Series
Output Screen
Figure 3-7 Output Screen
Table 3-4
Xmtr Home>Output
Field
Explanation
Output Information Sub Window
Fwd Power
Output of transmitter in W.
Rfld Power
Reflected power in W.
VSWR
Voltage standing wave ratio.
Softkeys
Xmtr Home
Displays the Xmtr Home screen.
Exciter Home
Displays Exciter Home screen.
3-10
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
3.2.2
Amplifier Screen
The Amplifier screen can be accessed from the Xmtr Home page by pressing either the
Amp button on right or Amp icon in the LPU sub window. It contains amplifier status
and operational information.
Figure 3-8 Amplifier Screen
Table 3-5
Xmtr Home>LPU PAs
Window
Description
Amplifier Sub Window
Current
Displays the FET drain current in amps. Fault levels are 2 A for 75/50/90
W amp or 11 A for 150/100/180 W amp.
Temp
Displays the power amplifier board temperature level in degrees C. Fault
level is >85 C o . Clears when temp is <75 0 C
Voltage
38 to 52 V nominal. Faults at <32 and >54 Vdc.
Softkeys
Xmtr Home
Displays the Xmtr Home screen.
Exciter Home
Displays the Exciter Home screen which is the access point for exciter
settings, status and fault log screens.
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
3-11
Section 3 Operation
3.2.3
Platinum VAX-C Series
Configuration Screens
Figure 3-9 System Configuration Screens 1 & 2
Table 3-6
Field
Xmtr Home>Config
Explanation
Fwd Low Pwr
Warning
Set the minimum forward power in watts (W) below which a warning is
indicated. If the transmitter output power drops below this level, the forward
power bar and Output LED will turn yellow. This value must be lower than
Nominal power.
Fwd Low Pwr Alarm
Set the minimum forward power in watts (W) below which a fault is indicated.
If the transmitter output power drops below this level, the forward power bar
and Output LED will turn red. This value must be lower or equal to the FWD
Low PWR Warning.
Max Fwd Power
Set the maximum forward power in watts (W) above which a fault is indicated.
If the transmitter output power exceeds this level, the forward power bar will
turn Red. This value must be larger than the Nominal Power Output.
Nominal Power
Output
This entry sets the maximum level that the Fwd Power Reference can be set to
in watts (W), and also sets the 100% forward power bar level.
Actual Fwd Power
Ref
This field represents the actual power setting in the transmitter. The actual
power setting can be reduced from the Fwd Power Reference setting due to
any of the following reasons:
- The value of the % of Fwd Pwr Reference setting is less than 100%.
- Faulted PA components have reduced the maximum output power of the
system below the Fwd Pwr Reference setting.
- Transmitter is in power foldback state due to a high level of reflected power
at the transmitter output.
3-12
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
Table 3-6
Xmtr Home>Config
Field
Explanation
% of Fwd Pwr
Reference
Set the percentage of actual transmitter output power. (Valid range 0 - 100%)
If the Fwd Power Reference = 1000W, and the % of Fwd Pwr Reference =
75%, then the actual forward power reference will be 750W.
Fwd Power
Reference
Set the desired forward power of the transmitter in watts (W). The Fwd
Power Reference setting is limited by the Nominal Power Output setting, thus
the valid range for this control is 0 - Nominal Power Output (W).
Reflected Power F/B
This is the level of reflected power in watts (W) that if exceeded will activate
power foldback. (This is a status only field).
Foldback
Percentage that System Output Power is currently being folded back due to
presence of high reflected power conditions.
Foldback Threshold
(Fwd %)
This level represents the percentage of reflected power that can be tolerated
before initiating foldback. The level can be set from 1 to 4%. Four percent is
the maximum reflected power setting allowed (approximately 1.5:1 VSWR). A
reflected power level of 1% corresponds to a 1.22:1 VSWR. A system
foldback threshold setting of 4% means that reflected levels greater than 4%
would initiate a foldback of transmitter output power.
Maximum Foldback:
This is the maximum amount of foldback allowed. Maximum Foldback can be
set between 50 and 100%. Power foldback occurs when the Foldback
Threshold, described above, is reached or surpassed.
Foldback allows the transmitter power amplifier(s) to operate at a safe
(reduced) output power level when high VSWR conditions occur. A 100%
foldback level means the power out of the transmitter would be zero. A 50%
foldback level would reduce the transmitter output power to half power.
Foldback Release TC
(s):
This is the amount of time, in seconds, that the control system waits after
foldback is activated before attempting an output power increase step. The
range is 5-120 seconds.
Softkeys
Xmtr Home
Displays the Xmtr Home screen.
Cal
Displays calibration screen as shown in Figure 3-10.
Exciter Home
Displays the Exciter Home screen.
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
3-13
Section 3 Operation
3.2.4
Platinum VAX-C Series
System Calibration Screens
Refer to ’System Calibration’ screen shown in Figure 3-10. The Calibration screens
walks the user through the calibration procedure.
Figure 3-10 System Calibration Screen & Menu
Table 3-7
Field
Xmtr Home>Config>Cal
Explanation
Factory
Fwd/Rfld
Factory Fwd/Rfld calibrates the system forward and reflected power meter. Factory
calibration is used as a reference calibration across the VHF band. The factory forward
calibration is performed at 205 MHz (center of VHF band). This is a two point calibration
process that saves calibration points at a low calibration point (approximately 10dB down
from the transmitter model power) and a high calibration point (transmitter model power).
Field Fwd/
Rfld
The Field Fwd/Rfld calibration is used as an additional correction to the factory calibrations.
This is useful when the factory forward calibration is being used as a reference calibration,
and the user wants to “touch up” the system forward power meter upon a change in frequency
or permanent power level (e.g. upon installation if licensed TPO is significantly less than
transmitter nameplate power rating). The field calibration process is a one point calibration
(at the current FWD POWER REFERENCE setting). This also allows the user to perform
the field calibration without changing the current output power level of the transmitter.
Start Cal
The Start Cal soft button turns Green to indicate that calibration is active, and the adjust
output power window appears to walk the user through the low and high calibration points.
System Calibration is discussed in depth in Section 5.4 "Power Calibrations". Refer to that
section for the complete procedure
3-14
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
Table 3-7
Xmtr Home>Config>Cal
Field
Cal
Complete
Explanation
Once the user has completed all desired calibrations, the Cal Complete button MUST be
pressed to return the system to previous mode of operations.This will allow the system to
resume Auto power control mode. If the user does not press the Cal Complete button the
system will remain in Manual power control mode until navigating away from the Cal
screen.
Softkeys
Xmtr Home
Displays the Xmtr Home screen.
Setup
Pressing this soft key displays the Main ’Setup’ Screen in Figure 3-14 on page 3-21. This
screen accesses the various setup screens for the transmitter. See Section "3.4 SETUP
SCREENS, All Modulation Systems" on page 3-21
Exciter
Home
Displays Exciter Home screen.
NOTE:
The Transmitter must be ON prior to beginning any calibration.
When calibration is in process, the screen in Figure 3-11 will appear to allow
adjustments of the output power.
Figure 3-11 Home>Config>System Calibration Screen
The arrows on the left of the screen directly adjust the UDC RF attenuator DAC. (RF
DAC value displayed in top window) The single arrows will increase or decrease the
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
3-15
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
hex value by 0x0001 (1 decimal) increments. The double arrows will increase or
decrease the RF DAC hex value by 0x0010 increments (32 decimal).
Due to the delayed update rate of the web browser, the user should not rely on the RF
DAC Value displayed on the GUI to determine if power is being raised real time, as this
can cause undesired overshoots. Instead the user is advised to monitor their power
meter at all times while adjusting the output power.
The ADC value displayed represents the ADC detector reading corresponding to the
calibration type selected. (if calibration type = Factory Forward, the ADC value will
display the system forward power detector.)
Once the correct power is displayed on the external power meter, pressing the Save
button will advance the process to the next calibration point, or will complete the
calibration process. To cancel the calibration process without saving any data, select
Cancel.
NOTE:
Calibration can abort automatically if a fault condition is detected during the calibration process. If this occurs, an error message will be displayed to the user.
Calibration error conditions are outlined in Table 3-8.
System Calibration is discussed in depth in Section 5.4, Power Calibrations, on page
5-10. Refer to that section for the complete system power calibration procedure.
Table 3-8
Fault
Calibration Faults
Explanation
PA Fault Detected
There is a PA fault that is currently limiting the maximum available output
power of the transmitter. The fault condition must be cleared before
calibration can continue.
Invalid Detector
Values:
The low and high point ADC values saved are invalid. The ADC values are
considered valid if the following checks are met:
- Both Low and High point ADC values are between 0x000 to 0xFFF
- High point ADC value > Low Point ADC value
- High point ADC value – Low Point ADC value >= 50
Exciter RF Output
Level Fault
The UDC RF Output power level is at or above the UDC Output Power Limit
setting. The fault condition must be cleared before calibration can continue.
Transmitter OFF
The transmitter must be turned ON before calibration can continue.
3-16
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
3.3
Exciter Home Screen
Refer to Figure 3-12 on page 3-17 Exciter Home Screen. This screen gives access to the
basic command inputs, status outputs, output indications and chart graphics necessary
for the day-to-day operation of the VAX-C exciter section. Descriptions of the various
home screen sections are given in the following table.
The on air performance data comes from the post mask filter sample, and is not
switchable.
Figure 3-12 Exciter Home Screen
Table 3-9
Exciter Home Screen
Window
Description
Performance Sub Window
LSB
Lower sideband intermodulation product level, in dB, at the shoulder (first
0.25MHz into the lower adjacent channel) after the filter.
USB
Upper SideBand intermodulation product level, in dB, at the shoulder (first
0.25MHz into the Upper adjacent channel) after the post HPF.
SNR
Signal to noise ratio in dB (ATSC only, not shown in figure).
EVM
Error vector magnitude in % (ATSC only, not shown in figure).
Exciter Status Sub Window
205 000 000 Hz
5/9/13
Transmitter frequency in Hertz.
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
3-17
Section 3 Operation
Table 3-9
Platinum VAX-C Series
Exciter Home Screen
Window
Description
Main/Standby
This field indicates the on-air status. In a dual drive system, an active
transmitter will display Main (green field). The inactive exciter will display
Standby (in blue).
Mute/MUTE
This field indicates the mute status of the exciter section. If RF output is
muted, this field displays MUTE (uppercase, red field). If the output is not
muted, the field displays Mute (lowercase, green field). When the transmitter
is switched OFF, the MUTE field will be red.
OK/WARNING/
FAULT
This field indicates a summary status of the exciter section. If no warnings or
faults exist within the exciter section, the indication displays OK (green
field). When an exciter parameter approaches its limit, the fields displays
WARNING (yellow field). If a fault occurs within the exciter, the field
displays FAULT (red field).
RTAC Window The RTAC (Real Time Adaptive Correction) section of the Exciter Home Screen displays the
operating mode of the correctors. The RTAC section of the Exciter Home screen is a soft key. When selected by
left mouse click, the first screen of RTAC Setup is presented.
Linear
Corrector uses RF feedback sample taken after the high power filter. Used to
correct for filter distortions in amplitude and group delay. See Figure 2-5 on
page 2-17.
Nonlinear
Corrector uses RF feedback sample taken before the high power filter. Used to
correct for linearity and incidental phase distortion in the high power
amplification stages.
Linear and Nonlinear
Modes
Adapt: The correction algorithm is active and will continuously calculate and
update correction as needed.
Hold: The RTAC circuit keeps the last correction value for the selected
mode. This is a short term option. For long term use select Stored.
Stored: The RTAC circuit preloads a stored correction algorithm from one of
the stored Correction Sets. This represents a long term storage method.
Bypass: Turns the selected corrector off.
System Output Sub Window
Graph
Displays the spectrum response of the signal that is connected to the
transmitter post filter input on the back of the unit. See Figure 2-5 on page 217 for connection location.
Softkeys
Xmtr Home
Displays the Xmtr Home screen.
Setup
Pressing this soft key displays the Main ’Setup’ Screen in Figure 3-14 on page
3-21. This screen accesses the various setup screens for the transmitter. See
Section "3.4 SETUP SCREENS, All Modulation Systems" on page 3-21.
Status
Pressing this soft key displays the Main ’Status’ Screen in Figure 3-51 on
page 3-81. This screen accesses the various Status screens for the transmitter.
3-18
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Platinum VAX-C Series
Section 3 Operation
NOTE:
The LSB, USB, and in band intermodulation products are caused mainly by the
transmitter’s non-linear distortions due to poor power amplifier linearity and
phase distortion. They are mainly developed in the PA stage. If the amplifier is
substantially linear, the shoulders will be -36 dB or lower. As the non-linear distortions increase, the shoulder levels will rise above -36 dB. Unequal USB and
LSB shoulder levels indicate the presence of phase distortion.
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
3-19
Section 3 Operation
3.3.1
Platinum VAX-C Series
Fault Log screens
Refer to Fault Log -All Faults screen Figure 3-13 on page 3-20. Active warnings are
displayed in yellow, active faults are displayed in red. Select Next Page soft keys to
view additional Fault Log pages.
Figure 3-13 Fault Log - All Faults (left) & Active Faults Screens (right)
Table 3-10 Xmtr Home>Exciter Home Screen
Window
Description
Softkeys
Reset Log
Permanently clears inactive faults and warnings from the display.
Active Faults
Displays active faults only. Refer to Active Faults screen Figure 3-13.
Next Page
Pressing this soft key displays the Main ’Status’ Screen in Figure 3-51 on
page 3-81. This screen accesses the various Status screens for the
transmitter.
Status
Displays Status screen.
All Faults
Displays all faults. Refer to All Faults screen Figure 3-13.
3-20
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
3.4
SETUP SCREENS, All Modulation Systems
From the ’Xmtr Home’ Screen Figure 3-6 on page 3-9 select the ‘Exciter Home’ soft
key and then select ’Setup’. Setup subscreens are accessed from this Main Setup
Screen.
Figure 3-14 Setup Screen
Table 3-11 Xmtr Home>Exciter Home>Setup
Field
Explanation
User Settings
See 3.4.7, on page -37.
Transmitter I/O
Only available for select modulations. See Figure 3-18 on page 3-31.
PFRU
See 3.4.5 on page 3-33.
UDC/ Output
See 3.11.2, on page -84.
Remote
Communications
See 3.4.6, on page -35.
Signal Processor
See 3.11.1, on page -82.
System Settings
See 3.4.8, on page -39.
Softkeys
ISP
Pressing this soft key displays the ISP ’In-System Programming’ Screen
shown in Figure 3-15 on page 3-22. The ISP screen is used to load
software into the transmitter.
Status
Displays Status screen.
Exciter Home
Displays Exciter Home screen.
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
3-21
Section 3 Operation
3.4.1
Platinum VAX-C Series
ISP (In-System Programming) Screen
See "5.2 PA Module Removal and Replacement" on page 5-2 for information regarding
updating software.
Figure 3-15 Xmtr Home>Exciter Home>Setup>ISP
Table 3-12 Xmtr Home>Exciter Home>Setup>ISP
Fields
Explanation
File to Upload
Enter name and location of file containing latest software. Filename
ending in .s19 must be entered. Settings files can also be entered here.
Browse
Press button to locate file to upload.
Submit
Uploads file to transmitter.
Reset
Reboots software in exciter section after confirmation and takes
transmitter off-air for a few seconds during reboot. Press reset after
changing feature key to activate new features. Communication will be
lost during the reboot and login will be required after the reboot is
completed.
Are You Sure
Press OK to load new software onto microprocessor.
Softkeys
Save Settings
Opens a screen that contains coded settings. Settings can be stored to
computer or thumb drive for later restorations.
Exciter Home
Displays Exciter Home screen.
3-22
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Platinum VAX-C Series
!
Section 3 Operation
CAUTION:
TRANSMITTER WILL BE OFF-AIR DURING RESET OR PROGRAMMING
FORCED REBOOT.
3.4.1.1
Save Settings Soft Key
Selecting the Save Settings soft key on the ISP screen saves a copy of the current user
settings stored in EEPROM. See additional instructions for saving and restoring VAX-C
settings in "5.13.1 Saving and Recalling Settings" on page 5-46.
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
3-23
Section 3 Operation
3.4.2
Platinum VAX-C Series
RTAC Setup Screens 1 & 2
Figure 3-16 RTAC Setup Screens 1 & 2
Table 3-13 Xmtr Home>Exciter Home>Setup>DUC/RTAC
Field
Explanation
Linear: RF feedback sample is taken after high power filter.
Success/Attempt x/x
The digit to the right of the / indicates the number of times that corrector
attempted to make a correction.
The digit to the left of the / indicates the number of times the corrector
succeeded in making a correction. Just because the number of attempts does not
equal the number of success does not mean that RTAC is not functioning.
Adapt
Pressing the Adapt soft key turns it green and turns the selected corrector on.
The correction algorithm will continuously calculate and update correction as
needed. When switching to this mode from any other mode, the correction
algorithm is reset. Which will also reset the number of success and
attempts.The normal operational mode is Adapt.
Hold
Pressing the Hold soft key turns it green and keeps the last correction value for
the selected mode. This is a short term option. For long term use select Stored.
With HOLD active correction is engaged but not adapting to any new solution
for changes in the amplifiers or filters.
Stored
Pressing the Stored soft key turns it green and selects a previously stored set of
corrections which are used as a static digital precorrection. The corrections are
saved by using the Stored Correction Sets sub window in the RTAC Page 2
screen on right Figure 3-16 on page 3-24 and at Section 3.4.2.1. Storing the
current active RTAC filter setup or operating from a previously stored setup is covered in
Section 3.4.2.1.
3-24
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
Table 3-13 Xmtr Home>Exciter Home>Setup>DUC/RTAC
Field
Bypass
Explanation
Pressing the Bypass soft key turns it orange. Selecting Bypass turns the
selected corrector OFF. Correction is not engaged.
Nonlinear: RF feedback sample is taken before the high power filter.
Success/Attempt x/x
The digit to the right of the / indicates the number of times that corrector
attempted to make a correction.
The digit to the left of the / indicates the number of times the corrector
succeeded in making a correction. Just because the number of attempts does not
equal the number of success does not mean that RTAC is not functioning.
Adapt
Pressing the Adapt soft key turns it green and turns the selected corrector on.
The correction algorithm will continuously calculate and update correction as
needed. When switching to this mode from any other mode, the correction
algorithm is reset. Which will also reset the number of success and attempts. The
normal operational mode is Adapt.
Hold
Pressing the Hold soft key turns it green and keeps the last correction value for
the selected mode. This is a short term option. For long term use select Stored.
With HOLD active correction is engaged but not adapting to any new solution
for changes in the amplifiers or filters.
Stored
Pressing the Stored soft key turns it green and selects a previously stored set of
corrections which are used as a static digital precorrection. The corrections are
saved by using the Stored Correction Sets sub window in the RTAC Page 2
screen on right Figure 3-16 on page 3-24 and at Section 3.4.2.1. Storing the
current active RTAC filter setup or operating from a previously stored setup is covered in
Section 3.4.2.1.
Bypass
Pressing the Bypass soft key turns it orange. Selecting Bypass turns the
selected corrector OFF. Correction is not engaged.
RTAC State
Enabled = Green. Disabled = Red.
If the RTAC status is Disabled, this indicates that RTAC will not adapt. The
RTAC can be disabled due to any of the following reasons:
- Power is in Manual control mode
- Power Calibration is active
- Transmitter is in Off state
- External Hold command is asserted
- Transmitter was turned on but output power failed to ramp up to ACTUAL
Stored Correction
Sets
Select Set 1-4.
Save Set 1-4.
This screen provides a choice of locations for storing four different RTAC
settings.
Softkeys
Setup
Displays Setup screen.
Exciter Home
Displays Exciter Home screen.
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
3-25
Section 3 Operation
3.4.2.1
Platinum VAX-C Series
Storing an RTAC Correction Set
From the Stored Correction Sets sub window, up to four RTAC correction setups can be
saved in Set 1 through Set 4. There is an option to rename each stored setup. The setup
can be stored for many reasons, such as when the transmitter was first installed, or after
transmitter maintenance. This feature is also useful in comparative testing.
Follow the procedure below to save an RTAC Correction setup.
STEP 1
The transmitter should be operating properly at 100% power.
STEP 2
Refer to RTAC Setup Page 1 on left Figure 3-16 on page 3-24. Set the
Linear and Nonlinear RTAC corrections to Adapt.
STEP 3
After a short time, the number of successes and attempts will increment
above the RTAC Linear and Nonlinear Bypass selection soft keys. Both
the Linear and Nonlinear correctors should show one or more successful
corrections. Verify that the measured performance of the signal is
adequate using appropriate test equipment. LSB and USB shoulders are
found in the Exciter Home Performance sub window Figure 3-12 on
page 3-17. These parameters are discussed in Table 3-9 on page 3-17,
Performance sub window.
STEP 4
After the RTAC adaption has been successful, press the RTAC Linear
and Nonlinear Hold soft keys to hold the adaptive process steady.
STEP 5
By selecting Next soft key, go to RTAC Setup Page 2. Select a correction
set. The title of the selected set may be changed by clicking in the white
box of the desired set. Press ‘Save’ to store the RTAC setup.
3.4.2.2
Operate RTAC from a Stored Filter Set
To operate RTAC from a Stored set, follow the procedure below.
3-26
STEP 1
In the Stored Correction Sets sub window of the RTAC Setup Screen 2
(on right Figure 3-16 on page 3-24) press the Select soft key to the left
of the desired correction set. The Select button will turn Green. Select
Prev soft key to return to RTAC Page 1.
STEP 2
On the RTAC Setup Page 1 (on left Figure 3-16 on page 3-24) set Linear
and Nonlinear to Stored for operation with the selected stored set.
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
3.4.3
DUC/RTAC Setup Screen 3 & 4
Figure 3-17 RTAC Setup Screens 3 & 4
Table 3-14 Xmtr Home>Exciter Home>Setup>DUC/RTAC>Next & >Next
Field
Explanation
Peak Reduction
Peak Reduction limits the RF peak power output of the transmitter to provide optimum RTAC
performance, while preventing nuisance transmitter PA overdrive trips. In most cases, default settings
should be used.
Non-Linear Range (dB)
Green if Enabled. Set in dB. Default values are typically used:
ATSC = 7dB
OFDM = 8dB
DAB = 6 dB
Max Crest Factor (dB)
Max Crest Factor (dB): Set in dB. Default values are typically used:
ATSC = 11dB
OFDM =13dB
DAB = 10 dB
Downconverter
Bandpass Filter
5/9/13
On/Off: The IF bandpass filter in the RF down converter filters out
mixing products from the down conversion. This filter has a slight
frequency response irregularity which affects the linear correction. For
VHF channels with no adjacent channels on the post-filter feedback, this
filter can be off. Otherwise this filter must be on.
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
3-27
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
Table 3-14 Xmtr Home>Exciter Home>Setup>DUC/RTAC>Next & >Next
Field
Explanation
RTAC Profiles: Profiles are used to tune the RTAC for various linear and nonlinear operating
conditions. Profile choices for linear and non-linear correction are available. The correct profile will
improve RTAC performance.
Linear
Drop menu and select: Basic, Short, Long, Max, Basic Offset, Short
Offset, Long Offset, Max Offset.
Nonlinear
Drop menu and select: Basic, Basic Memory, Profile3, Profile 4, High,
High Memory, Profile 7, Profile 8, Profile 9.
Mode Selected after AC Mains Loss
Linear
Linear: Drop menu and select: Bypass, Adapt, Stored
Nonlinear
Nonlinear: Drop menu and select: Bypass, Adapt, Stored
RTAC Operating Modes During Power Up: When the VAX-C is powered down, RTAC correction for the
Adapt and Hold modes is lost, but the stored RTAC corrections are not lost. At power up, the transmitter
must operate uncorrected for a few minutes while RTAC adapts. If RTAC power on mode is set to
Stored, and if an appropriate correction setup has been previously stored in memory, the Stored
correction will be loaded into the RTAC Adapt and Hold circuits. This correction will then become
available for the LPU RTAC off air Hold mode or for the Adapt mode if the unit is on the air.
Power On Linear Mode
The RTAC Power On Linear Mode selection gives the option of having
the exciter's linear RTAC correction in the Adapt, Stored, or Bypass mode
when the exciter is powered on. In the Stored mode, RTAC settings are
obtained from previously stored values from one of the filter sets in the
Stored Correction Sets sub window.
Power On Nonlinear
Mode:
The RTAC Power On Nonlinear Mode selection gives the option of
having the exciter's nonlinear RTAC correction in the Adapt, Stored, or
Bypass mode when the exciter is powered on. In the Stored mode, RTAC
settings are obtained from previously stored values from one of the filter
sets in the Stored Correction Sets sub window.
Frequency Response Tilt
Enter value in dB.
Softkeys
Setup
Displays Setup screen.
Exciter Home
Displays Exciter Home screen.
3.4.3.1
Nonlinear Correction Range Setup
The modulator occasionally generates peaks as high as 18 dB above the average output
level. The signal peak power above the average signal power level can be limited at the
modulator output by proper setting of the Nonlinear (Correction) Range. Since this
limitation takes place before the RTAC correction circuitry, only the range of magnitude
3-28
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Platinum VAX-C Series
Section 3 Operation
up to this limit will be linearized by nonlinear RTAC correction. The peak power out of
the exciter must be limited to protect the following amplifier stages.
NOTE:
If this limit is too low, in-band and out-of-band intermodulation products will
increase due to the signal clipping. If the limit is too high, the RTAC nonlinear
corrector performance may be degraded due to high peak stretch. Also high peaks
could cause nuisance overdrive faults in some transmitter systems.
STEP 1
In the ’RTAC’ Setup Screen 1 (on left Figure 3-16 on page 3-24) set
RTAC Linear and Non-Linear functions to ’Bypass’.
STEP 2
The RF output should be set to the level required for transmitter
operation.
STEP 3
In the RTAC ‘Peak Reduction’ sub window of RTAC Setup Screen 3 (on
left Figure 3-17 on page 3-27) verify that the Non-Linear Range and
Max Crest Factor indicators display ‘Enabled’.
STEP 4
In the RTAC ’Peak Reduction’ sub window start with the Non-Linear
Range at the default value. See Table 3-14 on page 27.
STEP 5
With Both RTAC correctors bypassed, the exciter RF output adjacent
channel noise should be 50dB to 55dB below the in band signal level.
As the Nonlinear (Correction) Range value is reduced, the first sign of adjacent channel
intermodulation product increase will be very subtle, with the first sign often being
increased noise in the area just outside the in-band channel bandpass
3.4.3.2
Max Crest Factor Setup
The Max (Maximum) Crest Factor setting limits the peak to average RF output power
ratio (7.8 to 13.0 dB) at the output of the exciter. This directly limits the transmitter RF
output peak to average power ratio. The Crest Factor of the transmitted signal is
determined by this setting and by the peak compression of the amplifier system.
5/9/13
•
If the limit is set too low, clipping will generate out-of-band intermodulation
products in the exciter’s output and may affect the performance of the RTAC
non-linear correction.
•
If set too high, it could allow nuisance overdrive trips in some transmitter
models, because the high amplitude peaks could overdrive the PA modules.
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
3-29
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
Nuisance overdrive trips can be avoided by setting the Max Crest Factor parameter
section of the RTAC Peak Reduction sub window in RTAC Setup Screen 3, on left
Figure 3-17 on page 3-27.
Nuisance overdrive trips will typically occur within 30 minutes to 1 hour after
transmitter operation with RTAC is first started. If this happens, perform the following:
STEP 1
This setup is performed with the transmitter operating at full power and
RTAC Linear and Non-Linear functions set to Adapt.
STEP 2
Start with the Max Crest Factor at the default value. See Table 3-14 on
page 27.
STEP 3
Reduce the Max Crest Factor by 0.2dB.
STEP 4
Wait for one hour to see if further overdrive trips occur. If they do,
reduce by another 0.2dB.
STEP 5
Repeat steps 3 & 4 until overdrive trips cease.
STEP 6
Excessive reduction will effect the linearity correction of the transmitter.
After Max Crest Factor has been adjusted, observe the adjacent channel
response to ensure that it still exceeds the transmitter output signal mask
requirements.
3.4.3.3
RTAC Profiles sub window
Profile Linear: For linear RTAC correction, BASIC and LONG OFFSET profiles
should be tried first. The rule of thumb here is that more is not necessarily better, so use
the first profile that works well. The equalizer length in time generally increases down
the list. Linear profile choices are:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
3-30
BASIC This correction should be used for most standard mask filters.
SHORT
LONG
MAX
BASIC OFFSET
SHORT OFFSET
LONG OFFSET This correction should be used for sharp tuned mask filters,
special mask filters, or when a two or more transmitters of different
frequencies are being combined into a single output through 2 or more sharp
tuned filters.
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
•
MAX OFFSET
Profile Nonlinear: For non-linear RTAC correction, the named profiles should be tried
before the numbered profiles. Most transmitters should use BASIC or BASIC
MEMORY. However, if they do not give satisfactory adjacent channel inter-modulation
performance, a higher profile such as HIGH or HIGH MEMORY should be used.
Nonlinear profile choices are:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
3.4.4
BASIC
BASIC MEMORY
PROFILE 3
PROFILE 4
HIGH
HIGH MEMORY
PROFILE 7
PROFILE 8
PROFILE 9
Transmitter I/O Screen
The Transmitter I/O screen is not available for all modulations.
Figure 3-18 Transmitter I/O Screen
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
3-31
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
Table 3-15 Xmtr Home>Exciter Home>Setup>Transmitter I/O
Field
Explanation
Transport Stream Sub Window
Active Monitor
Output
Displays active transport stream. ASI(HP1), ASI(LP1), SMPTE 1 ASI
(HP 2), SMPTE 2 ASI (LP 2), or Follow Input Stream.
Softkeys
Setup
Displays Setup screen.
Exciter Home
Displays Exciter Home screen.
3-32
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
3.4.5
PFRU Setup
Figure 3-19 PFRU Setup Screen
Table 3-16 Xmtr Home>Exciter Home>Setup>PFRU
Field
Explanation
CHANNEL SETUP sub window
Frequency
(MHz)
Enter licensed frequency in MHz with decimals.
SFN Offset
(Hz)
Field is available if SFN option is installed and functioning.
10MHz OXCO REFERENCE sub window
System
Reference
-
Internal GPS (from internal GPS receiver)
Ext. 10 MHz reference input
Ext. 1PPS reference input
Manual (Control of 10 MHz reference oscillator from the Discipline Reference window.)
The 10 MHz OCXO (Oven Controlled crystal (X) Oscillator) is the reference source for
the 1st and 2nd local oscillators. It can be locked, via a PLL (Phase Locked Loop), to an
external 1PPS signal from a GPS receiver, to an external 10 MHz reference, or to the
internal GPS receiver.
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
3-33
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
Table 3-16 Xmtr Home>Exciter Home>Setup>PFRU
Field
Explanation
Discipline
Reference
OCXO manual setting, from 1% to 100%, is obtained by entering as a number in the
range of 1 to 100.
This provides a control voltage for the 10 MHz OCXO reference oscillator when
Manual setting of the System Reference is selected. This voltage replaces the phase
detector output voltage which controls the 10 MHz OCXO reference oscillator when
any of the other Reference Source is selected. The OCXO frequency increases as the
control number is increased.
The relationship between the number entered and the 10 MHz frequency is as follows:
1% ~ 9.9999914 MHz. (This is the low end)
50% ~ 10.0000008 MHz. (This is the typical starting point.)
100% ~ 10.0000107 MHz. (This is the high end.)
RF Output If
Undisciplined
Yes/No.
If No is selected, the output will be muted if the 10 MHz OCXO reference oscillator
looses lock. This can occur when the External 10 MHz reference, External 1PPS
reference, or Internal GPS Reference choice is selected for the Reference source. It will
have no effect if the OCXO is operated in Manual. If Yes is selected, the system will
continue to produce RF power after reference loss unless another fault is present.
Softkeys
Setup
Displays Setup screen.
Exciter Home
Displays Exciter Home screen.
3-34
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Platinum VAX-C Series
3.4.6
Section 3 Operation
Remote Communications Screens
Figure 3-20 Remote Comms Ethernet Screen 1
Figure 3-21 Remote Comms RS232 & CAN and SNMP
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
3-35
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
Table 3-17 Xmtr Home>Exciter Home>Setup>Remote Communications
Field
Explanation
Rear Ethernet Sub Window
MAC Address
Fixed rear Ethernet port MAC (Media Access Control) address is
displayed.
Mode
Select DHCP (Dynamic Host Control Protocol) or Static. If Static is
selected, click into and fill fields (obtained from your IT system
administrator): IP, Gateway, & Subnet Mask.
Apply
Select Apply soft key to implement changes
Front Ethernet Sub Window: For information on how to connect to the Front Ethernet port, see Section
"5.12.4 Connection Via Front Ethernet Connector" on page 5-34.
MAC Address
Fixed MAC address is displayed. This is required to change feature key.
IP Address
Fixed IP address is displayed.
RS232 & CAN Sub Window
Baud Rate (kHz),
Data Bits, Parity &
Stop Bits
These values are displayed. Use these values when connecting via RS232.
Exciter ID
Enter Exciter A or B. Note: When dual exciters are used they must be set
to different values. If both are set to Exciter A control problems will
result and the transmitter will cycle on and off.
Baud Rate (kHz)
Baud rate is displayed.
SNMP Setup
Trap IP Address
A list of the IP addresses to which any generated SNMP traps will be
sent.
Read-Write
Community
This is a password which allows a set to be performed. Default is
‘private’
SNMP Version
Choices are 1 or 2C.
Version 1: The trap which is sent tells of an occurrence of an event but
gives no details.
Version 2C: This trap tells of an occurrence of an event and gives details
concerning it.
Port
Port number.
Set
Choices are Off/On.
3-36
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
Table 3-17 Xmtr Home>Exciter Home>Setup>Remote Communications
Field
Explanation
Softkeys
Setup
Displays Setup screen.
Exciter Home
Displays Exciter Home screen.
3.4.7
User Settings Screen
Figure 3-22 User Settings Screen
Table 3-18 Xmtr Home>Exciter Home>Setup>User Settings
Fields
Active Users
Explanation
Lists active Engineer level and NetAdmin level users that are logged into
LPU via web browser.
Softkeys
Setup
Displays Setup screen.
Exciter Home
Displays Exciter Home screen.
If logged in as a system administrator using ‘netadmin’ username and ‘harris’ password
(initial default values) the Active Users screen will appear with an edit box. Pressing the
edit box (Figure 3-23) opens a screen that allows changes to usernames and passwords.
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
3-37
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
See 5.12.3 on page 5-33 for additional information on password change procedures.
Figure 3-23 Netadmin Screens
3-38
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
3.4.8
System Settings Screens
Figure 3-24 System Settings Screens
Table 3-19 Xmtr Home>Exciter Home>Setup>System Settings & >Next
Fields
Explanation
Page Title
Allows user to change the reference title located at the top of the screen
above the forward power bar. This title is shown on every screen.
Feature Key
Enter a factory supplied feature key. Note: The new feature key will
become active only after a transmitter reboot. This can be accomplished
with the Reset key on the ISP screen.
Transmitter Model
Model number is set by feature key and the modulation standard that is
loaded into the unit.
Day, Date, Time
Current date and time is displayed. Settings can be changed if UTC
Source is set to None.
UTC Source
Drop menu and choose: None, GPS, or NTP.
None: The Set Time window will be displayed to allow the user to set the time
manually (see Figure 3-24 on right).
UTC Offset Hrs
Enter appropriate time zone offset.
UTC offset Min
Enter appropriate time zone offset in minutes if applicable.
NTP Server IP
Address
The NTP Server Settings sub window allows the user to input the NTP Server IP
Address (see Figure 3-24 right). Press Set IP button to accept the new address.
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
3-39
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
Table 3-19 Xmtr Home>Exciter Home>Setup>System Settings & >Next
Fields
Explanation
Softkeys
Setup
Pressing this soft key displays the Main ’Setup’ Screen in Figure 3-14 on
page 3-21. This screen accesses the various setup screens for the
transmitter. See Section "3.4 SETUP SCREENS, All Modulation
Systems" on page 3-21
Exciter Home
Pressing this soft key displays Exciter Home Screen, Figure 3-12 on page
3-17.
3-40
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
3.5
Setup Screens - ATSC Modulation
Figure 3-25 on left - ATSC Setup
on right - ATSC Modulator Setup Screen 1
Table 3-20 Xmtr Home>Exciter Home>Setup>ATSC Modulator (screen 1)
Fields
Explanation
Power On Input
Configures which input will be used after a power failure.
Active Input
Selects which input is to be used actively by the modulator.
Input choices and rear panel connectors are shown in "2.7.4 TS
(Transport Stream) Connections" on page 2-14. The input availability and
functionality vary with modulation type. These inputs are not available
for analog modulation.
Auxiliary Input
This is the backup input to substitute for the Primary if the Switching
Mode is set to Automatic.
Switching Mode
Choices are: Auto(matic) or Manual. Selects how the VAX-C is to change
inputs if the selected input is lost. In the Automatic mode, if one input
(Primary-Active or Auxiliary) is missing and the other is present, the input choice
will automatically switch to the input which is present. If both inputs are present,
the Primary (Active) input will be selected.
ATSC Mobile DTV
Choices are Enable or Disable.
Network Operation
Choices are MFN (Multi Frequency Network) or SFN (Single Frequency
Network).
Pilot Test Tone
Choices are On or Off.
Softkeys
ISP
5/9/13
Pressing this soft key displays the ISP ’In-System Programming’ Screen
shown in Figure 3-15 on page 3-22. The ISP screen is used to load
software into the transmitter.
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
3-41
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
Table 3-20 Xmtr Home>Exciter Home>Setup>ATSC Modulator (screen 1)
Fields
Explanation
Status
Displays Status screen.
Setup
Displays Setup screen.
Exciter Home
Displays Exciter Home screen.
Figure 3-26 ATSC Modulator Setup Screen 2
Table 3-21 Xmtr Home>Exciter Home>Setup>ATSC Modulator>Next (screen
2)
Fields
Explanation
Tier ID
Tier of the network that this transmitter / exciter corresponds to in accordance with
ATSC's A/110 standard. This data must match the tier setting that has been set up
in the Distributed Transmission Adapter upstream.
TX ID
Designates which transmitter this is in accordance with the Distributed
Transmission network design, in accordance with ATSC's A/110 standard. This
Tier and Transmitter must match the tier and transmitter settings that are set back
at the studio or network control point in the Distributed Transmission Adapter for
this transmitter.
Transmitter and
Antenna Delay
Enter the delay value in microseconds. This is the throughput delay of the RF
signal after it leaves the exciter network delay circuit and travels through the rest
of the transmitter, transmission line, and antenna. It is also known as “TAD”, this
is a calculated or estimated number that is incorporated in compliance with the
ATSC A/110 Distributed Transmission standard. The exciter will use this value as
part of it's calculation of emission time.
3-42
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
Table 3-21 Xmtr Home>Exciter Home>Setup>ATSC Modulator>Next (screen
2)
Fields
Explanation
DFS Pulse out 10
MHz port
Choices are Enable and Disable. Enabling this function will disable the 10 MHz
signal coming out of the front panel 10 MHz port and replace it with a 77 uS pulse
that is coincident with the emission of the Data Field Sync portion of the ATSC
signal. Using this signal along with the 1 PPS signal, one could use an oscilloscope
to adjust emission timing between two or more single frequency network sites.
A/110 Fld Rate Side
Ch Ctrl
Choices are Enable and Disable. ATSC's A/110 standard defines a side
communication channel, called the field rate side channel (FRSC). The FRSC may
be used to populate certain symbols in the data field sync or communicate other
information to the modulator e.g. configuration changes. However, information to
populate the FRSC must be sent from the upstream Distributed Transmission
Adapter or a Mobile DTV multiplexer. This control governs whether or not the
FRSC information is used. If the upstream adapter is not inserting the FRSC
information, set to Disable.
Softkeys
Status
Displays Status screen.
Setup
Displays Setup screen.
Exciter Home
Displays Exciter Home screen.
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
3-43
Section 3 Operation
3.6
Platinum VAX-C Series
Setup Screens - CTTB/CMMB Modulation
Figure 3-27 on left - CTTB Setup
on right - CTTB Setup Screen 1
Table 3-22 Xmtr Home>Exciter Home>Setup>CTTB Modulator (screen 1)
Fields
Explanation
Power-On Input
The selected input, Primary (ASI 1) or Auxiliary (ASI 2), becomes the
active input when the exciter is powered up.
Active Input
The selected input, Primary (ASI 1) or Auxiliary (ASI 2), is the active
input
Switching Mode
Choices are Auto (automatic) or Manual switching of the ASI Transport
stream. IF in the automatic mode and the current ASI stream has an issue
or drops out, and the Auxiliary Input is set to Yes, the system will switch
to the auxiliary ASI stream if it is available and good.
Network Operation:
Choices are MFN (multiple frequency network) or SFN (single frequency
network).
Consult the GB (National CTTB Standard of the People’s Republic of
China) specification on proper modes of operation and make sure the
transport stream input rate feeding the modulator is at or below the
allowed rate for the mode desired.
In MFN mode, the user can select the CTTB parameters that are allowed.
Consult the GB spec on proper modes of operation and make sure the
transport stream input rate you are feeding the modulator is at or below
the allowed rate for the mode desired.
Auxiliary Input:
3-44
Choices are No or Yes. If yes is selected the exciter can be made to switch
to an auxiliary input if the active input faults or drops out.
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
Table 3-22 Xmtr Home>Exciter Home>Setup>CTTB Modulator (screen 1)
Fields
Explanation
Softkeys
ISP
Pressing this soft key displays the ISP ’In-System Programming’ Screen
shown in Figure 3-15 on page 3-22. The ISP screen is used to load
software into the transmitter.
Status
Displays Status screen.
Setup
Displays Setup screen.
Exciter Home
Displays Exciter Home screen.
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
3-45
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
Figure 3-28 CTTB Setup Screen 2
Table 3-23 Xmtr Home>Exciter Home>Setup>CTTB Modulation>Next (screen
2)
Fields
Explanation
Output Bandwidth
Choices are 8 MHz, 7 MHz, 6 MHz or 5MHz.
Carriers
Choices are Multi, Single, or Two Pilot.
Multi = COFDM type modulation, Single = single carrier modulation
system, Two Pilot = single carrier modulation mode with two pilots.
Guard Interval
Choices are PN945 (1/4), PN595 (slightly less than 1/6), or PN420 (1/9).
This is the length of the guard interval in symbols. The total frame length
is 3780 symbols. Guard interval is the guard interval symbol length
divided by the total symbol length. Example: 945/3780 = 1/4.
The Guard Interval is the time, between symbol transmissions, when
nothing is transmitted. The guard interval is entered as a fraction, which
represents the guard interval time as a fraction of the useful symbol
duration. Total symbol duration is the sum of the useful symbol duration
plus the guard interval. In the 2k mode, useful symbol duration is 224
microseconds and in the 8k mode, useful symbol duration is 896
microseconds.
Guard Interval PN
Choices are variable or constant. Constant only used with PN595,
Variable is used with PN945 and PN420.
Constellation
Choices are 4QAM, 16QAM, 32QAM, or 64QAM. Constellation refers to
the size of each RF sub-carrier constellation. LDPC Rate: Choices are 0.4
(2/5), 0.6, (3/5) or 0.8 (4/5). The LDPC Rate provides three rates of
forward error correction. The decimal, or fraction, gives the relative
efficiency of the forward error correction by dividing the information bits
by the total block length. For example, block length = 7488 bits,
information bits = 3008, therefore: 3008/7488 = 0.4 or 2/5. This indicates
that there are two information bits for every five output bits.
Time Interleaver
Choices are 240 symbols or 720 symbols. This is a data convolutional
interleaver. The data is interleaved to a depth of 240 or 720 symbols.
3-46
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
Table 3-23 Xmtr Home>Exciter Home>Setup>CTTB Modulation>Next (screen
2)
Fields
Explanation
Softkeys
Setup
Displays Setup screen.
Exciter Home
Displays Exciter Home screen.
Figure 3-29 CTTB Setup Screen 3
Table 3-24 Xmtr Home>Exciter Home>Setup>CTTB Modulator>Next>Next
(screen 3)
Fields
Explanation
Bit rate Adaptation
Choices are Enable or Disable. This applies only to MFN mode. Bit Rate
Adaptation will drop all incoming null packets, introduce new null
packets as appropriate to manage the data rate and restamp Program
Clock Reference (PCR) appropriately. This is null packet insertion and
PCR (program clock rate, time stamp to synchronize the receiver)
restamp i ng.
Unmute if No SIP
Choices are Yes or No. Controls whether or not the VAX-C is released
from mute if no SIP packet is detected in SFN mode. This is a network
safeguard.
Output Process Time
The network distribution delay is calculated and displayed.The time
settings apply to SFN mode.
Local Delay Adjust
Further transmission delay time is entered here by the operator to
conform with the desired SFN design parameters.
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
3-47
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
Table 3-24 Xmtr Home>Exciter Home>Setup>CTTB Modulator>Next>Next
(screen 3)
Fields
Explanation
TX ID
A transmitter ID field used to identify the transmitter. This corresponds
to Cell ID in the GB spec so transmitter control via Cell ID is possible
upstream via the SIP inserter.
DC Test Tone Mode
Enabling the DC Test Tone Mode transmits a single tone which is placed
at the center of the spectrum. It is used to measure carrier frequency. The
single tone signal is the same power as the exciter is putting out normally. With
this being the same power level this should not cause any damage to the
transmitter. Disabling the DC Test Tone Mode causes normal transmission to be
resumed.
Softkeys
Setup
Displays Setup screen.
Exciter Home
Displays Exciter Home screen.
3-48
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
3.7
SETUP - ISDB-T MODULATION
Figure 3-30 on left - ISDB-T Setup
on right - ISDB-T Setup Screen 1
Table 3-25 Xmtr Home>Exciter Home>Setup>ISDB-T Modulator (screen 1)
Fields
Explanation
Power On Input
The selected input, ASI 1 or ASI 2, becomes the active input when the
exciter is powered up.
Auxiliary Input
Choices are No or Yes. If yes is selected the exciter can be made to switch
to an auxiliary input if the active input faults or drops out.
Active Input
The selected input, ASI 1 or ASI 2, is the active input.
Switching Mode
Choices are Automatic or Manual switching of the ASI Transport stream.
If the ASI switch mode is in Automatic and the current ASI stream has an
issue, or drops out, the system will switch to the Auxiliary ASI stream if
it is available and good.
Raised Cosine
Window
This entry enables Raised Cosine Window shaping between OFDM symbols to
reduce out-of-band distortion. Up and down arrows allow the selection of Bypass,
Min (minimum), Med (medium), or Max (maximum) raised cosine functions.
Reed-Solomon
Decoding
This entry allows Reed-Solomon Decoding to be Enabled or Disabled on
the incoming transport stream. Reed-Solomon Decoding must be enabled only
when the transport stream contains RS encoding.
Test Pattern
Pressing the Single Tone soft key in the test pattern sub window causes a
single tone, placed at the center of the spectrum, to be transmitted. It is
used to measure the channel carrier frequency. The single tone signal is
the same power as the exciter is putting out normally.
Normal transmission is resumed by pressing the Stop Test soft key.
Softkeys
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
3-49
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
Table 3-25 Xmtr Home>Exciter Home>Setup>ISDB-T Modulator (screen 1)
Fields
Explanation
ISP
Pressing this soft key displays the ISP ’In-System Programming’ Screen
shown in Figure 3-15 on page 3-22. The ISP screen is used to load
software into the transmitter.
Status
Displays Status screen.
Setup
Displays Setup screen.
Exciter Home
Displays Exciter Home screen.
Figure 3-31 ISDB-T Setup Screen 2
Table 3-26 Xmtr Home>Exciter Home>Setup>ISDB-T Modulator >Next
(screen 2)
Fields
Explanation
SFN Mode
Choices are MFN (Multiple Frequency Network) or SFN (Single
Frequency Network).
Eqpmnt ID
Range is 0 to 63. Equipment ID is assigned by the SFN network
administrator and is provided to allow a unique identifier for each
transmitter in the SFN cell. When the equipment ID in the IIP packet
matches the local equipment ID, then the IIP Time Offset information is
extracted
RF Output if SFN/
IIP Error
Choices are Yes or No. If no is selected, transmitter will be muted if SFN
information is missing from the transport stream or SFN delay
calculations result in negative delays or delays greater than one second. If
yes is selected, the exciter will output RF which is not properly SFN
synchronized.
3-50
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
Table 3-26 Xmtr Home>Exciter Home>Setup>ISDB-T Modulator >Next
(screen 2)
Fields
Explanation
Local Offset Delay
This allows the transmitter operator to set a delay for the transmitter
locally. Its purpose is to cause the RF output to be delayed additionally by
the amount entered.
Local RF Delay
This is the time delay caused by the transmitter’s high power filter and
transmission line as well the GPS delay caused by its cable length. Its
purpose is to cause the RF output to be released earlier by the amount
entered thereby nulling out the above mentioned RF delays.
IIP Renewal Flag
Cntr (counter)
Renewal Flag is a bit in the IIP packet which, on the transition from 1 to
0, indicates the information in the IIP packet is valid.
The renewal flag counter provides the operator with an indication that the
IIP information is being updated on a regular bases. Note that the Max
Delay and IIP Time Offset is only updated when the IIP Renewal Flag
changes from 1 to 0. On exciter power up, the modulator will wait for an
IIP renewal flag transition from 1 to 0, which indicates the IIP packet
data is valid.
IIP Time Offset
The IIP Time Offset, in ms, allows the SFN Adapter upstream to send an
offset time to individual transmitters in the SFN network. This allows the
SFN network operator to change any of the transmitter delays in the SFN
from one central location, the SFN adapter.
IIP Max Delay
This delay is sent from the SFN Adaptor to the modulator. It indicates the
time from the time stamp in the IIP packet to when the head of the
multiplexed frame is to be emitted.
Processing Delay
Processing Delay, in ms, is the time required for the signal to propagate
thru the modulator during the modulation process. This time omits the
delay caused by the time interleaver.
Network Delay
This time in ms is the time required for the transport stream to travel from
where the IIP packet is time stamped in the SFN adaptor until the packet
is received by the modulator.
SFN Storage Time
Storage time, in ms is the Max Delay plus the local RF Delay, minus the
processing Delay, minus the Local Offset Delay, minus the IIP Offset
Delay, minus the Network Delay. SFN Storage Time is the delay buffer
incorporated in the modulator to provide the required delay for SFN
operation.
Softkeys
Setup
Displays Setup screen.
Exciter Home
Displays Exciter Home screen.
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
3-51
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
Figure 3-32 ISDB-T Setup Screen 3
Table 3-27 Xmtr Home>Exciter Home>Setup>ISDB-T Modulator>Next>Next
(screen 3)
Fields
Explanation
Network ID
Choices are Disable or Enable.
Transport Stream ID
Choices are Disable or Enable.
Channel (14-69)
Choices are Disable or Enable.
Virtual Channel
Choices are Disable or Enable.
Restamp
Choices are Disable or Enable.
State
Enter value in box.
Micro Region
Enter value in box.
Softkeys
Setup
Displays Setup screen.
Exciter Home
Displays Exciter Home screen.
3-52
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
3.8
Setup Screens - DVB-T Modulation
Figure 3-33 on left - DVB-T Setup
on right - DVB-T Setup Screen 1
Table 3-28 Xmtr Home>Exciter Home>Setup>DVB-T Modulator (screen 1)
Fields
Explanation
Transport Stream
See TS input connectors and assignments in Section 2.7.4, "TS (Transport
Stream) Connections".
Power-On Input
Choices are ASI 1, or ASI 2. This determines which input will be selected
first on power-up.
Active Input
Choices are ASI 1, or ASI 2. This determines which input is currently the
source of data for modulation.
Switch Mode
Choices are Auto (automatic) or Manual.
Auxiliary Input
Choices are Yes or No. Selects whether the auxiliary input is allowed.
This needs to be set to YES in order to manually or automatically switch
to the auxiliary input.
Softkeys
ISP
Pressing this soft key displays the ISP ’In-System Programming’ Screen
shown in Figure 3-15 on page 3-22. The ISP screen is used to load
software into the transmitter.
Status
Displays Status screen.
Setup
Displays Setup screen.
Exciter Home
Displays Exciter Home screen.
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
3-53
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
Figure 3-34 DVB-T Setup Screen 2
Table 3-29 Xmtr Home>Exciter Home>Setup>DVB-T Modulator>Next (screen 2)
Fields
Explanation
Network Operation
Select MFN (Multi Frequency Network) or SFN (Single Frequency Network).
MFN mode selects operation in a Multiple Frequency Network (transmitters on
different frequencies) which does not require synchronization with the other
transmitters in a network. SFN mode selects operation in Single Frequency
Network (transmitters on same frequency) which requires synchronization with
other transmitters in a network. If SFN is selected a GPS antenna is required
and internal GPS is selected on the PFRU set up screen found on Figure 3-19 on
page 3-33. This applies to every modulation mode that supports SFN.
Output Process Time
Enter a value in microseconds (uS). Time settings are used to synchronize the
transmission timing for single frequency networks.
MFN/SFN Static
Delay
This entry appears when the MFN or SFN network option is active. The range is
-10000us...+10000uS. The value can be entered locally or controlled by MIP.
See Time Delay Priority (Local or MIP) below.
Time Delay Priority
Choices are Local or MIP. Local uses a locally entered time delay. When MIP is
selected, the time delay is sent via the MIP packet, which is sent over the SFN
network
MIP ERP
Display only, in dBm and watts. This entry, as well as the Antenna Gain and
Xmtr Output Power entries, allow the operator to set the ERP of the VAX
transmitter driven system remotely by a value sent in the MIP packet from
Syncrony.
Antenna Gain
Enter antenna Gain in dB. This entry allows the ERP for this station to be set
remotely by varying the transmitter output power.
Xmtr Output Power
Display only, in dBm and watts.
3-54
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
Table 3-29 Xmtr Home>Exciter Home>Setup>DVB-T Modulator>Next (screen 2)
Fields
Explanation
Softkeys
Setup
Displays Setup screen.
Exciter Home
Displays Exciter Home screen.
Figure 3-35 DVB-T Setup Screen 3
Table 3-30 Xmtr Home>Exciter Home>Setup>DVB-T Modulator>Next(screen 3)
Fields
Explanation
Max(imum) Network
Delay
Value in microseconds for HP or LP modes. Maximum Network Delay is
configured for an SFN network and sent in the MIP packet.
Actual Network
Delay
Value in microseconds (us) for HP or LP modes.
Actual Network Delay is the delay of the transport stream from the Single
Frequency Network adapter to the VAX-C.
Processing Delay
Value in microseconds (us) for HP or LP modes. Time that the transport
packets are delayed in the VAX-C memory buffer.
Transmitter Delay
Value in microseconds (us) for HP or LP modes. Total delay of the signal in
the VAX-C including internal processing delay and storage time.
Softkeys
Setup
Displays Setup screen.
Exciter Home
Displays Exciter Home screen.
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
3-55
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
Figure 3-36 DVB-T Setup Screen 4
Table 3-31 Xmtr Home>Exciter Home>Setup>DVB-T Modulator>Next x3
(screen 4)
Fields
Explanation
PCR Restamping
Choices are Off or On. This is PCR (Program Clock Reference) Restamping of
transport packets. For a SFN, this function must be disabled. Either setting is
valid in MFN mode, but it is usually On
Flow Adaptation
Choices are Off or On. Enables or disables the transport stream flow (bit rate)
adaptation by the addition or deletion of null packets. For a SFN, this function
must be disabled. Either setting is valid in MFN mode, but it is usually ON.
Null Packet Removal
Choices are Keep All, Discard Min(imum), or Discard All.
Keep All = All incoming null packets are kept.
Discard Min = Discard the minimum number of Null packets to meet required
data rate.
Discard All = Discard all incoming null packets.
For a SFN, this function must be set to Keep All. Any setting is valid in MFN
mode, but Discard All is usually selected
TEI Flag
Choices are Unchanged or Set. If Set is chosen, the TEI (Transport Error
Indicator) flag is enabled in each transport stream packet. This is used to
indicate uncorrected errors in the input transport stream. In the SFN operating
mode, this function must be set to Unchanged, where the TEI flag will remain
disabled. In the MFN mode, either setting can be used
MFN MIP Control
MIP is Mega-frame Initialization Packet. On Enables the use of MIP packets
in MFN mode. Select On if MIP packets are to be used to control modulation
parameters.
MIP Frequency
Offset
No value can be entered. This is for Status only. MIP Frequency Offset is an
optional frequency offset included in the MIP packet and added to RF
frequency.
Use frequency Offset
Choices are Local or MIP Control
3-56
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
Table 3-31 Xmtr Home>Exciter Home>Setup>DVB-T Modulator>Next x3
(screen 4)
Fields
RF Output if No MIP
Explanation
Choices are Yes or No. This allows mute of VAX-C if no MIP packets are
detected and they are required. MIP packets are needed in the SFN mode.
Softkeys
Setup
Displays Setup screen.
Exciter Home
Displays Exciter Home screen.
Figure 3-37 DVB-T Setup Screen 5
Table 3-32 Xmtr Home>Exciter Home>Setup>DVB-T Modulator>Next x4
(screen 5)
Fields
Explanation
These parameters can only be changed by GUI when in MFN mode. In SFN mode these parameters are
read from MIP (Mega-frame Initialization Packet) packets in transport stream input
Output Bandwidth
Choices are 8 MHz, 7 MHz, 6 MHz or 5MHz.
FFT Mode
This sets the size of the modulation Fast Fourier Transform (FFT), which in
turn sets the number of subcarriers used in the COFDM (Coded Orthogonal
Frequency Division Multiplex) signal. It also selects whether the in-depth
interleaver (8k) is enabled in 2k and 4k mode. Choices are 2k, 2k (8k
interlaced), 4k, 4k (8k interlaced), or 8k.
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
3-57
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
Table 3-32 Xmtr Home>Exciter Home>Setup>DVB-T Modulator>Next x4
(screen 5)
Fields
Explanation
Guard Interval
Choices are 1/4, 1/8, 1/16, and 1/32. The Guard Interval is the time, between
symbol transmissions, when nothing is transmitted. The guard interval is
entered as a fraction, which represents the guard interval time as a fraction of
the useful symbol duration. Total symbol duration is the sum of the useful
symbol duration plus the guard interval. In the 2k mode, useful symbol
duration is 224 microseconds and in the 8k mode, useful symbol duration is
896 microseconds.
Constellation
Choices are QPSK (Quadrature Phase Shift Keying), 16 QAM (Quadrature
Amplitude Modulation), and 64 QAM. Constellation refers to the size of each
RF sub-carrier constellation. When using the hierarchical mode, 16 QAM or
64 QAM must be selected.
Transmission
Config(uration)
Choices are Non Hierarchical or Hierarchical. Non Hierarchical modulation
allows transmission of only one data stream, the HP (High Priority) input.
Hierarchical modulation allows transmission of two data streams, the LP (Low
Priority) and the HP (High Priority) transport stream inputs. The Low Priority
stream has a higher data rate which produces a higher quality reproduction,
but it is less robust and therefore covers a limited distance. The High Priority
stream has a lower data rate which produces a lower quality reproduction, but
it is more robust and therefore covers a greater distance.
High Priority Code
Rate
Choices are 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, and 7/8. These choices affect the convolutional
encoder code rate for the High Priority channel. It offers a choice between the
useful data rate (picture and sound quality) verses signal robustness (distance
the signal can be received). A code rate of 1/2 includes one forward error
correction bit and one data bit. This yields a lower quality signal which can be
received at a greater distance. A code rate of 7/8 includes one forward error
correction bit for every seven data bits. This yields a higher quality signal
which can be received at a much shorter distance.
Low Priority Code
Rate
Low Priority Code Rate: Choices are: 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8. The Low Priority
Code Rate is only visible when in Hierarchical mode. These choices affect the
convolutional encoder code rate for the low priority channel.
Softkeys
Setup
Displays Setup screen.
Exciter Home
Displays Exciter Home screen.
3-58
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
Figure 3-38 DVB-T Setup Screen 6
Table 3-33 Xmtr Home>Exciter Home>Setup>DVB-T Modulator>Next x5
(screen 6)
Fields
Explanation
Update NIT Flag
Choices are Disabled or Enabled. Update NIT (Network Information Table)
Flag allows the update of the NIT packet with VAX-C RF frequency. This is
only selectable in MFN mode.
Adjust(ed)
Frequency
VAX-C RF frequency which is to be inserted in NIT. No value can be entered.
This is for display only.
Cell ID Priority
Choices are Disabled, MIP (Mega-Frame Initialization Packet) Cell ID, or
Local Cell ID. Selects source of Cell ID to be inserted in TPS (Transport
Parameter Signalling) bits. Disabled: No Cell ID is inserted in TPS bits. MIP
Cell ID: value of Cell ID read from MIP packet. No value can be entered, this
is for display only. Local Cell ID: value of Cell ID to insert in TPS bits, range
is 1-65535.
Cell ID
Displays value of Cell ID
Raised Cosine
Window
Choices are Bypass (no windowing), Minimum, Medium, or Maximum.
This entry enables Raised Cosine Window shaping between OFDM symbols to
reduce out-of-band distortion. The window lengths, a fraction of symbol
duration, depend on length of the guard intervals, as shown below.
If Guard Interval is 1/32, then MIN = 1/512, MED = 1/128, MAX = 1/64.
If Guard Interval is 1/16, then MIN = 1/512, MED = 1/128, MAX = 1/32.
If Guard Interval is 1/8, then MIN = 1/512, MED = 1/128, MAX = 1/16.
If Guard Interval is 1/4, then MIN = 1/512, MED = 1/128, MAX = 1/8.
TX ID
Is the transmitter identifier in a single frequency network.
This will enable MIP packet optional parameters that are set for this
transmitter ID value. Transmitter ID range to be entered is 1-65535.
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
3-59
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
Table 3-33 Xmtr Home>Exciter Home>Setup>DVB-T Modulator>Next x5
(screen 6)
Fields
Mute if out by % of
GI
Explanation
Allowable entry range is 5% to 50%. In SFN mode, the exciter will mute when
1 pps reference is missing (and exciter 10 MHz OCXO is flywheeling) after
the timing error becomes too large. User can specify the allowed error in
timing as a percentage of guard interval (GI) from 5% to 50% (default is 20%).
Softkeys
Setup
Displays Setup screen.
Exciter Home
Displays Exciter Home screen.
3-60
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
Figure 3-39 DVB-T Setup Screen 7
.
Table 3-34 Xmtr Home>Exciter Home>Setup>DVB-T Modulator Next x6
(screen 7)
Fields
Explanation
The DVB-H configuration sets information in the TPS (Transport Parameter Signaling) bits that
pertain only to DVB-H mode. The programming choices for all four entries are On or Off, see the
following for more information. These parameters can only be set in MFN mode. In SFN mode these fields
display the settings read from the MIP packet.
HP MPE
Encapsulation
Sets TPS bits to indicate if MPE Encapsulation is used with high priority
stream. Programming choices are On or Off.
LP MPE
Encapsulation
Sets TPS bits to indicate if MPE encapsulation is used with low priority
stream. Programming choices are On or Off.
HP Time Slicing
Sets TPS bits to indicate if time slicing is used with high priority stream.
Programming choices are On or Off
LP Time Slicing
Sets TPS bits to indicate if time slicing is used with low priority stream.
Programming choices are On or Off
RF Output If AND >
MND
Choices are Yes or No. AND = actual network delay. MND = maximum
network delay. Choosing yes allows the transmitter to operate if the actual
network delay exceeds the maximum allowable network delay.
Softkeys
Setup
Displays Setup screen.
Exciter Home
Displays Exciter Home screen.
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
3-61
Section 3 Operation
.
Platinum VAX-C Series
Figure 3-40 DVB-T Setup Screen 8
Table 3-35 Xmtr Home>Exciter Home>Setup>DVB-T Modulator>Next x7
(screen 8)
Fields
Explanation
These special test modes will cause errors and should not be used in normal operation.
Special Test Flag
Choices are None, Test Sync, and Test Spectrum. None: No special tests are
selected. Test Sync: One OFDM packet at the beginning of each Mega-Frame
is deleted. This helps to measure alignment of VAX-C output in SFN mode.
Test Spectrum: Sub-carriers in center of band are deleted to create a spectral
null. This is used to evaluate spectral regrowth due to transmitter or other nonlinear distortion.
PRBS Test
Choices are On or Off. PRBS (Pseudo Random Binary Sequence) On generates
a test pattern instead of processing an input stream. It is only used by for
testing. On is selected when transmitter RF output is desired but a valid transmission
stream is not available. When On is selected the PRBS Test box will turn yellow on the
GUI display. Since this is a test mode it will show up in the fault log upon activation. It
will also cause an amber flashing output light on the front of the VAX-C and the system
fault LED will also light on the VAX-C.
The PRBS test function should not be enabled during normal operation with a valid
transport stream. If a power interruption occurs with the PRBS test mode enabled it will
be automatically disabled when system power is restored.
PRBS Bits
20 is default value.
Test Pattern
Single Tone: Test mode.
Offset Tone: Test mode.
Stop Test: Stops test patterns.
Softkeys
Setup
Displays Setup screen.
Exciter Home
Displays Exciter Home screen.
3-62
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
3.9
Setup Screens - DVB-T2 Modulation
Figure 3-41 on left - DVB-T2 Setup
on right - DVB-T2 Setup Screen 1
Table 3-36 Xmtr Home>Exciter Home>Setup>DVB-T2 Modulator (screen 1)
Field
Explanation
Power On/Primary Input
The choices are ASI 1 or ASI 2. This determines which input will be
selected on power-up.
Active Input
The selected input (ASI 1or ASI 2) is the active input. This determines
which input is the current modulator data source.
Switching Mode
Choices are Manual, Auto or Auto & Return switching of the ASI
Transport stream. If the ASI switching mode is in Auto and the current
ASI stream has an issue, or drops out, the system will switch to the
Auxiliary ASI stream if it is valid and available.
Switch Return Time (s)
Enter integer between 0 and 600 seconds. Sets time before switchback to
primary input.
Switch Maximum
Enter value from 1,2, 5, 6, 10, 11 or Infinite.
Reset Counts
Press button to reset the number of switch counts.
PRBS on Input Error
Yes or No. Yes activates PRBS stream in case of input error. No allows
RF mute to occur in case of input error.
Input Mode
Choices are or MPEGT YD or T2-MI. T2 MI is the DVB-T2 modulator
interface.
T2-MI PID (decimal)
This value is used for encapsulation of T2-MI packets in
MPEG transport stream.
Softkeys
Setup
Displays Setup screen.
Exciter Home
Displays Exciter Home screen.
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
3-63
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
Figure 3-42 DVB-T2 Setup Screens 2
Table 3-37 Xmtr Home>Exciter Home>Setup>DVB-T2 Modulator>Next (screen
2)
Field
Explanation
Network Operation
Select MFN (multi frequency network) or SFN (single frequency
network).
MFN mode selects operation in a multiple frequency network
(transmitters on different frequencies) which does not require
synchronization with the other transmitters in a network.
SFN mode selects operation in single frequency network (transmitters on
same frequency) which requires synchronization with other transmitters
in a network.
If SFN is to be the modulation choice then a GPS antenna is needed and
internal GPS must be selected on the PFRU set up screen.
TX ID
Transmitter identifier used to address individual transmitters or modulators.
Cell ID Priority
Choices are Local, T2MI L1PRE, or Indiv Address.
Cell ID (Hex)
Identifies a geographic cell in a DVB-T2 network.
Network ID (Hex)
This field uniquely identifies the current DVB network.
T2 System ID (Hex)
This uniquely identifies a T2 system within the DVB network.
SISO/MISO
Choices are SISO (single input, single output) or MISO (multiple input,
single output).
MISO Group Priority
Choices are Local or TCM1.
MISO Group Number
Choices are Group 1 or Group 2.
3-64
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
Table 3-37 Xmtr Home>Exciter Home>Setup>DVB-T2 Modulator>Next (screen
2)
Field
Explanation
Softkeys
Setup
Displays Setup screen.
Exciter Home
Displays Exciter Home screen.
Figure 3-43 DVB-T2 Setup Screen 3
Table 3-38 Xmtr Home>Exciter Home>Setup>DVB-T2 Modulator>Next x2
(screen 3)
Field
Explanation
Time Delay priority
Choices are Local or T2-MI. When local is selected, user enters offset in
SFN time offset field. When T2-MI is selected, offset comes from T2-MI
packet.
SFN Time Offset
Enter appropriate delay value in microseconds when Time Delay Priority is
in Local.
User Frequency
Offset
Choices are Ignore or T2-MI. When ignore is selected, no offset is used.
When T2-MI is selected, offset comes from T2-MI packet.
T2-MI Frequency
Offset
0.0 Hz displayed when Use Frequency Offset is set to Ignore. When it is set
to T2-MI, the T2-MI packet offset is displayed. Value displayed in Hz, when
Use Frequency Offset is set to T2-MI.
T2-MI Power
Control
Choices are Local or T2-MI. When local is selected, power is controlled at
the transmitter. When T2-MI is selected, the ERP value from the
T2-MI packet is used to control the transmitter power.
T2-MI ERP
Effective radiated output power from T2-MI packet.
Antenna Gain
Enter antenna gain value in dB. This entry is used to adjust the transmitter
output power to achieve the desired ERP.
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
3-65
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
Table 3-38 Xmtr Home>Exciter Home>Setup>DVB-T2 Modulator>Next x2
(screen 3)
Field
TX Output Power
Explanation
Displays transmitter output power in dBm.
Softkeys
Setup
Displays Setup screen.
Exciter Home
Displays Exciter Home screen.
Figure 3-44 DVB-T2 Setup Screen 4
Table 3-39 Xmtr Home>Exciter Home>Setup>DVB-T2 Modulator>Next x3
(screen 4)
Field
Explanation
FFT Mode
Choices are 1K, 2K, 4K, 8K, 16K, or 32K.
This refers to the number of sub carriers in the RF output bandwidth. See
Table 3-40 on page 67.
Grd Interval
Choices are 1/4, 1/8, 1/16, 1/32, 1/128, 19/128, or 19/256.
Pilot Pattern
Choices are PP1, PP2, PP3, PP4, PP5, PP6, PP7, or PP8. See Table 3-42 on
page 68.
Carrier Mode
Choices are Normal or Extended.
Bandwidth
Presently 5 MHz, 6MHz, 7 MHz, and 8 MHz, in the future 1.7 MHz bandwidth
will be added.
3-66
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
Table 3-39 Xmtr Home>Exciter Home>Setup>DVB-T2 Modulator>Next x3
(screen 4)
Field
Explanation
L1 Mode
Choices are BPSK, QPSK, 16QAM, or 64QAM. The L1 Mod referred to
above gives a choice of the modulation constellation for the P2 symbol(s).
L1 refers to the Layer 1 signalling within the T2 frame. L1 is split into three
main sections: The P1 signalling, the L1-pre signalling and L1-post
signalling. The the L1-pre and post signalling is carried by the P2 symbol(s),
which may also carry data.
PAPR
Choices are None, ACE, TR, or ACE & TR.PAPR = peak to average power
ratio. This choice allows two methods of peak to average power ratio
reduction.
TR = Tone Reservation
ACE = Active constellation extension, The active constellation extension
technique should not be applied when rotated constellations are used or
when MISO is used.
Data Symbols per T2
frame
Programming range varies with the FFT size and the guard interval. The
maximum number of data symbols per T2 frame is given in the table below.
An odd number must be entered. If an even number or a number which is
over the limit is entered, the exciter will mute. A larger number is more data
efficient, but it also increases receiver lockup time.
T2 Frames per
Superframe
A super-frame is composed of a set of T2-frames consisting of a particular
number of consecutive T2-frames. A super-frame may include FEF (future
extension frames) parts, two FEF parts can not be adjacent (must be
separated by one or more T2 frames), and if FEFs are used, the super-frame
ends with a FEF part. The maximum time for the super-frame length (TSF) is
64 seconds if FEFs are not used (equivalent to 255 T2 frames of 250 ms) and
128 seconds if FEFs are used. The maximum number of T2 frames are
independent of the number of FEF parts used.
Softkeys
Setup
Displays Setup screen.
Exciter Home
Displays Exciter Home screen.
Table 3-40
Number of Carriers and Carrier Spacing
FFT Mode (No. Carriers)
1K
2K
4K
8K
16K
32K
Theoretical Max. Carriers
1024
2048
4096
8192
16384
32768
No. Carriers Normal Mode
853
1705
3409
6817
13633
27265
No. Carriers Extended Mode
N/A
N/A
N/A
6912
13920
27840
Spacing Between Carriers Hz.
8929
4464
2232
1116
558
279
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
3-67
Section 3 Operation
Table 3-41
Platinum VAX-C Series
Guard Interval Duration Time in Microseconds
Guard Interval uS
FFT Size
1/128
1/32
1/16
19/256
1/8
19/128
1/4
32K
28
112
224
266
448
532
N/A
16K
14
56
112
133
224
266
448
8K
7
28
56
66,5
112
133
224
4K
N/A
14
28
N/A
56
N/A
112
2K
N/A
7
14
N/A
28
N/A
56
1K
N/A
N/A
7
N/A
14
N/A
28
Table 3-42
Scattered Pilot Patterns Allowed for SISO Mode
Scattered Pilot Patterns Allowed
FFT Size
32K
1/128
PP7
1/32
PP4
PP6
1/16
PP2
PP8
PP4
19/256
PP2
PP8
PP4
1/8
PP2
PP8
19/128
PP2
PP8
1/4
N/A
16K
PP7
PP7
PP4
PP6
PP2
PP8
PP4
PP5
PP2
PP8
PP4
PP5
PP2
PP3
PP8
PP2
PP3
PP8
PP1
PP8
8K
PP7
PP7
PP4
PP8
PP4
PP5
PP8
PP5
PP4
PP2
PP3
PP8
PP2
PP3
PP8
PP1
PP8
4K, 2K
N/A
PP7
PP4
PP4
PP5
N/A
PP2
PP3
N/A
PP1
1K
N/A
N/A
PP4
PP5
N/A
PP2
PP3
N/A
PP1
3-68
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
Table 3-43
Maximum Data Symbols Per T2 Frame verses FFT Size and Guard Interval
Number of Data Symbols
FFT Size
1/128
1/32
1/16
19/256
1/8
19/128
1/4
32K
67
65
63
63
60
60
N/A
16K
137
134
130
128
122
120
110
8K
274
268
260
257
245
240
221
4K
N/A
536
520
N/A
491
N/A
442
2K
N/A
1073
1041
N/A
983
N/A
884
1K
N/A
N/A
2082
N/A
1966
N/A
1768
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
3-69
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
Figure 3-45 DVB-T2 Setup Screen 5
Table 3-44 Xmtr Home>Exciter Home>Setup>DVB-T2 Modulator>Next x4
(screen 5)
Field
Explanation
Total PLP’s
Total number of Physical Layer Pipes (PLP) sent in the T2 transmission.
In MPEG-TS input mode there is only 1 PLP. In T2MI input mode there
can be multiple PLPs from 1 to 255.
PLP Number
The number of an individual PLP for parameter entry/display. In MPEGTS mode the PLP Number is 0 fixed. In T2MI mode the user can select
PLP Number from 0 to 254.
PLP ID (Hex)
Enter value in white box. Range is 0 to 255. This 8-bit field uniquely
identifies a PLP in the T2 system.
Group ID (Hex)
Enter value in white box. Range is 0 to 255. This 8-bit field identifies
uniquely a PLP within the T2 system.
PLP Type
PLP (physical layer pipe) types include Type 1 (data), Type 2 (data).
HEM
Choices are Yes or No. The mode adaptation module can process input
data in one of two modes, normal mode (NM) or high efficiency mode
(HEM). NM is in line with the Mode Adaptation in [i.3], whereas in
HEM, further stream specific optimizations may be performed to reduce
signalling overhead. The BBHEADER (see clause 5.1.7) signals the input
stream type and the processing mode.
Code Rate
Choices are 1/2, 3/5, 2/3, 3/4, 4/5, or 5/6.This refers to the forward error
correction (FEC) which uses the LDPC (low density parity check) along
with BCH code. 1/2 code rate provides the most robust performance
coincident with the lowers data efficiency. 5/6 code rate provides the
least robust performance coincident with the higher data efficiency.
BCH performs the outer coding and LDPC performs the inner coding.
3-70
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
Table 3-44 Xmtr Home>Exciter Home>Setup>DVB-T2 Modulator>Next x4
(screen 5)
Field
Explanation
64K LDPC
LPDPC (low density parity check), Yes indicates 64k LDPC is being
used, No indicates that the 16k LDPC is being used.
LDPC Parity Check (codes) are part of the inner coding forward error correction
(FEC). Two types of FEC can be used with the associated PLP, they are the 16k
LDPC or the 64k LDPC.
Constellation
Choices are QPSK, 16 QAM, 64 QAM, or 256 QAM. This is the main
modulation mode for all subcarriers except for those of the L1 mode.
Rotated QAM
Choices are Yes or No. Yes is recommended state. The QAM
constellations can be rotated off their normal axis up to 30 degrees in
order to improve reception. Table 3-6 shows the rotation based on the
constellation type. See Table 3-46 on page 73
TI PI
Enter value in white box. Range is 1 to 255. TI Pi is the number of T2
frames in an interleaving frame (when interleaver over multiple T2
frames, TI type = 1). TI Pi must be a factor of Ncells and must be less
than or equal to the number of T2 frames per superframe.
TI Type
Choices are 0 or 1. If the TI Type is set to the value '1', than there is one
interleaving frame which spans multiple T2-frames. The number of T2frames is indicated by TI Pi. If the TI Type is set to the value '0', then one
interleaving frame corresponds to one T2-frame and contains one or more
time interleaver blocks.
PCR Restamp
Choices are Yes or No.PCR Restamp issued for transport interface. YES is
required with transport input.
Softkeys
Setup
Displays Setup screen.
Exciter Home
Displays Exciter Home screen.
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
3-71
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
Figure 3-46 DVB-T2 Setup Screen 6
Table 3-45 Xmtr Home>Exciter Home>Setup>DVB-T2 Modulator (screen 6)
Field
Explanation
PRBS Enabled
Choices are Yes or No. When Yes is selected, the exciter will output RF
without a transport stream input. When No is selected, the exciter will
mute without a transport stream input.
Add TS Header
Choices are Yes or No. When Yes is selected, a valid transport stream
header is pre-appended to each packet. When No is selected, a header is
not added.
SFN P1 Symbol
Deletion
Choices are Yes or No. Selecting yes clears the P1 symbol, which allows
comparison of timing of different transmitters in a SFN.
Verification Mode
Preset
Enter value in white box. These are pre defined setups
winch can be applied by inputting the Verification Mode Preset number.
Presently, usable Verification Mode Preset numbers are 1-17, and 19,
these are SISO (single input single output modes), mode 18 is MIMO
(multiple input single output). Table 3-47 on page 73 through Table 3-49
on page 75 provide the parameters for the 19 Verification Mode Presets.
Verification Mode
Enabled
Choices are Yes or No. Entering Yes activates the Verification Mode
Preset entry. This deactivates the various effected entries in the other
DVB-T2 setup screens. Entering No deactivates the Verification Mode
Preset entry and activates the various effected entries in the other DVBT2 setup screens.
Single Tone
Pressing the Single Tone soft key in the test pattern sub window causes a
single tone, placed at the center of the spectrum, to be transmitted. It is
used to measure the channel carrier frequency. The single tone signal is
the same power as the exciter is putting out normally.
Stop Test
Normal transmission is resumed by pressing the Stop Test soft key.
3-72
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
Table 3-45 Xmtr Home>Exciter Home>Setup>DVB-T2 Modulator (screen 6)
Field
Explanation
Softkeys
Setup
Displays Setup screen.
Exciter Home
Displays Exciter Home screen.
Table 3-46 Constellation Type and Rotation
Modulation
QPSK
16-QAM
64-QAM
256-QAM
Phase Rotation (degrees)
29.0
16.8
8.6
3.576
Table 3-47 Verification Mode Preset, Numbers 1-7
Verification Mode
Preset Number
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
VV Reference
CR35
CR35L
CR23
8KFFT
8KFFT
16KFF
T
16KFF
T
Rate
3/5
3/5
2/3
3/4
3/5
5/6
FEC Type
64800
64800
64800
64800
64800
64800
64800
Mode
HEM
HEM
HEM
HEM
HEM
HEM
HEM
Rotated QAM
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Modulation
256QAM
256QA
M
256QA
M
64QAM
256QA
M
64QAM
16QAM
L1 Modulation
64QAM
64QAM
64QAM
64QAM
64QAM
64QAM
64QAM
FFTSIZE
32K
32K
32K
8K
8K
16K
16K
GI
1/128
1/128
1/128
19/256
1/16
1/4
19/128
Pilot Pattern
PP7
PP7
PP7
PP5
PP8
PP1
PP8
Extended Carrier
Mode
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
SISO/MISO
SISO
SISO
SISO
SISO
SISO
SISO
SISO
PAPR
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
Data Symbols
59
59
59
81
59
22
59
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
2/3
3-73
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
Table 3-47 Verification Mode Preset, Numbers 1-7
Verification Mode
Preset Number
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
VV Reference
CR35
CR35L
CR23
8KFFT
8KFFT
16KFF
T
16KFF
T
TiPi
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
Ti Type
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
Bit Rate (Mbps)
36.14
36.14
40.21
30.32
33.29
26.11
17.46
Table 3-48 Verification Mode Preset, Numbers 8-14
Verification Mode
Preset Number
008
009
010
011
012
013
014
VV Reference
16KFFT
4KFFT
2KFFT
1KFFT
64QAM
45
64QAM
56
64QAM
34
Rate
4/5
2/3
3/5
1/2
4/5
5/6
3/4
FEC Type
64800
64800
64800
64800
64800
64800
64800
Mode
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
HEM
HEM
HEM
Rotated QAM
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Modulation
256QAM
64QAM
16QAM
QPSK
64QAM
64QAM
64QAM
L1 Modulation
64QAM
16QAM
QPSK
BPSK
64QAM
64QAM
64QAM
FFTSIZE
16K
4K
2K
1K
8K
8K
8K
GI
1/32
1/32
1/8
1/8
1/32
1/32
1/32
Pilot Pattern
PP6
PP7
PP2
PP3
PP7
PP7
PP7
Extended Carrier Mode
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
SISO/MISO
SISO
SISO
SISO
SISO
SISO
SISO
SISO
PAPR
None
None
None
None
TR
TR
TR
Data Symbols
100
100
983
1966
242
242
242
TiPi
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Ti Type
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit Rate (Mbps)
46.36
27.59
14.36
6.17
34.69
36.16
32.51
3-74
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
Table 3-49 Verification Mode Preset, Numbers 15-19
Verification Mode
Preset Number
015
016
017
018
019
8KFFT
256QA
M34
PAPRT
R
MISO
NOROT
Rate
3/5
3/4
4/5
5/6
3/5
FEC Type
64800
64800
64800
64800
64800
Mode
HEM
HEM
HEM
HEM
HEM
Rotated QAM
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Modulation
256QAM
256QAM
256QAM
256QAM
256QAM
L1 Modulation
64QAM
64QAM
64QAM
64QAM
64QAM
FFTSIZE
8K
32K
32K
32K
32K
GI
1/32
1/128
1/32
1/16
1/128
Pilot Pattern
PP7
PP7
PP4
PP2
PP7
Extended Carrier Mode
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
SISO/MISO
SISO
SISO
SISO
MISO
SISO
PAPR
None
TR
TR
None
None
Data Symbols
238
59
19
19
59
TiPi
1
1
1
1
1
Ti Type
0
0
0
0
0
Bit Rate (Mbps)
34.97
44.79
44.75
43.16
36.14
VV Reference
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
3-75
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
3.10 Setup Screens - DAB Modulation
Figure 3-47 DAB Setup Screens 1 & 2
Table 3-50 Xmtr Home>Exciter Home>Setup>DAB Modulator & >Next
Field
Explanation
Transport Stream
Active Stream
Indication of currently active transport stream
ETI Input
Availability status of ETI 1 and ETI 2 Transport Streams. Indicates the ETI mode.
NI for G.703, NA for G.704. Shows MISSING when no ETI input is present.
ETI Input
Power on Input
The choices are ETI 1 or ETI 2. This determines which input will be selected on
power-up.
Active Input
The selected input, ETI 1 or ETI 2, is the active input. This determines which input
is currently the source of data for modulation.
Switching Mode
Choices are Automatic or Manual switching of the ETI Transport stream. If the
ETI switching mode is in Automatic and the current ETI stream has an issue, or
drops out, the system will switch to the Auxiliary ETI stream if it is available and
good. The LPU will switch to the Auxiliary input only if Auxiliary Input (set
below) is set to Yes.
Auxiliary Input
No/Yes. If Auxiliary Input is set to Yes, Switching Mode, if Automatic, will switch
to this input on loss of signal on Primary input.
Network Delay Settings
3-76
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
Table 3-50 Xmtr Home>Exciter Home>Setup>DAB Modulator & >Next
Field
Explanation
Dynamic Delay
Select Off (MFN) (Multi Frequency Network) or On (SFN) (Single
Frequency Network).
- MFN mode selects operation in a Multiple Frequency Network
(transmitters on different frequencies) which does not require
synchronization with the other transmitters in a network.
- SFN mode selects operation in Single Frequency Network (transmitters
on same frequency) which requires synchronization with other
transmitters in a network.
- If SFN is selected a GPS antenna is utilized. The PFRU set up specifies
Internal GPS. See Section 3.4.5 on page 3-33. 1PPS may also be used
for SFN synchronization in some applications. This applies to every
modulation mode that supports SFN.
Output Process Time
Enter a value in microseconds (S). Time settings are used to synchronize
the transmission timing for single frequency networks. Output process
time is the additional time delay of equipment after the LPU in the RF
transmission path. It controls setting of RF and antenna delay. Non
volatile setting of 0-100S causes exciter output to be emitted sooner.
This additional delay is needed so that the transit time (through the
transmitter power amplifier, high power filter, and transmission line) can
be included in the LPU delay.
Adjust ETI Static
Delay
Enter a value in milliseconds (mS). ETI static delay is additional time
entered to delay LPU emission in MFN mode. In static delay mode this
non-volatile setting controls the overall exciter signal delay. Range T min
to 999.9999 mS. T min varies by DAB mode and can be seen by entering 0.
In dynamic delay mode this non-volatile setting provides local offset
delay. Range is T min to 999.9999mS.
Static Delay
Compensation
Amount of delay above the minimum required to meet the Adjust Static
Delay time.
ETI 1 Dynamic
Comp
Adjustable signal delay used to balance out the different transit times of
the transmitters in a single frequency network (compensation delay), plus
and individual delay to optimize SFN signal coverage (offset delay) when
necessary.
ETI 2 Dynamic
Comp
See above.
Overall Transit Time
The signal processing time (static delay), the compensation delay, and the
offset delay are added together, and the total is displayed here. Output
process time does not affect overall transit time since this is more of a calibration
factor for the system from the exciter output thru the antenna.
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
3-77
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
Figure 3-48 DAB Setup Screens 3 & 4
Table 3-51 Xmtr Home>Exciter Home>Setup>DAB Modulator>Next x3
Field
Explanation
ETI Control: These MNSC controls determine if the Mode, Offset Delay, and TII Value are set
locally or by the MNSC.
DAB Mode
ETI/Local. If ETI is selected control is via the MNSC.
Offset Delay
ETI/OFF Allows the offset delay to be controlled via the ETI stream if
ETI is selected.
ETI Offset delay
Displays MNSC ETI offset from selected ETI input. Displays 0 us if ETI
Offset control is OFF.
TII Value
ETI/Local. Controls whether the transmitter identification main and subidentifier values are set locally or are received via the MNSC.
ETI Monitor Control
ETI Monitor Output
ETI 1/ETI 2. Set which ETI input is multiplexed to the ETI Monitor
output.
Modulation
Force Mute
Off/On. Allows muting of exciter.
(ETI) DAB Mode
When MNSC DAB Mode is set to Local this setting controls the DAB
modulator mode. If the ETI Control DAB Mode setting is ETI then this
field displays the current mode commanded via the MNSC setting or ETI
control via the MNSC. If the ETI Control DAB Mode setting is Local
then this field controls the current DAB mode. Values are Mode 1, Mode
2, Mode 3, or Mode 4.
3-78
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
Figure 3-49 DAB Setup Screens 5 & 6
Table 3-52 Xmtr Home>Exciter Home>Setup>DAB Modulator>Next x4
Field
Explanation
TII Settings
TII Insertion
Off/On. Enables/Disables Transmitter Identifier Information (TII). Main identifier
and sub-identifier.
TII Main Identifier
Local TII Main Identifier. Range is 0 – 63. When MNSC TII value is set to Local
this setting determines the TII main identifier.
Actual Main Identifier
When MNSC TII value is set to ETI this status displays the main identifier being
broadcast.
TII Sub Identifier
Local TII Sub Identifier. Range is 0 – 23. When MNSC TII value is set to Local
this setting determines the TII sub-identifier.
Actual Sub Identifier
When MNSC TII value is set to ETI the actual TII sub-identifier being
broadcast is displayed here.
Local Identifier
Sets the transmitter ID used as an identifier for the MNSC. In this instance
messages addressed to 17 will be decoded.
Scrambling
Scrambling
Off/On. Enables/Disables scrambling.
Scrambling Key
De-scrambling key entry. Range is 0 to 255.
Legacy OFE660 SFN Compliance
OFE660 Compliance
5/9/13
On/ Off. Controls setting of M2X SFN compatibility mode. Allows SFN
compatibility with legacy systems. Off is the default setting.
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
3-79
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
Figure 3-50 DAB Setup Screen 7
Table 3-53 Xmtr Home>Exciter Home>Setup>DAB Modulator>Next x5
Field
Explanation
Test Mode
Test Mode
Off/On. Controls the DAB test modes. Off disables all DAB test modes. 3G Test
Mode provides a full payload of PRBS. Provides a test signal for on-air signal
generation. Online Test Mode allows injection of PRBS into a DAB subchannel.
(Requires an ETI input.).
Subch. Under Test
If Online Test Mode is on this controls channel that PRBS data is injected into.
Available Subch.
Displays the number of subchannels available.
Test Pattern
Choose: Single Tone or Stop Test
3-80
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
3.11 Status Screens, All Modulation Systems
Figure 3-51 Status Screen
Table 3-54 Xmtr Home>Exciter Home>Status
Field
Explanation
Signal Processor
See 3.11.1 on page 3-82.
UDC/ Output
See 3.11.2 on page 3-84.
Transmitter I/O
Only available for select modulations. See 3.11.3 on page 3-85.
PFRU
See 3.11.4 on page 3-87.
Battery Backup
See 3.11.5 on page 3-90
Revisions
See 3.11.6 on page 3-91.
Softkeys
Export Fault Log
Save fault log to file for export. Use File>Save Page to save HTML or
text.
Setup
Displays Setup screen.
Fault Log
Displays Fault Log.
Exciter Home
Displays Exciter Home screen.
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
3-81
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
3.11.1 Signal Processor Status Screens
Figure 3-52 Signal Processor Status Screen (1 & 2)
Table 3-55 Status >Signal Processor (1 & 2)
Field
Explanation
Modulator Sub Window
FPGA Programmed
Green = FPGA is programmed. Red = fault
FPGA Health
Green = serial communication with Modulator FPGA is OK. Red = fault
Host Port Interface
Green = communication through the Modulator Host Port is OK. Red = fault
DAC Clock
Green = DAC clock is detected and deemed correct. Red = fault
Modulator Clock
Modulator clock is detected and deemed correct. Red = fault
4X Clock
Modulator 4X clock is detected and deemed correct. Red = fault
25MHz
Green = 25MHz clock is detected and deemed correct. Red = Fault
54MHz
Green = 54MHz Clock is detected and deemed correct. Red = Fault
RTAC Sub Window
FPGA Programmed
Green = DUC FPGA is programmed. Red = fault
FPGA Health
Green = serial communication with DUC FPGA is OK. Red = fault
DCM Lock
(Digital Clock Manager) Green = DUC FPGA DCM is locked. Red = fault
Input Buffer
Green = Input Buffer is OK. Red = overflow or underflow
Sample Rate Converter
Buffer
Green = Sample Rate Converter Buffer OK. Red = overflow or underflow
Adaptive DSP Health
Green = Controller is communicating with the Adaptive DSP. Red = fault
Temperature (°C)
3-82
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
Table 3-55 Status >Signal Processor (1 & 2)
Modulator FPGA
Warning temperature is 80 degrees C. Maximum temperature is 85 degrees C. If
the temperature rises above 85 degrees C for a period of three or more seconds,
both the Modulator and RTAC FPGAs de-program to protect the exciter from
damage. Warning = yellow and Fault = red.
RTAC FPGA
Warning temperature is 80 degrees C. Maximum temperature is 85 degrees C. If
the temperature rises above 85 degrees C for a period of three or more seconds,
both the Modulator and RTAC FPGAs de-program to protect the exciter from
damage.
Ambient
Ambient exciter temperature. Normal temperature range is between -30 degrees C
and 50 degrees C. Warning temperature is 80 degrees C.
Fans
Fan Status
The Fan Status field provides the summary fan status of the two front panel fans. If
both fans are OK, the Fan Status field is Green. If either fan has a warning, or one
fan is faulted, the Fan Status field is Yellow. If both fans are faulted, the Fan Status
field is Red. The exciter will operate on only one fan.
Tach 1
Tach 1 and Tach 2 fields provide readouts of the two exciter fan speeds. The value
within the parenthesis is the minimum allowable fan speed. The Tach 1 and Tach 2
fields are color coded as follows: OK = Green, Warning = Yellow, Fault = Red.
Refer to Table 3-56 on page 3-83 for fan speed status:
Tach 2
(See Tach 1)
Power Supply (VDC)
The values given in the parenthesis provide minimum and maximum voltage
limits, with the nominal supply voltage given next. If the indicated voltage in the
right hand window is within range (10% of nominal), its background will be
Green.
Softkeys
Status
Displays the Status screen.
Exciter Home
Pressing this soft key displays Exciter Home Screen, on right Figure 3-12
on page 3-17.
NOTE:
If temperatures are below the maximum value (given in parenthesis) the indicator
background will be Green. If above the maximum value, background will be Red.
Table 3-56 Fans Tach 1 and Tach 2
Fan Speed (rpm)
<= 2400
2401 – 2880
2881 – 46079
>= 46080
Status
Fault
Warning
OK
Warning (Check Fan Filter)
The Tach 1 and Tach 2 fields are color coded as follows: OK = Green, Warning =
Yellow, Fault = Red.
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
3-83
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
3.11.2 DUC/RTAC or UDC Output Status Screen
Figure 3-53 Status DUC/RTAC or UDC/Output
Table 3-57 Xmtr Home>Exciter Home>Status>DUC/RTAC or UDC/Output
Field
Explanation
Upconverter Sub Window
IF Level
Green indication background is OK, red = fault. IF Level (in mV), range
is 900 to 1100.
RF Level Cut
Green = UDC is communicating, Red = fault
Downconverter Level In
Pre-Filter
This is a bargraph indication which gives the relative pre- filter RTAC RF sample
level. The maximum signal level span is -20dBm to +5dBm, but, if possible, it is
better to attempt to keep the RF sample levels between -10 dBm and 0 dBm. Since
the sample levels at the sample cable outputs are usually too high, the level is
adjusted by adding appropriate attenuation at the exciter sample input connectors.
Post-Filter
This is a bargraph indication which gives the relative post- filter RTAC RF sample
level. The maximum signal level span is -20dBm to +5dBm, but, if possible, it is
better to attempt to keep the RF sample levels between -10 dBm and 0 dBm. Since
the sample levels at the sample cable outputs are usually too high, the level is
adjusted by adding appropriate attenuation at the exciter sample input connectors.
LO Sub Window
LO LevelF
3-84
Green indication background is OK, red = fault. LO Level (in mV), range
is 2222 to 2427.
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
Table 3-57 Xmtr Home>Exciter Home>Status>DUC/RTAC or UDC/Output
Field
Explanation
Softkeys
Xmtr Home
Displays the Xmtr Home screen.
Exciter Home
Pressing this soft key displays Exciter Home Screen, on right Figure 3-12
on page 3-17.
3.11.3 Transmitter I/O Status screen
Figure 3-54 Status TX I/O Screen
Table 3-58 Xmtr Home> Exciter Home> Status >Transmitter I/O
Field
Explanation
Status Sub Window
Power Raise
Green is active, blue is inactive, input on pin 1
Power Lower
Green is active, blue is inactive, input on pin 2
RF Mute
Green is active, Blue is inactive - input on pin 6
Adaptive Reset
Adaptive Hold
5/9/13
Resets adaptive correction tables to default values. Green is active, Blue is inactive
- input on pin 10
Holds current adaptive correction tables. Green is active, Blue is inactive - input
on pin 11
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
3-85
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
Table 3-58 Xmtr Home> Exciter Home> Status >Transmitter I/O
Field
Explanation
Foldback Input Voltage
The Foldback Input Voltage shown in this screen is a DC voltage which is
proportional to the reflected power returning to the transmitter output (the
transmitter VSWR). Excessive reflected power coming back to the transmitter will
cause the exciter RF output power to reduce. This is referred to as VSWR
foldback.
Softkeys
Status
Displays Status screen.
Exciter Home
Displays Exciter Home screen.
NOTE:
The indicators in this screen display the status of the input commands described
in Table 3-58 on page 3-85. These inputs enter the transmitter via the 25 pin male
Transmitter Interface connector on the transmitter I/O Board. The connector pin
numbers are given on Revisions Status Screens
3-86
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
3.11.4 PFRU Status Screens
Figure 3-55 PFRU Status Screens 1 & 2
Table 3-59 Xmtr Home> Exciter Home> Status >PFRU Status
Field
Explanation
FPGA
(Field Programmable Gate Array)
Programmed
Green = PFRU is programmed, Red = fault
Communication
Health
Green = Serial communication OK with PFRU FPGA, Red =fault
Sys Reference Clocks
External 1PPS
When selected as the 10MHz OCXO Reference, Present = Green background,
Missing = Yellow. A Blue background indicates this source is not selected as the
10MHz OCXO Reference. This input is derived from the customer’s GPS
receiver.
External 10MHz
When selected as the 10MHz OCXO Reference, Present = Green
background, Missing = Yellow. A Blue background indicates this source
is not selected as the 10MHz OCXO Reference. This input can be derived
from a variety of sources. See Table 3-17 on page 36 for more info.
Internal GPS 1PPS
When selected as the 10MHz OCXO Reference, Present = Green
background, Missing = Yellow. A Blue background indicates this source
is not selected as the 10MHz OCXO Reference. This signal is derived
from the transmitter’s internal GPS receiver.
PLL Reference
Clocks
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
3-87
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
Table 3-59 Xmtr Home> Exciter Home> Status >PFRU Status
32.768MHz (DAB
modulation)
Green = OK, Red = fault. The 32.768MHz Clock originates on the DAB
Input Option board and is routed to the Precision Frequency Reference
Unit (PFRU) where it is used as the IF PLL Reference. The IF PLL output
of the PFRU (labeled DAC Clock on the PFRU) is used on the Signal
Processing Board to produce clocks for the IF DAC and IF ADC, as well
as other various system clocks. An IF PLL Reference frequency of
32.768MHz is used for DAB modulation.
54 MHz
Green = OK, Red = fault. This is an internal clock used to synchronize the RF
PLL in the Precise Frequency Reference Unit (PFRU). Non-DAB modulation
formats will use either a 10MHz or 54MHz reference for the IF PLL
10 MHz
Green = OK, Red = fault. This is an internal clock used to synchronize the RF
PLL in the Precise Frequency Reference Unit (PFRU). Non-DAB modulation
formats will use either a 10MHz or 54MHz reference for the IF PLL
PLL Status
(LO) is Local Oscillator.
RF (LO) PLL Lock
Green = OK, Red = fault. This reference output from this circuit is used
by the up converter to set the exciter output to the correct frequency and
is used by the down converter to heterodyne the RF output samples back
to the IF frequency.
IF (LO) PLL Lock
Green = OK, Red = fault. This PLL output is used as a reference by the
FPGA Modulator, Digital Precorrector, and Digital to Analog Converter
(DAC) to generate the to produce the 140 MHz analog IF output from the
signal processor board.
IF PLL Ref
This indicates the reference frequency used by the IF local oscillator.
GPS
Power Supply
Green = OK, Red = fault
# Sat. Detected
The transmitter needs to detect a minimum of three satellites for GPS
lock and possible range.
Satellite Time
Clock time-of-day
Latitude
N yy degrees yy.yyy minutes
Longitude
W yy degrees yy.yyy minutes
Altitude
yyyy.yyy meters
NOTE: Time, Latitude, Longitude, and Altitude indications appear when the internal GPS receiver is locked
to three or more satellites.
3-88
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Platinum VAX-C Series
Section 3 Operation
Table 3-59 Xmtr Home> Exciter Home> Status >PFRU Status
Readiness (Holdover
Readiness bar graph)
Green if the graph indicates 90% or higher, red if below 90%, and gray if
the 1 PPS reference is lost.
This indicates the lock status of the OCXO (Oven Controlled crystal (X)
Oscillator). If the graph is Green, the 10MHz OCXO PLL is locked to the
1PPS reference and is capable of holdover (free running) for 24 hours.
This means that the oscillator frequency will remain within tolerance and
allow transmitter operation for 24 hours without being synchronized to its
reference.
OCXO Holdover Readiness bargraph percentage represents the difference
between the maximum and minimum oscillator control value over a 20
minute window, and is the indication of how well disciplined the
oscillator is. If the holdover status value is above 90%, then the oscillator
is only changing +/- 0.0003 Hz, and is good enough to use. The value will
never reach 100%, but when well disciplined should be 90% or greater.
The 10MHz OCXO is divided down to a 1Hz frequency and locked, via a
phase locked loop, to a GPS 1PPS (Pulse Per Second) reference signal.
The purpose is to create a synthesized 1PPS signal which is used as a
timing signal, for example, to synchronize a single frequency network.
The 10 MHz OCXO signal is also used as a reference for the local
oscillator, which determines the RF output frequency of the exciter.
The synthesized 1PPS signal will be present even when the GPS 1PPS
reference is missing. In that case, the 10 MHz OCXO holdover oscillator
will be free running.
Time Remaining
When the 1PPS reference is lost, the OCXO Holdover Readiness graph
turns gray, and the 10 MHz OCXO is free running. The Holdover Time
Remaining indication starts to count down from 24 hours. When its time
reaches zero, the transmitter will mute if it is in the SFN mode
When the reference is restored and the oscillator starts to lock, the OCXO
Holdover Readiness graph indication will start to increase. While it is
below 90%, the graph is Red. The exciter, if in the SFN mode, will be
muted. When the graph reaches 90% or higher, it will turn Green, and the
exciter, if in the SFN mode, will unmute.
Softkeys
Status
Displays Status screen.
Exciter Home
Displays Exciter Home screen.
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
3-89
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
3.11.5 Battery Backup Status Screen
The battery backup is active when the battery is charged. This includes shipment and
storage (unless the battery backup is disabled via an external jumper). When the battery
backup voltage decreases to approximately 86.5% of its nominal voltage, the battery
backup is disabled. When AC power is again applied to the VAX-C, the backup battery
recharge time is two to three hours.
The Battery Backup screen gives status and information on the exciter battery backup
board. Descriptions of the various battery backup screen indications are given in the
following tables. More detailed descriptions of the battery back up option functionality
can be found in Section 4.4.5, Battery Backup Option, on page 4-9.
Figure 3-56 Battery Backup Status Screen
Table 3-60 Xmtr Home> Exciter Home> Status > Battery Backup
Field
Explanation
UPS State
Status is Enabled or Disabled. This is an input from the transmitter I/O. It
is used to disable the backup battery. The input for this control is pin 9 of
the Transmitter Interface Connector, which is found on the transmitter I/O
board option. The battery backup can be disabled by addition of a
connector/jumper described in Figure 2-6 on page 2-19.
UPS Mode
Indicates either On Battery or Mains OK.
Manufacture Date
Expiration Date
Cycle Count
3-90
Date battery was released by manufacturer.
Battery is considered expired if this six year expiration date has passed.
Number of charge/discharge cycles. Replace battery when 2000 count is reached.
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
Table 3-60 Xmtr Home> Exciter Home> Status > Battery Backup
Field
Explanation
Software Version
Software version read from chip on battery pack.
+12VDC Battery
A fault occurs if the +12 volt output drops to +10 volts.
Note: The +9.6 volt output of the backup battery is converted to +12
VDC. The fault occurs when the +9.6 VDC drops to 8.3 VDC
Softkeys
Status
Opens Status screen as shown in Figure 3-51 on page 3-81
Exciter Home
Pressing this soft key displays Exciter Home Screen, on right Figure 3-12
on page 3-17.
3.11.6 Revisions Status Screens (1 & 2)
System software revisions information is displayed on Revision Status Screens 1 & 2
below. Select Next to display Hardware Revisions screen. The most important field is
the Build Version. The Build revision indicates the software build that is currently
running on the system. If the build revision reads Customer Special then the system is
running a non-released or incomplete build.
Figure 3-57 Revisions Status Screens (1 & 2)
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
3-91
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
3.12 Status Screens - ATSC Modulation
Figure 3-58 ATSC Main Status Screen (right)-ATSC Modulator Status Screen 1 (left)
Figure 3-59 Xmtr Home>Exciter Home>Status>ATSC Modulator (screen 1)
Field
Explanation
Primary ASI
Primary SMPTE
Auxiliary ASI
Green if present. Red if faulted or absent.
If transport stream input is present, but are not selected for transmission, its
indicators will be yellow. Typically, only two inputs used at a time. See Section
2.7.4 to determine which two inputs will be used.
Auxiliary SMPTE
MPEG Packets in
Buffer
Incoming MPEG data is stored in a FIFO buffer. For MFN operation, the usual
FIFO mid-buffer depth is 1304 packets. In SFN operation, the number of packets
held in the buffer is dependent on the emission timing requirements. In either case,
the number of packets in the buffer should be relatively stable.
MPEG Sync Lost
Count
Number of times the exciter's input circuit has lost synchronization with the
incoming MPEG sync to the extent that the circuit had errors and had to reacquire.
M/H Data Present
Yes or No. If the exciter has MDTV mode enabled, this will indicate whether or
not mobile DTV is indeed present in the transport stream.
Softkeys
Export Fault Log
Save fault log to file for export. Use File>Save Page to save HTML or
text.
Setup
Displays Setup screen.
Fault Log
Displays Fault Log.
Exciter Home
Displays Exciter Home screen.
3-92
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
Figure 3-60 ATSC Modulator Status Screen (Page) 2
Figure 3-61 Xmtr Home>Exciter Home>Status>ATSC Modulator>Next (screen 2)
Field
Explanation
Modulator Mute
Green = OK, Red = Mute. If the digital modulator section is actively
muted, this will indicate red.
Negative Delay
In SFN situations, the exciter can only insert (add) delay. If the timing
parameters are improperly set at the transmission adapter or a network
change (such as a substituting a satellite path for a microwave path to get
the transport stream to the exciter) the exciter may determine that based
on the resultant timing, the result indicates that it must remove delay to
actually meet the emission timing. This simply isn't possible and will be
indicated.
Delay Exceeds 1 Second
Green = Delay < 1 second, red = delay > 1 second. Transmitter delay, for
SFN (single frequency network) data transmission synchronism, is
measured against the 1PPS (pulse per second) pulse. If transmitter delay
exceeds 1 second, SFN data transmission synchronism is impossible.
Mute to Increase Delay
Modulator has determined that it can no longer meet the required timing
and it must mute it's output to re-sync and increase the delay inserted
Mute Count
This is the number of times the digital modulator has been muted.
Reset Mute Count Soft Key
Pressing this soft key resets the mute count to zero.
Max Delay
This is a read back of the maximum delay parameter being carried inside the
Distributed Transmission Packet. It should match the value set in the Distributed
Transmission Adapter. This value is indicative of the maximum transport delay the
network designer / operator expects to see. It's maximum value is 100 nS less than
1 second.
Transport Delay
This is the time from when a packet is released inside the transmission adapter
until the time it arrives in the modulator. It also includes a nominal amount of
internal FIFO buffer hold time.
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
3-93
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
Figure 3-61 Xmtr Home>Exciter Home>Status>ATSC Modulator>Next (screen 2)
Field
Explanation
Offset Delay
Time offset for emission contained in the Distributed Transmission Packet for this
particular transmitter.
Delay Adjust
This is a dynamic indication of the amount of delay adjustment the modulator is
computing. Nominally this should be zero. It often moves plus or minus 100 nS for
minor adjustments. Important that it is relatively stable, not wildly fluctuating.
TAD
Transmitter to antenna delay. This the throughput delay, measured after the signal
leaves the exciter network delay circuit and travels to the output of the transmitter.
This delay is important if the network consists of transmitters from different
manufactures, where the output process time will change from one manufacturer to
another.
Total Delay
This is the resultant total delay being managed by the timing requirements to meet
the emission time, including TAD.
# of Dly Inc
Number of delay increments that the modulator has had to perform to maintain
emission timing. High or continual incrementing numbers here indicate instability
in the network's distribution of the transport stream or timing. Ideally this is zero.
# of Dly Dec
Number of delay decrements that the modulator has had to perform to maintain
emission timing. High or continual incrementing numbers here indicate instability
in the network's distribution of the transport stream or timing. Ideally this is zero.
Reset Count Soft Key
Pressing this soft key resets the above two counts to zero.
Softkeys
Status
Displays Status screen.
Exciter Home
Displays Exciter Home screen.
3-94
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
Figure 3-62 ATSC Modulator Status Screen (Page) 3
Figure 3-63 Xmtr Home>Exciter Home>Status>ATSC Modulator>Next>Next (screen 3)
Field
Explanation
Network ID
This is the Network ID entered at the distributed transmission adapter. In
the USA, is customary to use the assigned TSID for the station as the
network ID.
Lock Method
ATSC's A/110 standard specified two methods to achieve timing
reference for SFN emission, they are GPS and stream locked.
In the stream locked mode, the exciter extracts it's timing from the 19.39
MHz clock embedded in the transport stream.
The exciter section only supports GPS locked mode. This mode is set by
the distributed transmission adapter. If another manufacturer's adapter is
being used and it has been set up for stream locked mode, the M2X will
not lock and a fault will be indicated.
Watermark Serial Data
Inhibited
RF Watermark is a slow speed serial data stream that can be modulated
onto each of the 8 symbol levels emitted. This enables use of specialized
test equipment in the field to figure out which transmitters are being
received in an SFN environment.
In addition to transmitter identification, the RF Watermark can be used as
a slow-speed serial communication channel. The M2X does not currently
support this channel, but the DTxA has the ability, in compliance with the
standard, to tell a downstream modulator to inhibit the modulation of this
data on the watermark or not. This is a read back of the setting of that bit
in the DTxP.
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
3-95
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
Figure 3-63 Xmtr Home>Exciter Home>Status>ATSC Modulator>Next>Next (screen 3)
Field
Bury Ratio
Explanation
Bury ratio tells how many dBs the RF watermark is “buried” underneath
the main 8 modulation levels of the symbols.
0 = off, no ratio
1 = 39 dB below the main.
2 = 36 dB below the main.
3 = 33 dB below the main.
4 = 30 dB below the main.
5 = 27 dB below the main.
6 = 24 dB below the main.
7 = 21 dB below the main.
A warning will appear in the fault log for levels of 5 or higher, indicating
that the output signal to noise achievable is being limited by the RF
watermark insertion.
Softkeys
Status
Displays Status screen.
Exciter Home
Displays Exciter Home screen.
3-96
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
3.13 Status Screens - CTTB/CMMB Modulation
Figure 3-64 on left - CTTB Main Status Screen on right - CTTB Modulator Status Screen 1
Figure 3-65 Xmtr Home>Exciter Home>Status>CTTB Modulator (screen 1)
Field
Explanation
ASI Input Loss
Primary
Display only showing the status of the primary transport stream (ASI 1).
Red = loss of transport stream, Green = transport stream present.
ASI Input Loss
Auxiliary
Display only showing the status of the auxiliary transport stream (ASI 2).
Red = loss of transport stream, Green = transport stream present.
SIP Status
: Displays status of this parameter.
Power-On Input
Displays the selected transport stream (primary of secondary).
Active Input
Displays the selected transport stream (primary or secondary) which is
active (on the air).
Switching Mode
Possibilities are Automatic or Manual. Displays the selected transport
stream switch mode. If in the automatic mode and the current ASI stream
has an issue or drops out, and the Auxiliary Input is set to Yes, the system
will switch to the auxiliary ASI stream if it is available and good.
Network Operation
Displays the network configuration mode MFN (multiple frequency
network) or SFN (single frequency network).
Auxiliary Input
Indicates yes or no. If yes is selected the exciter can be made to switch to
an auxiliary input if the active input faults or drops out.
Softkeys
Export Fault Log
Save fault log to file for export. Use File>Save Page to save HTML or
text.
Setup
Displays Setup screen.
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
3-97
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
Figure 3-65 Xmtr Home>Exciter Home>Status>CTTB Modulator (screen 1)
Field
Explanation
Fault Log
Displays Fault Log.
Exciter Home
Displays Exciter Home screen.
Status
Displays Status screen.
Figure 3-66 CTTB Modulator Status Screen 2
Figure 3-67 Xmtr Home>Exciter Home>Status>CTTB Modulator>Next (screen 2)
Field
Explanation
Output Bandwidth
Displays RF Output bandwidth. Presently fixed at 8 MHz. Future options
are 7 MHz, 6 MHz or 5MHz.
Carriers
Displays the number of RF carriers in the output signal. Present values
are Multi, Single, or Two Pilot. Multi = COFDM type modulation, Single
= single carrier modulation system, Two Pilot = single carrier modulation
mode with two pilots
Guard Interval
Displays the guard interval time. Presently fixed at PN595 (1/6). Options
are PN945 (1/4), PN595 (slightly less than 1/6), or PN420 (1/9). This is
the length of the guard interval in symbols. The total frame length is 3780
symbols. Guard interval is the guard interval symbol length divided by
the total symbol length. Example: 945/3780 = 1/4 .
Guard Interval PN
Displays options, which are variable or constant. Constant only used with
PN595, Variable is used with PN945 and PN420
Constellation
Display choices are 4QAM, 16QAM, 32QAM, or 64QAM.
3-98
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
Figure 3-67 Xmtr Home>Exciter Home>Status>CTTB Modulator>Next (screen 2)
Field
Explanation
LDPC Rate
Display values are 0.4 (2/5), 0.6, (3/5) or 0.8 (4/5). The LDPC Rate
provides three rates of forward error correction. The decimal, or fraction,
gives the relative efficiency of the forward error correction by dividing
the information bits by the total block length. For example, block length
= 7488 bits, information bits = 3008, therefore: 3008/7488 = 0.4 or 2/5.
This indicates that there are two information bits for every five output
bits.
Time Interleaver
Display values are 240 or 720symbols. This is a data convolutional
interleaver. The data is interleaved to a depth of 240 or 720 symbols.
Softkeys
Status
Displays Status screen.
Exciter Home
Displays Exciter Home screen.
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
3-99
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
Figure 3-68 CTTB Modulator Status Screen 3
Figure 3-69 Xmtr Home>Exciter Home>Status>CTTB Modulator (screen 3)
Field
Explanation
Output Process Time
Displays throughput delay, measured after it leaves the exciter network
delay circuit and travels to the output of the transmitter. This delay is
important if the network consists of transmitters from different
manufactures, where the output process time will change from one
manufacturer to another.
Local Delay Adjust
Displays offset time, which is used, along with other delays, to calculate
the exciter data storage time. It is needed to synchronize the data arrival
at the single frequency network overlap zone when it is not located at the
geographic center of two or more transmitters.
Maximum Network
Delay
Additional delay added in order to be able to easily add a transmitter to
the network without having to adjust the delay of all network
transmitters. This delay is set in the distribution network control center.
Distribution Network
Delay
Display of the delay from the distribution network common point to each
transmitter in the single frequency network. It is usually measured
automatically in each transmitter exciter and displayed here. This delay
varies from transmitter to transmitter and must be taken into account in
order to synchronize the data output from each transmitter.
SIP Delay Adjust
Displays status of this parameter
TX ID
Displays identification number assigned to this transmitter, which is part
of a single frequency network. The ID is necessary to allow
communication with and control of each transmitter in a single frequency
network.
DC Test Tone Mode:
Displays test status, which is Disable or Enable. Enabling the DC Test
Tone Mode transmits a single tone which is placed at the center of the
spectrum. It is used to measure carrier frequency. The single tone signal
is the same power as the exciter is putting out normally.
3-100
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
Figure 3-69 Xmtr Home>Exciter Home>Status>CTTB Modulator (screen 3)
Field
Explanation
Softkeys
Status
Displays Status screen.
Exciter Home
Displays Exciter Home screen.
Figure 3-70 CTTB Modulation Status Screen 4
Figure 3-71 Xmtr Home>Exciter Home>Status>CTTB Modulator (screen 4)
Field
Explanation
Bit Rate Adaptation
Display state is Disabled or Enabled. This applies only to MFN mode. Bit
Rate Adaptation will drop all incoming null packets, introduce new null
packets as appropriate to manage the data rate and restamp Program
Clock Reference (PCR) appropriately.
This is null packet insertion and PCR (program clock rate, time stamp to
synchronize the receiver) restamp i ng.
SIP Frequency Offset
Displayed in Hz. This is a frequency offset which may be necessart when
operating in SFN mode.
Unmute if No SIP
Display state is No or Yes. Controls whether or not the M2X is released
from mute if no SIP packet is detected in SFN mode. This is a network
safeguard. (SIP = Second Frame Initialization packet).
Softkeys
Status
Displays Status screen.
Exciter Home
Displays Exciter Home screen.
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
3-101
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
3.14 Status Screens - ISDB-T Modulation
Figure 3-72 on left-ISDB-T Main Status Screen on right-ISDB-T Modulator Status Screen 1
Figure 3-73 Xmtr Home>Exciter Home>Status>ISDB-T Modulator (screen 1)
Field
Explanation
Active Stream
Display only showing which transport stream (ASI 1 or ASI 2) is on the
air.
Transport Stream Rate
Input bit rate of the active ASI transport stream.
ASI Input
Green = transport stream Present. Red = transport stream selected as active is
missing. May be Grey and indicates stream is missing or inactive.
Modulation Ready
Green = Modulator has ASI lock, parameters ready, the internal
initialization is complete, and the ASI FIFO buffer is at least 1/2 full
(ASI FIFO watermark is valid). Red = Modulator waiting for the above
conditions to complete.
Param(eter)s Ready
Green = An IIP TSP (Transport Stream Packet) has been received and the
modulator has been configured with modulation parameters. Red = The
modulator has not received an HP TSP for configuration. (HP = ISDB-T
Information Packet.)
TSP Error
Green = System OK. Red = When NULLs are inserted due to packets that
did not arrive within the (50.2656 us + 1 us) window.
Reed-Solomon Error
Green = no error, Red = errors exist.
Emergency Alarm
Broadcasting
Start flag for emergency alarm broadcasting. Green = Startup control
available. Plain = No startup control.
Softkeys
Export Fault Log
Save fault log to file for export. Use File>Save Page to save HTML or
text.
Setup
Displays Setup screen.
3-102
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
Figure 3-73 Xmtr Home>Exciter Home>Status>ISDB-T Modulator (screen 1)
Field
Explanation
Fault Log
Displays Fault Log.
Exciter Home
Displays Exciter Home screen.
Status
Displays Status screen.
Figure 3-74 on left - ISDB-T Modulator Status Screen 2
Figure 3-75 Xmtr Home>Exciter Home>Status>ISDB-T Modulator>Next (screen 2)
Field
Explanation
ISDB-T Mode
ISDB-T mode (see Section 2.3 of ARIB STD B-31). Will display mode 1, 2 or 3.
Guard Interval
Display only, this is the length of the guard band, expressed as a fraction of the
useful symbol time. Values are 1/4, 1/8, 1/16, or 1/32 of the OFDM Symbol
Length. (see Section 3.14.2 of ARIB STD B-31).
Partial Reception
Partial reception flag Yes = Partial reception available. No = No partial reception.
Input Overflow
Status of ASI 1 and ASI 2. Green = OK. Red = overflow
Convolutional Coder
Layers A, B, and C. Green = OK, Red = Fault.This represents the Convolutional
Coder FIFO underflow and overflow faults for the three layers.
Interleaver Length
Layers A, B, and C. Further information is provided in Table 3-12 in ARIB STD
B-31.
Code rate
Layers A, B, and C. This is the Convolutional Coding rates for the three layers.
Display choices are 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8.
Modulation Type
Layers A, B, and C. Display indicates modulation type for each layer; DQPSK,
QPSK, 16QAM, 64QAM.
Number Segments
Layers A, B, and C. This display indicates the number of segments which are
assigned to layers A, B, and C.
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
3-103
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
Figure 3-75 Xmtr Home>Exciter Home>Status>ISDB-T Modulator>Next (screen 2)
Field
Explanation
Softkeys
Status
Displays Status screen.
Exciter Home
Displays Exciter Home screen.
Figure 3-76 on left - ISDB-T Modulator Status Screen 3
Figure 3-77 Xmtr Home>Exciter Home>Status>ISDB-T Modulator>Next>Next (screen
3)
Field
Explanation
Packet Count A
Total number of layer A transport stream packets (TSPs) received. Count
is reset when any parameter change.
Packet Count B
Total number of layer B transport stream packets (TSPs) received. Count
is reset when any parameter change
Packet Count C
Total number of layer C transport stream packets (TSPs) received. Count
is reset when any parameter change.
Null Packet Count
Total number of NULL transport stream packets (TSPs) received. Count
is reset on any parameter change.
TS Modulator Init
(initialization) Count
Number of time the modulator has been initialized by received parameter
changes. This number increments each time the parameters change. This
number is reset on power cycle or when Reset Counts is pressed.
ASI 1 MPEG Loss
Count
This is a running count of how many times the modulator has lost lock
with the 0x47 sync bytes in the transport stream. This number is reset on
power cycle or when Reset Counts is pressed.
3-104
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
Figure 3-77 Xmtr Home>Exciter Home>Status>ISDB-T Modulator>Next>Next (screen
3)
Field
Explanation
ASI 2 MPEG Loss
Count
This is a running count of how many times the modulator has lost lock
with the 0x47 sync bytes in the transport stream. This number is reset on
power cycle or when Reset Counts is pressed.
ASI Reed Solomon
Error Count
The R-S Error count accumulates the number of errors detected on the
input transport stream. This does not necessarily indicate these were un
correctable errors, but more of an indication that errors were present on
the input. This number is reset on power cycle or when Reset Counts is
pressed.
IIP Update Count
Counter storing number of times IIP Update is detected. This number is
reset on power cycle or when Reset Counts is pressed. IIP = ISDB-T
Information Packet.
MPEG Packets in
200ms Buffer
The MPEG Packets in the 200ms Buffer refer to the depth of the input
buffer. In order to lock to the input transport stream a buffer with a
watermark indicator is used. The depth is read once a second and the FFT
clock is adjusted until 100ms of data is maintained in the buffer. This is
not applicable in SFN mode.
Reset Counters
Soft key, when pressed, resets the above counters to zero.
Softkeys
Status
Displays Status screen.
Exciter Home
Displays Exciter Home screen.
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
3-105
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
3.15 Status Screens - DVB-T Modulation
Figure 3-78 DVB-T Status Screen (left) -DVB-T Modulator Status Screen 1 (right)
Figure 3-79 Xmtr Home>Exciter Home>Status>DVB-T Modulator (screen 1)
Field
Explanation
Active Stream
Displays Active Transport stream.
ASI Packet Status
In non-hierarchy mode only the high priority (HP) input is used. In
hierarchy mode both high priority (HP) and low priority (LP) inputs are
used.
The DVB-T Packet Status sub window displays the status of parameters
for the four ASI input transport streams shown following:
ASI 1 HP: Primary input, high priority channel
ASI 1 LP: Primary input, low priority channel
ASI 2 HP: Auxiliary input, high priority channel
ASI 2 LP: Auxiliary input, low priority channel
ASI Input
"OK" if input is present, "Error" if input missing.
ASI Uncorr(ected)
Error
ASI Uncorr(ected) Error displays "OK" if no errors are uncorrected,
"Error" if some packets had errors that could not be corrected by ReedSolomon error correction.
ASI Corrected Error
ASI Corrected Error displays "OK" if no errors detected, "Error" if some
packets had errors that were corrected by Reed-Solomon error correction.
ASI Input Overflow
ASI Input Overflow displays "OK" if input data rate OK. "Error" if input
data rate too high (FIFO overflow).
NIT Status
NIT Status displays “NIT OK” if an NIT (Network Information Table)
packet is detected in input transport stream. If no NIT packets are
detected then “No NIT” will be displayed.
PCR Status
PCR Status displays “PCR OK” if PCR (Program Clock Reference) has
been detected in transport stream. If no transport stream is present it will
display “No NIT”. If transport stream is present, but PCR is not present it
will display “No NIT”.
3-106
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
Figure 3-79 Xmtr Home>Exciter Home>Status>DVB-T Modulator (screen 1)
Field
Explanation
MIP Status
MIP (Mega-frame Initialization Packet) Status displays “MIP OK” if MIP
packets are detected in transport stream and they have no errors. If no
MIP packets are detected, or if there are MIP packet errors, it will display
“Error. If the input is not required then “N/A” will always be displayed.
SFN Sync
SFN (Single Frequency Network) Sync displays “OK” if VAX-C in the
SFN (Single Frequency Network) mode and the mega-frame timing is
properly aligned. If in SFN mode and the mega-frame timing is not
properly aligned an “Error” will be displayed.
If not in SFN mode or if the input is not required, then “OK” is always
displayed.
MFS Status
MFS Sync (Mega Frame Sync) displays “OK” if MPEG sync word 0x47 is
detected properly in transport stream input. If MPEG sync word is not
detected properly then “Error” will be displayed. If the input is not
required, then “OK” is always displayed.
Softkeys
Export Fault Log
Save fault log to file for export. Use File>Save Page to save HTML or
text.
Setup
Displays Setup screen.
Fault Log
Displays Fault Log.
Exciter Home
Displays Exciter Home screen.
Status
Displays Status screen.
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
3-107
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
Figure 3-80 - DVB-T Modulator Status Screen 2
Figure 3-81 Xmtr Home>Exciter Home>Status>DVB-T Modulator>Next (screen 2)
Field
Explanation
Active Stream
Displays Active Transport stream.
ASI Packet Status
In non-hierarchy mode only the high priority (HP) input is used. In
hierarchy mode both high priority (HP) and low priority (LP) inputs are
used.
The DVB-T Packet Status sub window displays the status of parameters
for the four ASI input transport streams shown following:
ASI 1 HP: Primary input, high priority channel
ASI 1 LP: Primary input, low priority channel
ASI 2 HP: Auxiliary input, high priority channel
ASI 2 LP: Auxiliary input, low priority channel
ASI Input
"OK" if input is present, "Error" if input missing.
Packets
Displays the number of transport packets received in one second.
Nulls
Displays the number of Null transport packets received in one second.
Errors
Displays the number of transport packets with errors received in one
second.
Softkeys
Status
Displays Status screen.
Exciter Home
Displays Exciter Home screen.
3-108
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
3.16 Status Screens - DVB-T2 Modulation
Figure 3-82 on left DVB-T2 Main Status
on right DVB-T2 Modulator Status Screen 1
Figure 3-83 Xmtr Home>Exciter Home>Status>DVB-T2 Modulator (screen 1)
Field
Explanation
Active Stream
Displays Active Transport stream.
ASI Input
If the ASI input is present with no errors, a green box with the word PRES appears
under the label. The area under the label remains blue with -- if input is absent.
Bitrate (Mb/s)
Displays total transport stream bit rate for each ASI input.
Switch Elapsed Time (s)
Displays time elapsed since switchover.
Switch Count
Displays the number of switchovers since last reset.
Timestamp Type
Indicates mechanism for synchronizing output of transmitters signaled by
T2 gateway (see TS 102 773 section 5.2.7). Only required in T2MI mode.
Relative = timestamp only contains time of emission relative to next 1
pps (subseconds)
Absolute = timestamp includes absolute time of emission
Null = timestamp packet detected, but no timing alignment required
N/A = no timestamp packet required/detected (MPEG-TS mode)
Processing Time
Internal processing delay of modulator. This value is used in planning of
SFN network timing. Processing time is delay from reception of L1
packet (end of T2 frame) at transport input to I/Q data ready into SFN
delay memory.
Softkeys
Status
Displays Status screen.
Exciter Home
Displays Exciter Home screen.
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
3-109
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
Figure 3-84 DVB-T2 Status Modulator Screen 2
Figure 3-85 Xmtr Home>Exciter Home>Status>DVB-T2 Modulator (screen 2)
Field
Explanation
Symbols Per T2 Frame
The total number of symbols per T2 frame. This is data symbols plus P1
symbols.
Data Cells Per T2
Frame
Data cells per T2 frame < subcarriers per symbol X symbols per T2
frame. Maximum is 13920 X 138. This is reduced by pilot subcarriers and
L1 signaling cells.
Total PLPs
Total number of Physical Layer Pipes (PLP) sent in the T2 transmission
super-frame. In MPEG-TS input mode there is only 1 PLP. In T2MI input
mode there can be multiple PLPs from 1 to 255.
PLP Number
The number of an individual PLP for parameter entry/display. In MPEGTS mode the PLP Number is 0 fixed. In T2MI mode the user can select
PLP Number from 0 to 254.
PLP ID
PLP identifier number for the selected PLP Number. Range 0-254 set by
T2 gateway (PLP_ID from EN 302 755, section 7.2.3.1).
PLP Bitrate (Mb/s)
Calculated payload bit rate for the selected PLP Number.
Max FEC Blocks
Maximum number of forward error correction blocks per interleaver
frame for the selected PLP number (PLP_NUM_BLOCKS_MAX from EN
302 755, section 7.2.3.1).
Softkeys
Status
Displays Status screen.
Exciter Home
Displays Exciter Home screen.
3-110
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
3.17 Status Screens - DAB Modulator
Figure 3-86 DAB Status Screens 1 & 2
Table 3-61 Xmtr Home>Exciter Home>Status>DAB Modulator &> Next
Field
Explanation
Transport Stream
Active Stream
Displays active transport stream. ETI 1 or 2.
ETI Input
Displays Status of this parameter.
Time Stamp Present
Displays Status of this parameter.
Byte Error (10sec)
Numerical readout for ETI1 and ETI2.
Byte Error (1000sec)
Numerical readout for ETI1 and ETI2.
Cyclic Redundancy Check
CRC Errors/sec
Displays Status of this parameter.
Control
Off/On
Error Thresh.
Set desired value.
Subchannels
Select Subchannel
Enter desired subchannel.
Available
Subchannels
Displays Status of this parameter.
Start Address
Displays Status of this parameter.
Subchannel Number
Displays Status of this parameter.
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
3-111
Section 3 Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
Table 3-61 Xmtr Home>Exciter Home>Status>DAB Modulator &> Next
Field
Explanation
Rate
Displays Status of this parameter
Protection Level
Displays Status of this parameter.
Softkeys
Status
Opens Status screen as shown in Figure 3-51 on page 3-81
Exciter Home
Pressing this soft key displays Exciter Home Screen.
3-112
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Platinum VAX-C Series
Section 4
Theory of
Operation
4.1
4
Introduction
This section contains detailed descriptions of the VAX-C Series transmitter, its internal
sub-assemblies and any pertinent information regarding external assemblies.
This chapter contains four sections:
•
•
•
•
4.2
Introduction
Logic Symbols
Block Diagrams
Modulator Overview
Active Logic Symbols
Each logic signal has an active and inactive state and a unique name within the system.
To differentiate between active high or active low logic states on the schematics, a
forward slash (/) is placed in front of an active LOW signal name such as /RF_MUTE.
This means that if this logic line is pulled low, the transmitter RF will be muted. By the
same logic, the signal RF_MUTE_LED (an active high signal with no forward slash)
will turn on the RF mute LED when it goes high.
In some cases, a logic signal may act as a toggle with both states active, as with the
signal /ON_OFF, where LOW = ON and a HIGH = OFF. If this signal is inverted it
would be ON_/OFF.
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
4-1
Platinum VAX-C Series
Section 4 Theory of Operation
4.3
Block Diagram
See Section 1 in this manual for a basic transmitter overview, model numbers and block
diagram (Figure 1-4, on page 1-9). As a standard practice, the first page of a PC (printed
circuit) board schematic is also a block diagram for that board. Table 1-1 on page 1-5
gives the basic Platinum model numbers and configurations.
Figure 4-1 is a simplified transmitter system RF block diagram. This diagram shows the
transport stream input to the modulator, the modulator RF output signal connected to
the driver input, and the PA output connected to the PA directional coupler. Outside the
transmitter encloser, the output of the PA coupler is connected to the high power filter
input and the output of the high power filter connected to the directional coupler. The
coupler output is connected to the antenna or the test load.
Two RF feedback signals are connected from the transmitter RF output system to the
modulator. These feedback signals are taken before and after the high power filter,
which follows the PA, and are needed to perform the non-linear and linear RTAC (real
time adaptive correction) precorrection of the modulator RF output signal. The PA (pre
filter) RTAC feedback signal is internally routed in the transmitter. The high power
filter and its output coupler are located outside the transmitter enclosure, and therefore
the post-filter RTAC feedback signal is routed externally from the output coupler to an
SMA connector on the rear panel of the transmitter. See Figure 1-3 on page 1-4 for the
post-filter sample connector.
VAX-C Transmitter
Transport
Stream
or Analog
Input
RF output
to Antenna
PA Assembly
Modulator
Drivers
PA
PA
Coupler
High
Power
Filter
Output
Coupler
PA (Non-Linear) RTAC
RF Feedback Sample
Post-Filter (Linear) RTAC
RF Feedback Sample
Figure 4-1 VAX-C Transmitter - RF Interconnection Block Diagram
4-2
888-2857-004
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Platinum VAX-C Series
Section 4 Theory of Operation
RTAC precorrection is used to cancel the nonlinear distortions generated in the PA
assembly and the linear distortions generated in the high power bandpass filter which
follows the PA.
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
4-3
Section 4 Theory of Operation
4.4
Platinum VAX-C Series
Modulator Overview
Figure 4-2, on page 4-5 is an overall block diagram of the LPU modulator section.
Refer to it while studying the modulator assembly.
The VAX-C modulator section consists of 7 circuit boards including:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Signal Processor Board.
PFRU (Precise Frequency Reference Unit Board.
Up Down Converter Board. This assembly consists of a UDC Base I/O (input/output)
board and a piggy backed UDC board.
Power Supply and Low Voltage Distribution Board.
Battery Backup Option Board.
Front Panel LED and Switch Board.
Transmitter I/O (input/output) Interface Board is piggy backed under the right rear
side of the signal processor board. This board can be inserted and removed through
the rear panel of the VAX-C chassis.
The amplifier section of the VAX-C consists of the following:
•
•
•
Power Amplifier Board, which is mounted in the PA assembly
PA Interface Board, which is mounted on the left side of the PA assembly.
AC/DC Converter Board, which is mounted on the AC/DC converter assembly.
Signal flow through the VAX-C is shown by the wide dark lines in Figure 4-2, on page
4-5.
4-4
888-2857-004
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Section 4 Theory of Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
Signal Processor Board
and Control Board
Analog
Loopback
ASI HP 1
ASI LP 1
SMPTE HP 2
SMPTE LP 2
Transport
Stream
Switch
ADC
Digital
Precorrector
FPGA
Modulator
Front
Panel RF
Sample
DAC
AC/DC
Converter
Divide
By 4
Control
10 MHz Tune
1 PPS
Int 10 MHz
Part of FPGA
Modulator
Control
1PPS
GPS
Receiver
PA
Status
And
Control
Local Osc
DAC
Clock
Frequency
54 MHz
Clock
140 MHz IF Signal
RF Output
To HPF
DC
To
PA
Power
Amplifier
Interface
Up Converter
DC Input
And
Control
Power
Amplifier
Up Converter
RF Output
To PA
1st
L.O.
10 MHz
Reference
Precise Frequency
Reference Board
2nd
L.O.
Local Osc
Distribution
GPS
Antenna
Down Converter
Down Converter
Multiple
Input
RF
Switch
PA RTAC
Sample Input
RTAC POST HPF
Sample Input
Up Down Converter Board
Figure 4-2 VAX-C Modulator - Signal Flow Block Diagram
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
4-5
Section 4 Theory of Operation
4.4.1
Platinum VAX-C Series
Signal Processor Board Overview
The signal processor board serves as a motherboard for the UAC-C Transmitter
modulator. The board interfaces to all the boards in the modulator. Refer to Figure 4-2
on page 4-5.
The signal processor board also serves as the ASI input and output, decoder and
encoder, the modulator, the digital precorrector (RTAC circuit for digital modulation
modes), and it contains the ADC and DAC which interfaces to the up/downconverter
board RF connections. The signal processor board has control interfaces to the
transmitter I/O Interface board, the PA Interface board (which in turn connects to the
up\down converter board), the PFRU board, the front panel, and the LVPS.
Power for the signal processor board is derived from the LVPS, which delivers +5Vdc,
+12Vdc, -12V, +24Vdc, and +12VBATT. All other voltages necessary for the signal
processor board are derived from these inputs. All boards receive their power through
the signal processor board.
Monitoring of the power supplies and ambient temperature are performed by the micro
module, which is a daughter board mounted on the bottom right, rear corner of the
signal processor board. The micro module also initiates offline tests requested by the
user, such as memory tests, serial channel loop back, predefined board level tests, and
predefined LPU tests.
4.4.1.0.1 DAC
The DUC writes the 16-bit I and Q data to the AD9779 DAC. The DAC will be clocked
by the ~409 to 460 MHz clock from the PFRU. The 1/4 FDAC clock output of the DAC
is used as a clock for the DUC FPGA and the RF Sample ADC. The DAC will provide
the Up/Downconverter board with the 140MHz IF at a 0 dBm average level.
4.4.1.0.2 ADC
The AD9461 ADC will be clocked by the 1/4 FDAC clock. It will convert the 140 MHz
IF from the downconverter to a 16 bit sample provided to the DUC FPGA. The ADC
will also provide the DUC FPGA with the Sample A/D clock.
4-6
888-2857-004
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Platinum VAX-C Series
4.4.2
Section 4 Theory of Operation
The Modulation Process
The transport stream inputs are applied to the FPGA modulator.
The modulator will process the transport stream and recover the data and the clock. In
some modulation standards, the clocks required to synchronize several circuits in the
signal processing board are phase locked to the recovered transport stream clock.
During the modulation process the FPGA modulator adds forward error correction to
the digitized signal. This forward error correction includes, but is not limited to, data
randomization, Reed-Solomon coding, data interleaving, and trellis coding. Some
modulation methods may use convolutional coding and frequency division multiplex.
The signal is also band-limited using a digital filter.
The FPGA modulator sends the digitized, processed, and bandpass filtered IF signal to
the digital upconverter and precorrector circuit.
The precorrector uses RTAC to apply precorrection to the digitized IF signal based on
the down converted, digitized RF samples from before and after the high power filter.
The fully processed and precorrected digitized IF signal, resulting from various digital
operating modes, is processed into a 140 MHz (center frequency) IF signal by the DAC
(Digital to Analog Converter).
The 140 MHz IF signal is sent to the upconverter circuit of the up/downconverter board,
where it is heterodyned up to the on channel frequency and amplified. The modulator
maximum output level is 6 dBm (4 mW average) in any digital mode. The 50 watt PA
requires 2.5 mW of input drive power and the 25 watt PA requires 2.24 mW of drive.
4.4.3
RF Sample Processing
The RTAC algorithm compare the processed and filtered digitized IF signal from the
modulator to the digitized RF samples in order to apply the correct precorrection to the
signal to accommodate the linear and nonlinear distortion. The RF samples for the
RTAC algorithm must be selected one at a time, the level set, the sample down
converted to the 140 MHz IF frequency, and then digitized and sent to the digital
precorrector circuit.
The input to the downconverter is an electronic switch, which is controlled by the signal
processor board.
The level of the selected signal is set to the optimum level for the downconverter mixer
by an attenuator, which is controlled by the signal processing board.
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
4-7
Section 4 Theory of Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
The signal is next applied to a mixer, along with the local oscillator signal from the 2nd
local oscillator phase lock loop circuit in the precise frequency reference board.
The resultant 140 MHz IF signal is then filtered to remove mixing products and sent to
an attenuator controlled from the signal processor board. Here its level is set to
optimum for its next destination, the ADC (Analog to Digital Converter) in the signal
processor board.
In the ADC, the IF signal is digitized and sent to the digital precorrector (RTAC) circuit.
RTAC performs two functions, which are:
•
Non-linear precorrection to cancel the phase and linearity distortions created in the
drivers and PA
•
Linear precorrection to cancel the amplitude response and group delay) distortions
created in the high power filter.
4.4.4
Low Voltage Power Supply Board
The low voltage power supply for the modulator is mounted to the left inside wall of the
transmitter chassis. The following items are mounted on the power supply assembly:
•
•
The AC Input connector.
A +12V switching power supply, mounted towards the rear of the power
supply assembly.
•
Provision for an optional battery backup board, mounted at the front of the
power supply board.
•
The LVPS distribution board receives +12 Vdc from the switching supply. It
uses it to generate the +24Vdc, +5Vdc, and -12Vdc outputs from dc to dc
converters.
•
The +24V, +12V, +12Vosc, +5V, and -12V are dc outputs supplied via a
ribbon cable to the signal processor board. Power to the other boards is
distributed via the signal processing board to the other subsystems.
The block diagram of the low voltage power supply is shown in Figure 4-3.
The part number for the power supply board, including the switching supply, is 9710051-011G.
4-8
888-2857-004
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Section 4 Theory of Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
AC1
AC2
GND
AC
ACLine
Filter
+12VIN
DC5V
Vs
DC
+12V,12.5A
Cr
DC
12V,0.25A
DC1
DC612V
+5V
DC
+5V,12A
3CellsLiIon
10.8Vnom.
1.2AHr
13WHr
20Apk
DC2
DC612V
1.5A
Vbat
610.8V
Qa
n
+24VM
DC
+24V,1.2A
DC3
DC612V
Qb
Qc
+24V
p
DC
+12V,3.5A
n
12V
n
+12V
Qd
+12VOSC
Ideal
Diode
DataLine
32Mins
Timers&
Driver
1Min
Figure 4-3 Low Voltage Power Supply Block Diagram
4.4.5
Battery Backup Option
The battery backup board interfaces directly to the LVPS board. Three Lithium-ion cells
are used in a series arrangement and provide 9.6 volts at 1200mAh, 12WHr rated. The
battery backup assembly consists of a battery backup circuit board with three Lithiumion cells permanently attached; it also includes a custom battery charging circuit and
protection circuitry. The batteries and circuit board are sold as a unit when replacement
batteries are required.
The battery backup assembly part number is 971-0051-012G.
The battery backup supplies the LVPS board with +6.4V to 10.8V at 20A maximum. It
is mounted directly to the LVPS board. A block diagram of the battery backup assembly
is shown in Figure 4-4.
The battery backup assembly specifications are as follows.
5/9/13
•
Recharge time for the fully discharged battery pack is two to three hours. The
charge cycle starts and stops based on the battery pack output voltage.
•
Under the optimum battery condition, this battery backup option is capable
of one minute of operation of the modulator portion of the VAX-C
transmitter following an ac power failure. This is accomplished by keeping
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
4-9
Section 4 Theory of Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
the +24V, +12V, +12Vosc, +5V, and -12V power supply interface board dc
outputs energized for one minute following a power failure. During this time
the PA assembly is not powered.
•
It keeps the oscillator circuits and the internal GPS receiver operating for an
additional fifteen minutes following the one minute modulator controller
backup operation. It accomplishes this by de-energizing all but the +12Vosc
power supply outputs.
•
During the last fifteen minutes of battery backup operation, the battery
backup maintains power to the 10MHz and 1PPS Input circuitry on the
Signal Processing board and the FPGA, OCXO and GPS circuitry on the
PFRU. By powering these circuits the modulator can maintain the 10MHz
OCXO discipline loop when the transmitter loses power. The OCXO can take
three minutes to stabilize from a cold start and the discipline loop itself can
take an hour to reach the maximum precision; having the discipline loop
active during a power outage enables the VAX-C transmitter to return to air
faster with greater frequency accuracy.
Figure 4-4 Battery Backup Block Diagram
4-10
888-2857-004
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Platinum VAX-C Series
4.4.6
Section 4 Theory of Operation
ASI / SMPTE 310 Inputs / Output
The modulator FPGA decodes the four ASI inputs and modulates the active input
stream with the selected standard. Transformers are used on the input of the ASI data to
improve the rejection of common mode interference on the input cables. Cable
equalization circuitry is also used. The ASI inputs to the FPGA are at LVDS levels.
Input choices are shown below, rear panel connectors
are shown to the right.
•
1 -> ASI input (HP 1) for DVB modulation standard (top left connector)
•
LP 1 -> ASI Input, LP 1 for DVB input, ATSC this
will be the second ASI input, all other standards
this is not used. (top right connector)
•
2 -> Secondary ASI input for all OFDM modulation standards. Also known as HP 2
for DVB. Primary SMPTE input for ATSC (bottom left connector)
•
LP 2 -> ASI Input, LP 2 for DVB input, ATSC this will be the second SMPTE input,
all other standards this is not used. (bottom right connector)
NOTE:
LP1 and LP2 inputs are used only for COFDM Hierarchial modes.
The modulator FPGA also provides an ASI monitor output. The ASI monitor output is
at LVDS levels from the FPGA. It utilizes an LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signal)
driver and transformer per the ASI specification.
The DUC (Digital Up Converter) FPGA is responsible for taking the modulated data
and applying correction, as well as up converting the baseband signal allowing the
system to come out on the correct frequency to feed to the DAC. The DUC FPGA
output data is then transferred to the DAC to be converted to a 140 MHz IF, which is
then up-converted to the on channel frequency.
The DUC writes the 16-bit I and Q data to the AD9779 DAC. The DAC will be clocked
by the ~409 to 460 MHz clock from the PFRU. The 1/4 FDAC clock output of the DAC
is used as a clock for the DUC FPGA and the RF Sample ADC. The DAC provides the
Up/Downconverter board with the 140MHz IF.
The AD9461 ADC is clocked by the 1/4 FDAC clock. It converts the 140 MHz IF from
the downconverter to a 16 bit sample provided to the DUC FPGA. The ADC also
provides the DUC FPGA with the sample A/D clock.
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
4-11
Platinum VAX-C Series
Section 4 Theory of Operation
4.4.7
PFRU (Precise Frequency Reference Unit) Board
The Precise Frequency Reference Unit (board) performs four functions through four
circuits. They are as follows:
•
•
•
•
Provides an optional GPS receiver unit
10 MHz reference oscillator
1st LO PLL
2nd LO PLL
4.4.7.1
PFRU Board 1st LO PLL for the DAC Clock Circuit
This PLL (Phase Lock Loop) oscillator provides a clock to the IF DAC (Digital to
Analog Converter). It is used to produce a 140 MHz analog IF output from the signal
processor board. The block diagram for local oscillator 1 is shown in Figure 4-5 on page
4-13.
Phase noise specification on DAC clock is given in Table 4-1.
Table 4-1 Phase Noise Limit For DAC Clock
Hertz
10
100
1k
10k
100k
1M
-60 dBc/Hz
-90 dBc/Hz
-95 dBc/Hz
-100 dBc/Hz
-117 dBc/Hz
-135 dBc/Hz
This clock is sent to the signal processing board where it is used to generate the 140
MHz IF output signal, which is fed to the up/downconverter board. DAC clock
frequencies for various modulation methods is shown in Table 4-2.
Each modulation method produces an IF frequency which is equal to 1/4 of the DAC
clock frequency for that modulation system. Therefore, an offset frequency is produced
by the FPGA modulator to bring the IF frequency to 140 MHz. The required offset
frequency for each modulating system can be calculated using the following formula.
Clock FrequencyOffset Frequency = 140MHz – DAC
-----------------------------------------------------4
4-12
888-2857-004
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Section 4 Theory of Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
Table 4-2
DAC Clock Frequencies
Modulation
ATSC
DVB-T/H
ISDB-T
DMB-T
NTSC/PAL
DAB
54 MHz from Signal
Processor Board
10 MHz Reference Input
Reference From Ref. Osc.
DAC Clock Freq.
430.489 MHz
438.857 MHz
445.823 MHz
453.600 MHz
436.800 MHz
409.600 MHz
Frequency
Divider
and
Phase
Detector
Low Pass
Filter
Offset Freq.
32.378 MHz
30.286 MHz
28.544 MHz
26.600 MHz
30.800 MHz
37.600 MHz
VCO
Resistive
Divider
J2, LO-1 Output
To Signal Processor
Board
Figure 4-5 DAC PLL (1st LO)
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
4-13
Section 4 Theory of Operation
4.4.7.2
Platinum VAX-C Series
PFRU Board Local Oscillator-2 Circuit, For UDC
This circuit provides a local oscillator for the up/downconverter. It is used to heterodyne
the IF signal to the on channel RF frequency in the upconverter and to heterodyne the
RF sample back to the IF frequency in the downconverter. The phase noise specification
for local oscillator 2 (the RF UDC PLL) is given in Table 4-3.
Table 4-3
Phase Noise Specification For RF PLL
Hertz
10
100
1k
10k
100k
1M
B IV, B V
-57 dBc/Hz
-87 dBc/Hz
-92 dBc/Hz
-97 dBc/Hz
-114 dBc/Hz
-132 dBc/Hz
The block diagram of local oscillator 2 is shown in Figure 4-6 on page 4-15. This circuit
features an 800 to 1600 MHz voltage controlled oscillator, which is phase locked to a
10 MHz reference signal. The relationship between the various on channel frequency
bands, the required local oscillator frequencies, and the status of the IF signal is given
below and summarized in Table 4-4.
4-14
•
The on channel output frequency is the sum of the IF and the local oscillator
signals, therefore, the IF signal is not inverted.
•
For band V and band IV, the oscillator output is divided by two, yielding an
output range of 400 to 800 MHz. This signal is sent to the up/downconverter
board.
•
For band V, the on channel output frequency is the sum of the IF and the local
oscillator signals, therefore, the IF signal is not inverted.
•
For Band IV, the on channel output frequency is the difference between the
IF and the local oscillator signals, therefore, the IF signal must be inverted.
888-2857-004
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Section 4 Theory of Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
Table 4-4
RF UDC PLL Frequencies
Channel
Frequency Range
168 to 242 MHz
Band
BIII
Local Osc Frequency Range
168 to 242 MHz in 1Hz steps
IF Frequency Order
Inverted
The IF and local oscillator frequencies will vary somewhat to accommodate the various
modulation methods uses and the bandwidth of the output signal. Output signal
bandwidth range is 5, 6, 7, or 8 MHz. The IF frequency tolerance of +/-0.5 MHz is
needed to accommodate the various modulation methods used.
10 MHz
Reference Input
From Ref. Osc. Frequency
Divider
and
Phase
Detector
800 To 1600 MHz
VCO
Resistive
DIvider
Resistive
Divider
J1, LO-2 Output
To UDC Board
Divide
By 2
400 To 800 MHz
Resistive
Divider
Divide
By 2
Switch
Low Pass
Filter
200 To 400 MHz
Resistive
DIvider
Divide
By 2
100 To
200 MHz
Figure 4-6 UDC Local Oscillator (2nd LO) PLL
4.4.7.3
PFRU Board Reference Oscillator Circuit
The PFRU reference oscillator circuit, shown in PFRU Board 10 MHz Reference
Oscillator Circuit, provides four outputs, which are as follows:
•
•
•
•
5/9/13
A 10 or 54 MHz reference for the DAC PLL oscillator
A 10 MHz reference for the RF Up/Downconverter PLL oscillator
A spare 10 MHz reference, at J3
A 54 MHz reference to Level Detector
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
4-15
Platinum VAX-C Series
Section 4 Theory of Operation
Low Pass
Filter
FPGA
and
Phase
Detector
Low Pass
Filter
VCO
Low Pass
Filter
J3, 10 MHz Output
To Optional Repeater
Receiver Card
Coupler
10 MHz To
RF UDC PLL
J4-16, 1 PPS
Reference Input
From Ref. Osc.
DAC Select
1 = 10 MHz
0 = 54 MHz
D
J6, 54 MHz
Input
Resistive
DIvider
Q
Q
10 or 54 MHz To
DAC PLL
54 MHz To
Level Detector
Figure 4-7 PFRU Board 10 MHz Reference Oscillator Circuit
4.4.7.4
PFRU Board GPS Circuit
The PFRU board includes a GPS receiver. The antenna input for the receiver is
connector J8 on the PFRU board. A 50 ohm coax connects this connector to the GPS
antenna input SMA connector on the modulator rear panel.
4.4.8
Up/Downconverter Board
This assembly consists of two piggy backed boards, the UDC Base and the UDC top
board. The assembly has three major circuits, which are as follows:
•
•
•
4.4.8.1
The Upconverter
The Downconverter
The Local Oscillator Distribution
Upconverter Major Specifications
Frequency bands covered:
•
BIII
168 to 242 MHz
Output power is 6 dBm RMS maximum
4-16
888-2857-004
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Section 4 Theory of Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
4.4.8.2
Functional Description of Upconverter
Up Down Converter Base Board
Up Down Converter Top Board
VCoupling
From Controller
Via a DAC
J7, 140 MHz
IF Input
at 0 dBm
From Signal
Processor
Board DAC
140 MHz
BP Filter
Coupler
ALC
Attenuator
IF_Level_Out
J5
J7
168-242 MHz
VHF Tunable
BP Filter
LO Input
From PLL
Via LO
Distribution
Detector
Low
Pass
Filter
168-242 MHz
VHF Tunable
BP Filter
VTune
ALC
Attenuator
Coupler
J1, RF Output
to PA Assembly
6 dB Max Output
From Controller
Via a DAC
Mute
50 Ohm
Load
RF_Level_Out
Detector
Figure 4-8 Upconverter Block Diagram
The upconverter base board accepts a 140MHz IF at a 0 dBm average level from the
Signal Processing board via J7. The 140 MHz IF is filtered primarily by the low-pass
portion of a bandpass filter which suppresses the unwanted DAC signals at 258MHz
and above. The filtered IF is applied to a variable attenuator which is used to set the
RMS level to the optimum level for the mixer in order to minimize spurious mixing
products. This attenuator is set to a specific fixed value by the system controller
depending on the modulation format. A directional coupler applies a sample of the IF to
a detector IC, which provides a voltage output proportional to the RMS level of the IF.
This voltage is A/D converted and utilized by the controller for diagnostic purposes,
primarily to detect a low/missing input condition. The signal leaves the base board via
J5 and is sent to the UDC top board.
The IF signal enters the UDC top board via J7. The IF is applied to the mixer through a
fixed pad and a bridged T network. This provides a very good match, from DC to very
high frequencies, to the IF port of the mixer which helps to minimize 3rd order mixing
products, i.e. (2*IF)-LO. The mixer output is buffered by a MMIC (Monolithic
Microwave Integrated Circuit) amplifier.
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
4-17
Section 4 Theory of Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
The signal is next sent to a two stage VHF tunable bandpass filter, which removes the
undesired mixing products. In each filter stage, the filtered RF is buffered by a MMIC
amplifier.
After the filtering process the RF signal is applied to a mute circuit, which consists of a
SPDT low-loss, high isolation (60dB @ 1.5GHz) microwave relay. When muted, the
normal RF path is opened and the RF switched into a 50 load.
The RF is then passed through a low pass filter and then gain adjusted by a variable
attenuator and sent to an amplifier. The amplifier is followed by a low-loss directional
coupler with the main coupler path leaving the up converter via J1 and sent to the power
amplifier assembly.
The coupled RF sample is applied to an AD8362 demodulating detector IC. The
detector output is heavily low-pass filtered to provide average power measurement.
4.4.8.3
Downconverter Major Specifications
The downconverter includes two selectable RF RTAC (real time adaptive correction)
input samples, which are:
•
•
The PA output RF sample, taken before the high power mask filter
The high power mask filter RF sample, taken after the high power mask filter.
Downconverter input specifications:
•
•
4-18
Frequency range is 168 to 242 MHz
Input power range is -20 to +5 dBm, with the optimum input level -5 dBm
888-2857-004
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Section 4 Theory of Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
SPDT NonReflective
Switch
J4, PA RF
Sample
SPDT NonReflective
Switch
J5, HPF RF
Sample
Downconverter
Up Down Converter Top Board
Switch
4.4.8.4
900 MHz
LPF
Variable
Attenuator
Controller
via a DAC
Sets Optimum
Mixer Level
140 MHz
BP Filter
2-Way
Splitter
225 MHz
LPF
J8
RMS
Detector
Input Power
Sample to
DAC
J14, LO Input
From PLL
Via LO Filter
Up Down Converter Base Board
J6
Variable
Attenuator
J4, IF Output
To Signal Processor
Board ADC
Controller, via a DAC,
Sets Optimum
ADC Input Level
Figure 4-9 Downconverter Block Diagram
The downconverter accepts the following on-channel RF inputs:
•
•
Transmitter system PA (pre-filter) sample for non-linear estimation.
Transmitter system HPF (post-filter) sample for linear estimation.
The two RF sample inputs are each applied to a high-isolation two-way switch IC. The
selected sample is routed through its respective two-way switch to the final 2-way
selector switch, while the undesired input is switched into a resistive load. This
arrangement provides very good isolation of the signals and a good absorptive match to
the input in the de-selected state.
The selected RF sample is passed through a 900 MHz low pass filter and then variably
attenuated, buffered, and split. One path feeds a power detector which provides a DC
sample used by the controller to adjust the attenuator for optimum RF level into the
mixer. The other path is amplified and applied to the mixer input. The IF output of the
mixer is applied to a bridged-T network and buffered by a MMIC amplifier, then lowpass filtered with a 225 MHz Mini circuits chip low-pass filter. This filter removes
unwanted mixing components from VHF conversions while being transparent to the
140MHz IF in terms of amplitude response and group delay. This IF leaves the up/
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
4-19
Platinum VAX-C Series
Section 4 Theory of Operation
Down converter top board via J8 and is sent to J6 on the Up/Down converter base
board.
In the Up/Down converter base board, the filtered IF is buffered and variably attenuated
to allow the controller to optimize the level into the A/D converter in the signal
processing board. A high linearity output amplifier drives the IF output to the ADC.
4.4.8.5
LO Distribution
LO (Local Oscillator) distribution is part of the up/downconverter.
J6, LO Input
PLL On The
PFRU Board
800 MHz
Low Pass
Filter
Coupler
Detector
LO Output
To Downconverter
2-Way
Splitter
LO Output
To Upconverter
LO Level
Sample TO
System Controller
Figure 4-10 Up/Downconverter Bd, LO Distribution Circuit Block Diagram
The LO input from the PFRU is 0+/-2dBm, with harmonics of -10 to -15 dBc. It utilizes
a high frequency VCO (800-1600MHz) which is divided down to provide the LO
frequencies required for the Up/Down converter. For more consistent mixer
performance, it is desirable to have tighter control of the LO level. The coupled output
of a directional coupler is applied to a power detector. This detected output was
included for diagnostic purposes, to detect a missing input condition, and was used to
maintain a constant LO input level to the mixer.
A two-way splitter follows the coupler, with the two paths supplying the local oscillator
signal +7dBm for the upconverter and downconverter.
4-20
888-2857-004
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Platinum VAX-C Series
4.5
Section 4 Theory of Operation
VAX-C Transmitter PAs
4.5.0.1
Fault Protection
Certain fault conditions warrant immediate, hardware-invoked shut-down of the power
supply and RF Drive to provide rapid system protection. Hardware comparators are
used in conjunction with the CPLD to provide fast shutdown and notification to the
signal processor in the event of the following fault conditions:
•
•
•
•
Over current of any of the PA FETS
Over voltage of the +50V power supply
VSWR Protection in severe conditions too fast for and above the foldback threshold.
This level is automatically scaled to the system power level and operating frequency
(accounting for coupler response)
Over temperature of either PA FET.
Trip levels appropriate to the system power level are automatically created. This is
important in the case of the VSWR fault, where there is a frequency dependent coupler
response. The system automatically determines the appropriate levels without
“tweaking” or user interaction.
When any fault occurs, the CPLD latches a Fault, which turns off the 50V power supply
and also pulls down the ALC attenuator control voltage on the UDC. This remove both
drive and voltage to the PA as quickly as possible to minimize the risk of damage in a
fault event.
4.5.0.2
RF Power Detection and Calibration
The power detection circuitry was designed to facilitate ease of initial calibration and
eliminate the need for re-calibration on a change of frequency. It introduces the
following features:
•
5/9/13
A microstrip coupling structure is used to provide optimum unit-to-unit repeatability
for forward and reflected power monitoring. The coupler includes 13dB attenuators
which are built into both the forward and reflected output ports. These attenuators
present a good return loss to the structure so that both ports may be used simultaneously while maintaining high directivity.
The forward and reflected samples feed a switch matrix and forward and reflected
detectors on the PA Interface. The signal processor can calculate required correction
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
4-21
Section 4 Theory of Operation
Platinum VAX-C Series
factors on a change of frequency and provide reasonable accuracy without requiring
re-calibration. A full two-point calibration should be performed at first turn-on at
mid-band (205 MHz).
•
On-board switching is performed so that the forward power sample will automatically be used as a signal source for reflected calibration. An attenuated forward sample is switched in while the system is running to establish a calibration point
representing a -10dB reflection. The reflected calibration is automatically performed
“in the background” by the system during forward calibration, and VSWR hardware
trip points are automatically calculated and programmed for the VSWR fault comparator. This eliminates the need to perform reflected calibrations.
•
Although the design intent is to allow frequency changes and maintain reasonably
accurate power measurement without requiring re-calibration, the user can perform a
calibration if they desire. Since the detector slopes were established in the one-time
two-point calibration and are stored, re-calibration can be streamlined to a single
point.
•
Forward calibration can be performed while operating (this of course assumes that
the end user has a well-calibrated directional coupler and a power meter connected
externally). The measured high point, calculated low point (based on the stored
slope) and frequency of calibration are stored in EEPROM for the new frequency of
operation.
4.5.0.3
+50 VDC Power Supply Interface
An AC/DC converter is used to provide the +50VDC required by the BLF881 LDMOS
devices in the PA assembly. This unit was used because it incorporates a logic-level
enable function as opposed to one which which requires the AC to be switched to
provide On/Off function. The PA Interface uses a 2N7002 in an open drain
configuration. When turned ON the 7002 provides the ground to enable the AC/DC
Converter. The AC/DC Converter has an open collector status output which is grounded
when the supply is on and no faults are present. The /PS_PRESENT pin is grounded on
the power supply end, with a 10k pull-up on the PA Interface, to indicate a cable
connection to the supply.
4-22
888-2857-004
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Platinum VAX-C Series
Section 5
Maintenance and
Alignments
5
This section contains the maintenance and alignment procedures for the Platinum VAXC Series VHF transmitter. This includes routine maintenance, PA module replacement,
PA module repair, transmitter calibration and PC Board replacement procedures.
!
WARNING:
THE SERVICE WORK DESCRIBED IN THIS SECTION MUST BE CARRIED OUT BY
TRAINED STAFF ONLY.
5.1
Technical Assistance
Refer to the page iii at the front of the manual for further information regarding
technical assistance.
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5-1
Section 5 Maintenance and Alignments
5.2
Platinum VAX-C Series
PA Module Removal and Replacement
!
CAUTION:
TOXIC BERYLLIUM
SOME COMPONENTS IN THE PA MODULE CONTAIN TOXIC BERYLLIUM. THIS
LIMITS MODULE REPAIR TO A MODULAR LEVEL CONSISTING OF PALLETS AND
PC BOARDS ONLY.
HOT SURFACE
PLATINUM PA MODULES ARE DESIGNED TO HANDLE VERY HIGH
TEMPERATURES AND MAY BE EXTREMELY HOT, UP TO 58O F (32O C) ABOVE
ROOM TEMPERATURE. DO NOT TOUCH THE MODULE WITH BARE HANDS AFTER
THE TRANSMITTER HAS BEEN RUNNING, ESPECIALLY IN HIGH AMBIENT
TEMPERATURE ENVIRONMENTS. PROTECTIVE GLOVES CAN BE OBTAINED
FROM HARRIS, PART #0990006483 OR GRAINGER ITEM #4JF36.
RADIO FREQUENCY HAZARD. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO OPERATE THE
TRANSMITTER OR AMPLIFIER WITH THE COVER REMOVED.
5.2.1
PA Module Removal
Required Tools:
WAGO extractor tool
#1 Phillips screw driver
M7 (9/32") nut driver
The type of PA module will vary depending on transmitter model. PA and PS modules
must be removed (or installed) with the transmitter turned off and unplugged.
STEP 1
!
Turn off the transmitter and disconnect AC power.
WARNING:
REMOVE AC POWER FROM THE VAX-C TRANSMITTER BEFORE ATTEMPTING PA
MODULE REMOVAL. THERE ARE EXPOSED VOLTAGES IN THE PA SECTION THAT
MAY CAUSE INJURY OR DAMAGE TO COMPONENTS IF CONTACTED.
STEP 2
5-2
Remove the four screws from the top cover on the VAX-C and slide the
cover toward the rear of the unit to remove it.
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Platinum VAX-C Series
!
Section 5 Maintenance and Alignments
CAUTION:
THE PA MODULE MAY BE HOT. ALLOW THE COMPONENTS TO COOL OR USE
PROTECTIVE GLOVES TO PROTECT HANDS.
STEP 3
See Figure 5-1. Remove the two screws from the rear panel on either
side of the output connector.
Figure 5-1 RF Output Connector
STEP 4
Remove the PA module screw from the right side of the chassis. This
screw threads into the L bracket attached to the PA module heat sink.
Figure 5-2 PA Module Side Mounting Screw
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5-3
Section 5 Maintenance and Alignments
Platinum VAX-C Series
J3
Nut
Figure 5-3 Amplifier Compartment
!
STEP 5
Loosen the screw that holds the L bracket to the PA module heat sink and
then rotate the L bracket 90o to allow maximum clearance during
module removal.
STEP 6
Remove the nut (Figure 5-3) that fastens the PA module bracket to the
bottom of the chassis.
CAUTION:
DO NOT DAMAGE COMPONENTS ON PA INTERFACE BOARD WHEN INSTALLING
THE PA MODULE FROM THE CHASSIS.
5-4
STEP 7
Remove the RF input cable J1 from PA module front.
STEP 8
Remove the two RF connectors J3 & J4 that attach to the coupler ports.
STEP 9
Use a WAGO tool to disconnect power supply wires 54 & 55 from TB1
on the interface board.
STEP 10
Remove the W10 ribbon cable from the J9 connector on the PA interface
board.
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Platinum VAX-C Series
5/9/13
Section 5 Maintenance and Alignments
STEP 11
Remove the W9 ribbon cable from the J6 connector on the PA interface
board.
STEP 12
Slide PA module toward front of chassis output until RF output
connector clears the rear of the chassis.
STEP 13
Lift the PA module partially out of the chassis (tip PA interface board
upward).
STEP 14
Disconnect ribbon cable W5 from J5 on the underside of the PA interface
board (see Figure 5-3). The ribbon cable stays connected to the signal
processor board and should be pulled out of the PA section and secured
to keep it out of the way during PA module removal.
STEP 15
Remove the amplifier from the chassis.
STEP 16
End of procedure.
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5-5
Section 5 Maintenance and Alignments
5.2.2
Platinum VAX-C Series
PA Module Installation
Required Tools:
WAGO extractor tool
#1 Phillips screw driver
M7 (9/32") nut driver
NOTE:
Refer to Figure 5-3 on page 5-4 for location of components and connectors noted
in the procedure below.
The type of PA module may vary depending on transmitter model. PA and PS modules
must be removed (or installed) with the transmitter turned off and unplugged.
STEP 1
!
Turn off the transmitter and disconnect AC power.
WARNING:
REMOVE AC POWER FROM THE VAX-C TRANSMITTER BEFORE ATTEMPTING PA
MODULE REMOVAL. THERE ARE EXPOSED VOLTAGES IN THE PA SECTION THAT
MAY CAUSE INJURY OR DAMAGE TO COMPONENTS IF CONTACTED.
!
STEP 2
Remove the four screws from the top cover on the VAX-C and slide the
cover toward the rear of the unit to remove it.
STEP 3
Place PA module partially into chassis with PA interface board tilted
upward.
CAUTION:
DO NOT DAMAGE COMPONENTS ON PA INTERFACE BOARD WHEN INSTALLING
THE PA MODULE INTO THE CHASSIS
5-6
STEP 4
Connect ribbon cable W5 to J5 on the underside of the PA interface
board.
STEP 5
Position the PA module flange mounting bracket hole over the stud in the
bottom of the chassis. Lower the PA module onto the transmitter chassis
backplane.
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Platinum VAX-C Series
STEP 6
Slide PA module toward rear of chassis until RF output connector clears
the rear of the chassis.
STEP 7
Connect the W9 ribbon cable to the J6 connector on the PA interface
board.
STEP 8
Connect the W10 ribbon cable to J9 on the PA interface board.
STEP 9
Use a WAGO tool to connect power supply wires 54 & 55 to TB1 on the
interface board.
STEP 10
Connect the two RF connectors J3 & J4 to the coupler ports.
STEP 11
Connect the RF input cable J1 from PA module input port.
STEP 12
Install the nut (Figure 5-3) that fastens the PA module bracket to the
bottom of the chassis. Leave it loose.
STEP 13
Rotate the bracket on the PA module heat sink to align the bracket with
the screw hole on the right side of the transmitter chassis.
STEP 14
Install the PA module screw on the right side of the chassis. Thread this
screw into the L bracket attached to the PA module heat sink. Leave it
loose.
STEP 15
Install the two screws on the rear panel on either side of the output
connector. Be sure the PA module output connector is fully seated in the
rear chassis opening. Tighten the screws.
STEP 16
Tighten the L bracket screws, and the nut and screw holding the PA
module bracket in place.
STEP 17
Check the tightness of all connectors and hardware.
STEP 18
5/9/13
Section 5 Maintenance and Alignments
Replace cover and tighten screws.
STEP 19
Reapply AC power.
STEP 20
End of procedure.
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5-7
Section 5 Maintenance and Alignments
5.3
Platinum VAX-C Series
PS Module Removal/Replacement
Required Tools:
Ohmmeter
WAGO extractor tool
#1 Phillips screw driver
Isopropyl alcohol
Heat sink compound or pad.
Paper towel or cloth.
STEP 1
!
Turn off the transmitter and disconnect AC power.
WARNING:
REMOVE AC POWER FROM THE VAX-C TRANSMITTER BEFORE ATTEMPTING PA
MODULE REMOVAL. THERE ARE EXPOSED VOLTAGES IN THE PA SECTION THAT
MAY CAUSE INJURY OR DAMAGE TO COMPONENTS IF CONTACTED.
!
STEP 2
Remove the four screws from the top cover on the VAX-C and slide the
cover toward the rear of the unit to remove it.
STEP 3
Remove the 8A fuse and check it for continuity. If blown replace and test
the transmitter to confirm operation before proceeding.
STEP 4
Use a WAGO tool to remove the yellow AC input (42 & 59 or 41 & 60
depending on version) and DC output wires (54 & 55) from the WAGO
connectors on the PS board.
STEP 5
Remove ribbon cable W10 from J1 on PS board.
WARNING:
ONLY REPLACE FUSES WITH TYPE OF FUSE MARKED ON EQUIPMENT.
5-8
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Section 5 Maintenance and Alignments
Platinum VAX-C Series
Figure 5-4 PS Module
5/9/13
STEP 6
Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the four screws (one in each
corner) from the PS board.
STEP 7
Lift the PS board and heatsink assembly up to remove them from the
chassis.
STEP 8
Gently lift upward on the PS assembly to separate it from the heat sink.
STEP 9
Clean up the heat sink compound or pad residue on the heatsink. Use
alcohol to remove completely.
STEP 10
Apply a thin, even coat of heat sink compound or a new heat sink pad to
the heat sink surface.
STEP 11
Place the replacement PS module on the heatsink. Be sure to carefully
align the holes in the PS module with the holes in the heatsink.
STEP 12
Install and tighten four corner screws that hold the PS and heatsink to the
chassis base.
STEP 13
Use a WAGO tool to install the AC input and DC output wires.
STEP 14
Attach ribbon cable to J1. Note that the red wire in the ribbon cable goes
to the pin 1 side of the connector.
STEP 15
Replace PA module cover and tighten cover screws.
STEP 16
Apply AC power.
STEP 17
End of procedure.
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5-9
Section 5 Maintenance and Alignments
5.4
Platinum VAX-C Series
Power Calibrations
NOTE:
The following calibration procedures are for digital modes.
Factory FWD/Rfld calibration has been performed during factory test at 205 MHz
center frequency and the calibration is valid for the entire VHF band. Factory FWD/
Rfld calibration should be required only if a PA interface board, directional coupler, or
sample cable is replaced. Factory FWD/Rfld calibration is simple and can be done
whenever it is deemed necessary. Simply follow the instructions given in the calibration
menus.
Field Fwd/Rfld calibration can be performed as required at any operating frequency or
power level to insure precision. Follow the instructions given in the Field Fwd/Rfld
calibration menus.
!
CAUTION:
FORWARD AND REFLECTED POWER CALIBRATIONS SHOULD ONLY BE DONE
WHILE OPERATING THE TRANSMITTER INTO A KNOWN GOOD LOAD SUCH AS A
STATION DUMMY LOAD. BE CERTAIN THAT THE LOAD IS A CONFIRMED 50 OHMS
AND HAS THE CAPABILITY TO HANDLE THE POWER THAT WILL BE GENERATED
BY THE TRANSMITTER.
Power calibrations can be performed using the local LCD screen or the web browser
interface. Calibration performed via web browser interface require a user login and
password at the admin level. Transmitters ship from the factory with the default login
"admin" and the default password "admin" (do not include quotation marks in login or
password, login and passwords are case sensitive). If you change passwords be sure to
retain them in a secure location. You will not be able to make changes to transmitter
settings via web browser without a valid password.
Harris recommends the Firefox web browser but Chrome or IE8 (or greater) can be
used as well.
Refer to Figure 3-9 on page 3-12. In the ’System Configuration’ screen select soft key
’Cal’. If logged in via web browser, the following screen (in HTML format) will be
displayed to facilitate Calibration.
5-10
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Platinum VAX-C Series
Figure 5-5 on left - System Calibration
Section 5 Maintenance and Alignments
on right - System Calibration options
The procedures described below assume use of the VAX-C LCD menus screens. Power
calibrations include:
•
Factory Fwd/Rfld - System forward and reflected power at output of
transmitter before band pass filter (BPF). Typically performed at 205 MHz.
•
Field Fwd/Rfld - System forward power at output of transmitter before BPF.
Typically performed at operating frequency for maximum accuracy.
Equipment Used:
•
An averaging power meter (with probe) similar to the Agilent E4418B with appropriate adapters. Meter should be capable of displaying measured values in Watts or in
dBm.
•
Precision directional coupler (precision meaning the coupling value have been measured for the operating frequency of 205 MHz).
NOTE:
Read and understand the applicable power calibration procedure before beginning. The procedures below assume use of the LCD display and the control buttons on the front of the VAX-C. The procedure can also be performed using web
browser screens. Web browser calibration screens are shown in Figure 5-5.
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5-11
Section 5 Maintenance and Alignments
Platinum VAX-C Series
Reflected
Port
Forward
Port
RF Out
RF In
Figure 5-6
Typical Output Directional Coupler and Connections
5.4.1
System Factory Fwd/Rfld Calibration
System factory forward power is calibrated over a range of 10 dB below model power
to full model power. The forward power reference sample is taken from the internal
directional coupler and regulates the power of the transmitter output before any filter
losses. Reflected power is automatically calculated as the calibration routine is
processed. Calibration data is stored on a PA interface board EEPROM.
The system detectors utilize a linear (in mV/dB) output, so by performing the two-point
calibration at 205 MHz, the detector slope and coupling factors are calculated and thus
provide good accuracy over the 10%-100% power range across the VHF band.
STEP 1
Zero and calibrate the RMS power meter, following the manufacturer’s
procedures for that specific model.
STEP 2
Install a directional coupler at the output of the transmitter. The
directional coupler must be capable of handling the rated transmitter
output power and have defined coupling values to allow accurate
measurements of forward power levels. A typical coupler is shown in
Figure 5-6.
NOTE:
Couplers like the one shown in Figure 5-6 use one port as a coupled port while
the opposite port is terminated in an external 50 ohm load. The load must be
installed in order to perform accurate measurements.
5-12
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Platinum VAX-C Series
!
Section 5 Maintenance and Alignments
CAUTION:
DO NOT APPLY EXCESSIVE DOWNWARD PRESSURE (WEIGHT) ON THE TYPE N
OUTPUT CONNECTOR. IF A DIRECTIONAL COUPLER IS ATTACHED DIRECTLY TO
THE OUTPUT CONNECTOR IT SHOULD BE ADEQUATELY SUPPORTED.
EXCESSIVE STRESS ON THE CONNECTOR MAY CAUSE INTERNAL DAMAGE AND
RESULT IN HIGH VSWR CONDITIONS THAT COULD CAUSE ARCING OR HEATING.
STEP 3
Once the coupler coupling value is determined, enter this value as a
power meter off, set the meter’s display to read in dBm or Watts and
connect the power meter sensor to the forward coupler port.
NOTE:
The sample level present at this coupler port (TPO - coupling value) must not
exceed the maximum input range of the power sensor in use.
NOTE:
Calibration must be performed with the transmitter operating into a known good
load or antenna system. If reflected power rises to a level that exceeds 10% of
forward power stop raising power. Turn off the transmitter and begin checking
the output components (transmission line, load, antenna) for faulty components
that produce high VSWR (voltage standing wave ratio) levels.
5/9/13
STEP 4
Connect the transmitter output to a known good load. If required, use a
short, high quality, low VSWR, 50 ohm cable preferably RG-213 or
better.
STEP 5
Apply AC power to the transmitter chassis.
STEP 6
Press Remote Disable on the front of the transmitter.
STEP 7
Press and hold the Power Lower button for 20 seconds to lower
transmitter output power at turn on.
STEP 8
Press the transmitter ON button while monitoring transmitter forward
power on the external power meter. Monitor reflected power on the LCD
screen. Slowly raise the power to the desired operational power level
and allow the transmitter to run for several minutes until output power is
stable.
STEP 9
Compare the external power meter value with the forward power
displayed on the LCD screen. If the values do not agree proceed with
calibration.
STEP 10
Use the LCD screen and control buttons to navigate to the calibration
menu SETUP> XMTR POWER SETTINGS> POWER CAL>
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5-13
Section 5 Maintenance and Alignments
Platinum VAX-C Series
FACTORY FWD/RFLD. Press Enter one time to highlight the menu
then use the up/down keys to select Factory Fwd/Rfld.
STEP 11
Start the calibration procedure by pressing the Enter button again.
STEP 12
Follow the instructions on the LCD screen and use the power Raise/
Lower buttons to adjust the transmitter output to the desired low
level.When a stable reading is attained on the power meter, select Save
and then press Enter.
NOTE:
It is helpful to check the RF DAC value displayed (in Hex) on the calibration
screen. In a system which is properly configured and operating correctly a DAC
value that exceeds 860 without reaching the desired low power level indicates a
possible problem, verify the system is configured correctly.
STEP 13
Follow the instructions on the screen and use the Raise/Lower buttons to
adjust the transmitter output to the desired high level. When a stable
reading is attained on the power meter, select Save and then press Enter.
NOTE:
It is helpful to check the RF DAC value displayed (in Hex) on the calibration
screen. In a system which is properly configured and operating correctly a DAC
value that exceeds A73 without reaching the desired high power level indicates a
possible problem, verify the system is configured correctly.
STEP 14
5.4.1.1
Procedure complete.
Calibration Errors
If any components in the amplifier section are faulted during the calibration, the system
will consider it invalid and discard it. Replace any faulty components and perform the
calibration again.
5.4.2
Field Fwd/Rfld Calibration
Field Fwd/Rfld calibration can be performed any time greater accuracy is required at
any specific frequency or power level. Field calibration is a one point calibration
performed at a customer specified power level and frequency. The forward power
reference sample is taken from the internal directional coupler and regulates the power
of the transmitter output before any filter losses. Reflected power is automatically
calculated as the calibration routine is processed. Calibration data is stored on a PA
interface board EEPROM.
5-14
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Platinum VAX-C Series
!
Section 5 Maintenance and Alignments
STEP 1
Zero and calibrate the RMS power meter, following the manufacturer’s
procedures for that specific model.
STEP 2
Install a directional coupler at the output of the transmitter. The
directional coupler must be capable of handling the rated transmitter
output power and have defined coupling values to allow accurate
measurements of forward power levels.
CAUTION:
DO NOT APPLY EXCESSIVE DOWNWARD PRESSURE (WEIGHT) ON THE TYPE N
OUTPUT CONNECTOR. IF A DIRECTIONAL COUPLER IS ATTACHED DIRECTLY TO
THE OUTPUT CONNECTOR IT SHOULD BE ADEQUATELY SUPPORTED.
EXCESSIVE STRESS ON THE CONNECTOR MAY CAUSE INTERNAL DAMAGE AND
RESULT IN HIGH VSWR CONDITIONS THAT COULD CAUSE ARCING OR HEATING.
STEP 3
Once the coupler coupling value is determined, enter this value as a
power meter offset, set the meter’s display to read in dBm or Watts and
connect the power meter sensor to the forward coupler port.
NOTE:
The sample level present at this coupler port (TPO - coupling value) must not
exceed the maximum input range of the power sensor in use.
NOTE:
Calibration must be performed with the transmitter operating into a known good
load or antenna system. If reflected power rises to a level that exceeds 10% of
forward power stop raising power. Turn off the transmitter and begin checking
the output components (transmission line, load, antenna) for faulty components
that produce high VSWR (voltage standing wave ratio) levels.
5/9/13
STEP 4
Connect the transmitter output to a known good load. If required, use a
short, high quality, low VSWR, 50 ohm cable preferably RG-213 or
better.
STEP 5
Apply AC power to the transmitter chassis.
STEP 6
Press Remote Disable on the front of the transmitter.
STEP 7
Press and hold the Power Lower button for 20 seconds to lower
transmitter output power at turn on.
STEP 8
Use the LCD and front panel controls to navigate to SETUP>PFRU
(PLL)>CENTER FREQ. (MHZ) and set frequency and offset to desired
values. Press the Power menu button (below the LCD screen).
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5-15
Section 5 Maintenance and Alignments
Platinum VAX-C Series
STEP 9
Press the transmitter ON button while monitoring transmitter forward
power on the external power meter. Monitor reflected power on the LCD
screen. Slowly raise the power to the desired operational power level
and allow the transmitter to run for several minutes until output power is
stable.
STEP 10
Compare the external power meter value with the forward power
displayed on the LCD screen. If the values do not agree proceed with
calibration.
STEP 11
Use the LCD screen and control buttons to navigate to the calibration
menu SETUP> XMTR POWER SETTINGS> POWER CAL> FIELD
FWD/RFLD. Press Enter one time to highlight the menu then use the up/
down keys to select Field Fwd/Rfld.
STEP 12
Start the calibration procedure by pressing the Enter button again.
STEP 13
Follow the instructions on the LCD screen and use the power Raise/
Lower buttons to adjust the transmitter output to the desired level.When
a stable reading is attained on the power meter, select Save and then
press Enter.
NOTE:
It is helpful to check the RF DAC value displayed (in Hex) on the calibration
screen. In a system which is properly configured and operating correctly a DAC
value that exceeds A775 without reaching the desired power level indicates a
possible problem, verify the system is configured correctly.
STEP 14
5.4.2.1
Procedure complete.
Calibration Errors
If any components in the amplifier section are faulted during the calibration, the system
will consider it invalid and discard it. Replace any faulty components and perform the
calibration again.
5-16
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Platinum VAX-C Series
5.5
Section 5 Maintenance and Alignments
Pre-correction for Digital TV & DAB
Digital transmitters are typically operated in adaptive nonlinear predistortion and linear
equalization mode. The precorrection and equalization are applied in the modulator
section (exciter). The procedure described below will automatically calculate the
precorrection for an installed system. Once the precorrection has been calculated, it can
be stored in the setup memory for later use in Stored mode. The precorrection is
normally applied by setting both the Linear and Nonlinear RTAC mode to ADAPT.
Assumptions:
•
•
Transmitter average power level is known
•
A signal sample is available from a forward coupler after the mask bandpass
filter.
An signal sample is available from a forward coupler after the amplifier and
prior to the mask bandpass filter. This sample is inside the VAX-C chassis.
Equipment and Tools Required:
•
5.5.1
Spectrum or TV analyzer
Precorrection Setup Procedure
Nonlinear Predistortion:
5/9/13
STEP 1
With the transmitter operating at the desired power level, set the
nonlinear RTAC mode to ADAPT via the POWER menu on the VAX-C
front panel LCD display or by using the VAX-C web browser to
navigate to Exciter Home > Setup > DUC/RTAC screen.
STEP 2
Verify that the nonlinear RTAC attempt and success counters increment
about every 20 seconds on the Exciter Home > Setup > DUC/RTAC
screen.
STEP 3
Use a spectrum analyzer to measure the adjacent-channel IMD shoulder
levels. Verify compliance with any prevailing spectrum mask
requirements.
STEP 4
Save this current nonlinear correction in one of the four slots (See
Storing Precorrection Section 5.5.2).
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5-17
Section 5 Maintenance and Alignments
Platinum VAX-C Series
NOTE:
If the Linear RTAC section is in BYPASS at this time, linear correction will not
be stored.
Linear Equalizer:
STEP 5
Set the linear RTAC mode to ADAPT via the POWER menu on the
VAX-C front panel LCD display or by using the VAX-C web browser to
navigate to Exciter Home > Setup > DUC/RTAC screen.
STEP 6
Verify that the linear RTAC attempt and success counters increment
about every twenty seconds.
STEP 7
Use a TV analyzer to measure the MER (DVBT, DAB) or EVM (ATSC).
STEP 8
Save this current linear correction in one of the four slots (See Storing
Precorrection Section 5.5.2).
STEP 9
Procedure complete.
5.5.1.1
Troubleshooting Precorrection
If the RTAC mode are set to ADAPT, but the Attempts counter does not increment
within thirty seconds, there is a problem with the feedback samples.
Check the signal levels at the PRE and POST-FILTER inputs on the back of the VAX-C.
They should be between -10dBm and +5dBm (optimum is 0dBm at the inputs on the
back of the VAX-C).
Check the RTAC levels on the VAX-C STATUS > RTAC GUI screen. The bar meters
should be green and the level should be just below the black 100% line.
Check that the exciter Home Screen shows ON in the upper left corner of the GUI
screen. If the exciter is OFF or MUTE, the corrections cannot be calculated.
5.5.2
Storing Precorrection
Follow this procedure to store the calculated RTAC correction values to VAX-C
memory.
STEP 1
5-18
Go to the RTAC - Stored Correction sets Screen, Figure 5-7.
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Platinum VAX-C Series
Section 5 Maintenance and Alignments
Figure 5-7 RTAC Stored Correction Sets Screen
STEP 2
Enter a name of up to sixteen characters for the desired set.
STEP 3
Press the SAVE button to store the correction to memory.
NOTE:
The correction currently being applied will be stored, overwriting any values previously stored in memory.
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5-19
Section 5 Maintenance and Alignments
5.6
Platinum VAX-C Series
Changing Frequency
This procedure describes manual change of the channel frequency to a new value. Save
the settings on the initial channel before proceeding with frequency change. Once
operation on the new frequency has been established, a second set of settings should
also be saved. This will greatly facilitate changing between frequencies in the future by
simply duplicating the previously recorded settings. The settings can be saved using the
web browser and navigating to Tx Home>Exciter Home>Setup>ISP>Save Settings.
This discussion assumes that the frequency will be changed manually and somewhat
infrequently.
Required Tools:
!
•
•
Spectrum Analyzer
•
Directional coupler and average power meter or other precision power
measurement means. This is only required if the user would like to do a
power calibration at the new frequency, but it is not required.
Network Analyzer (use for re-tuning of output filter and determination of
coupling values)
CAUTION:
COAXIAL DIRECTIONAL COUPLERS MAY NOT BE COMPENSATED VERSUS
FREQUENCY. THAT IS, THEY WILL EXHIBIT A MONOTONIC RISE IN COUPLING
VALUE ACROSS THE VHF BAND. ACCORDINGLY, ANY COUPLING VALUES
WRITTEN ON COUPLER PORTS MAY NOT BE APPLICABLE TO A NEW OPERATING
FREQUENCY. CONSULT COUPLER FACTORY TEST DATA SHEETS (IF
FURNISHED) OR RE-MEASURE THE COUPLER WITH A NETWORK ANALYZER TO
DETERMINE THE COUPLING VALUES AT THE NEW FREQUENCY.
The caution above does not apply to internal VAX-C power measurements, which
are frequency compensated.
Procedure:
5-20
STEP 1
Turn off transmitter via OFF button on VAX-C front panel.
STEP 2
Use the LCD and front control buttons to navigate to POWER>LINEAR
and select BYPASS. Then navigate to POWER>NONLINEAR and
select BYPASS.
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Platinum VAX-C Series
STEP 3
!
Section 5 Maintenance and Alignments
Tune output filter (if present) to new frequency. Consult filter test data,
specification sheet, or other manufacturer-supplied information for more
details. Some output filters are band limited and may not be adjustable
across the VHF band. In cases where the filters are band limited a
replacement filter will be required.
WARNING:
HARRIS DOES NOT RECOMMEND FIELD TUNING OF FILTERS. CONSULT THE
MANUFACTURER OF THE FILTER BEFORE ATTEMPTING ANY FREQUENCY TUNING OF FILTERS. HARRIS RECOMMENDS ACQUIRING A FILTER TUNED TO THE
FREQUENCY OF CHANGE BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH A FREQUENCY CHANGE.
STEP 4
Use network analyzer to confirm performance of test load, filter,
transmission line and antenna at new frequency.
STEP 5
Use the LCD and front control buttons to navigate to the SETUP
>PFRU>CENTER FREQUENCY menu and enter the new frequency
(MHz). Example: if the desired frequency is 500.5, MHz enter ’500’ as
the center frequency and enter the FREQUENCY OFFSET value as
"500000" (Hz). If the web browser is being used navigate to Tx
Home>Exciter Home>PFRU>Frequency (MHz) and enter the value as a
whole number and decimal. Example: if the desired frequency is 500.50
MHz select the white Frequency box, it will turn light yellow, and then
type in the new value 500.5 and press the enter key. A confirmation box
will open to ask "Are you sure? Press the OK button to proceed.
STEP 6
Press the power down button for 40 seconds.
STEP 7
Use the LCD and control buttons to navigate to
SETUP>XMTR>POWER SETTINGS menu. Adjust the power settings
in this menu to the new levels.
STEP 8
Turn transmitter on.
NOTE:
Steps 9-11 are not absolutely required, the system run at the new desired frequency and will be very close to the desired TX power. If you desire to calibrate
the system follow step 9-11.
STEP 9
5/9/13
Use a calibrated, averaging power wattmeter and a directional coupler
(with known coupling factor) to measure and monitor the transmitter
output power.
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5-21
Section 5 Maintenance and Alignments
5-22
Platinum VAX-C Series
STEP 10
Slowly raise the transmitter power (using the raise button) until the
desired power reading is observed on calibrated power meter connected
to directional coupler at transmitter output (or at the front panel on some
models).
STEP 11
Navigate to the SETUP>XMTR POWER SETTINGS>POWER
CALIBRATION MENU. Select FIELD FWD/RFLD and perform
calibration.
STEP 12
With transmitter set to nominal power output use power meter to confirm
RTAC sample level (-5dBm optimal).
STEP 13
Use the LCD and front control buttons to navigate to POWER>LINEAR
and select ADAPT. Then navigate to POWER>NONLINEAR and select
ADAPT.
STEP 14
Confirm signal quality.
STEP 15
Procedure complete.
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Section 5 Maintenance and Alignments
Platinum VAX-C Series
5.7
Fan Replacement
There are two 12Vdc fans on the front of the Platinum VAX-C. The fans can be
replaced while the transmitter is on air.
STEP 1
Loosen the two screws that attach the VAX-C front panel to the chassis.
STEP 2
Remove the front cover to expose the two fan assemblies.
Figure 5-8 VAX-C Fan Connection
STEP 3
!
Unplug the connectors that supply DC to the fan. The unplugged
connectors are shown in Figure 5-8.
CAUTION:
THE FANS MAY CONTINUE TO ROTATE FOR SEVERAL SECONDS AFTER
REMOVAL. FANS WILL START UP AS SOON AS THEY ARE PLUGGED IN.
5/9/13
STEP 4
Remove the fan mounting screws and the fan assembly.
STEP 5
Place the new fan in position, then install and tighten the mounting
screws.
STEP 6
Reconnect the connectors that supply DC to the fan. The fan will
immediately begin rotating if the power is on.
STEP 7
Replace the VAX-C front panel assembly and tighten the two mounting
screws.
STEP 8
End of procedure.
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5-23
Section 5 Maintenance and Alignments
5.8
Platinum VAX-C Series
Air Filter Replacement
Monthly inspection and cleaning of the air filter is recommended. Clean filters more
often in dusty environments. The filters can be easily removed from the front panels and
then cleaned. The filter must be thoroughly dry before reuse. The part number for the
filter material used in the VAX-C is 061-0115-000. The filter material is 1/4" thick,
10ppi.
Filters
Figure 5-9 Filter in VAX-C Front Panel
!
STEP 1
Loosen the two front panel connectors and remove the front panel. The
two filters are captive inside the front panel and slide toward the center
for removal.
STEP 2
Remove the filter material. The notch in the filter material aligns with
the fasteners on the front panel. The filter must be re-installed with the
same orientation.
STEP 3
Clean filter material with compressed air or wash with detergent &
water, or replace as necessary.
CAUTION:
DRY THE FILTER MATERIAL THOROUGHLY BEFORE REINSTALLATION.
STEP 4
5-24
Reinstall by reversing the order of the above steps.
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Platinum VAX-C Series
5.9
Section 5 Maintenance and Alignments
Cleaning
Occasionally the VAX-C circuit boards should be cleaned. All precautions against static
should be observed. The technician should be grounded, either through conductive
shoes or through a static ground strap.
The VAX-C should be powered down and disconnected from AC mains power before
the cleaning process is started. A vacuum cleaner should be used to remove dust from
the assemblies. A natural bristle brush with a metal band (needed to ground static
electricity) and a wooden handle can be used to dislodge dust. A vacuum cleaner hose
can develop static due to the air rushing through the hose. The hose should have a metal
nozzle, which should be grounded.
Do not use compressed air to blow dirt from the VAX-C because the dirt will settle on
something else. Fast moving air could damage or dislodge delicate circuit board
components, and it could also cause static problems.
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5-25
Platinum VAX-C Series
Section 5 Maintenance and Alignments
5.10 Changing Date and Time Battery
STEP 1
Remove power from the VAX-C.
STEP 2
If the VAX-C is installed in a rack, remove it and place on bench.
STEP 3
Remove the top cover.
STEP 4
Remove the old battery and insert a new battery with positive side
toward clip.Battery slides out from under the clip. See Figure 5-10 for
battery location.
NOTE:
Dispose of battery properly. Follow applicable local regulations.
STEP 5
•
Replace the top cover of the VAX-C and remount in transmitter.
Continue on to the next section to set the time and date.
The Harris part number for the date and time battery is 660005400 (lithium,
3V, CR2032, 20mm).
)
Date and Time
Battery
Figure 5-10 Date and Time Battery Location
5-26
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Platinum VAX-C Series
Section 5 Maintenance and Alignments
5.10.1 Setting VAX-C Date and Time
The VAX-C date and time should be set after the date and time battery is installed. The
date/time can be set using either the web browser or the LCD screen and control
buttons. Use the following procedure to set the date and time using the web browser.
STEP 1
Use the web browser to log into the VAX-C using the front or rear
ethernet connectors.
STEP 2
Navigate to Tx Home>Exciter Home>Setup>System Settings>Next. To
manually set time and date select None as UTC Source. If the
transmitter is attached to a network NTP settings can be selected that
will automatically set the time. If a GPS is connected the GPS time can
be used to set the time.
STEP 3
Set the time and date by clicking in each box.
a. A keyboard will appear. Type in the value for that box, then press enter.
b. Repeat step A for each box.
c. The time is entered in the 24 hour format.
d. This screen does not indicate the correct time. Correct time and date are indicated
in the Status > Signal Processor screen.
5.10.2 Battery Backup (UPS) Option
The following procedure describes installation of the VAX-C Battery Backup (UPS)
option 9710051012G. The battery backup board described is compatible with the
9710051011G ASM-Power Module which contains the 901-0215-241G PWA, LVPS
Distribution board.
The battery backup (UPS) option is useful in systems that require synchronized timing
as in SFN networks. The UPS battery pack keeps modulator section operational for one
minute and holdover components (clock oven and the GPS receiver) operating for
approximately 15 minutes if the batteries are fully charged.
The battery backup (UPS) can be disabled during shipment or storage by installing a
connector/jumper as shown in Figure 2-6 on page 2-19.
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5-27
Section 5 Maintenance and Alignments
Platinum VAX-C Series
Battery
Backup
Figure 5-11 Battery Backup (UPS) Location
The optional battery backup kit 9710051012G includes:
•
•
Qty 4, 3020803006, Screw, Mach M3-0.5 X 6 SEMS
Qty 1, 6600179000, PWA, 9.6V Battery Pack
Instructions:
!
STEP 1
Turn off transmitter.
STEP 2
Disconnect AC mains power from the VAX-C chassis.
WARNING:
REMOVE ALL POWER TO THE VAX-C BEFORE PERFORMING THE FOLLOWING
PROCEDURE.
!
CAUTION:
FOLLOW APPROPRIATE ESD (ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE)
PROCEDURES TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO SENSITIVE ELECTRONIC
COMPONENTS WHEN HANDLING CIRCUIT BOARDS.
STEP 3
5-28
If the unit is not mounted in a rack proceed to step 4. If rack mounted the
VAX-C must be removed from the rack. Remove cables from the back
of the transmitter using a 5/16” (8mm) open end wrench and a small
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Platinum VAX-C Series
Section 5 Maintenance and Alignments
straight slot screwdriver. Remove the VAX-C front cover and remove
the four Phillips screws that hold the VAX-C in the rack. Slide the VAXC out of the rack and place it on a sturdy table or bench.
STEP 4
Remove the four Phillips screws on the top, rear of the VAX-C that
secure the cover chassis. Remove the cover by sliding it toward the rear
of the VAX-C and lifting it upward.
STEP 5
Be sure that the connector on the back of the battery backup board aligns
and seats properly on the power supply board connector. The power
supply board standoffs are located on the front left side of the VAX-C.
STEP 6
Install the battery backup board and tighten the four Phillips mounting
screws. The battery backup board, standoffs, and mounting screws are
shown in Figure 5-11.
STEP 7
Replace the VAX-C cover and tighten hardware.
STEP 8
If rack mounted, slide the VAX-C into the rack.
STEP 9
Reconnect all cables to the rear of the VAX-C and tighten connectors as
required.
STEP 10
Restore AC mains power to the VAX-C.
STEP 11
If dual VAX-Cs are used switch the Drive Control to Auto.
NOTE:
Operation of the battery backup board can be monitored on the VAX-C Battery
Backup GUI screen. Refer to the VAX-C technical manual Section 3.11.5 for a
detailed description of the Battery Backup status screen.
STEP 12
End of procedure.
5.11 Changing Feature Key
The feature key unlocks optional features or other modulation standards. It is an alphanumeric number. Changes to the feature key are only needed if additional features or
modulation standards are purchased. Contact your Harris sales representative for a
quotation. A new feature key is not required to reload existing software or to load an
updated version of existing software.
Changing modulation type, adding GPS, SFN or MH options require new feature keys.
The LCD control panel on the VAX-C can’t be used to enter a new feature key. The
feature key must be installed using the web GUI. The GUI screen containing the feature
key is shown in Figure 3-25 on page 3-41.
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5-29
Section 5 Maintenance and Alignments
Platinum VAX-C Series
In order to purchase a new feature key the user must provide Harris with the front MAC
address from the VAX-C(s) being updated. The front MAC address can be found on the
Remote Communications web browser GUI screen shown in Figure 3-22 on page 3-37.
The new feature key is activated after the VAX-C transmitter is rebooted. Rebooting
can be accomplished by disconnecting and then reconnecting AC power or by using the
web browser to navigate to the Tx Home>Exciter Home>ISP page and pressing Reset.
5-30
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Platinum VAX-C Series
Section 5 Maintenance and Alignments
5.12 Connecting To The VAX-C
This section describes connection to the VAX-C with a PC (Windows XP operating
system) via ethernet for setup, operation, and software downloads.
NOTE:
Harris recommends the Firefox browser for use with this transmitter but Internet
Explorer version 8.0 or later can also be used.
Use of IE version 8.0 or higher may require a change in the IE8 Compatibility View
Settings screen. Open the IE8 browser and select Tools>Compatibility View Settings
and configure the settings as shown in Figure 5-12.
Figure 5-12 IE8 Compatibility View Settings
5.12.1
VAX-C Front and Rear RJ45 Connectors
The Front RJ45 Connector - VAX-C front RJ45 Ethernet connector has a fixed (static)
IP address which is 192.168.117.88 The front RJ45 connector of the VAX-C is intended
for direct connection to a computer which is operated in the DHCP (Dynamic Host
Configuration Protocol) client mode. The front connector is driven by a DHCP server
which will automatically provide a proper IP address to a directly connected computer
(operated in the DHCP client mode). This address will be 192.168.117.yyy, where yyy
ranges from 129 to 135.
When connecting to the VAX-C front panel ethernet port, if the computer being used
does not auto-detect for cross connection, a crossover cable must be used to connect the
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5-31
Section 5 Maintenance and Alignments
Platinum VAX-C Series
VAX-C front ethernet port to the computer. For additional information see "5.12.4
Connection Via Front Ethernet Connector" on page 5-34.
!
CAUTION:
DO NOT CONNECT THE VAX-C’S FRONT RJ45 CONNECTOR TO A NETWORK
BECAUSE THE DHCP SERVER IN THE VAX-C WILL CONFLICT WITH THE DHCP
SERVER IN THE NETWORK.
The rear RJ45 connector - VAX-C rear RJ45 Ethernet connector can operate in the
DHCP client mode or with a static IP. It is intended for connection to an Ethernet
network which is serviced by a DHCP server. That Ethernet network will supply the
VAX-C rear connector with an appropriate IP address when it is in the DHCP client
mode. For additional information see "5.12.5.2 Direct Connection, Computer To VAXC Rear Ethernet Connector" on page 5-38.
NOTE:
DHCP Client Mode Computer: A computer operated in the DHCP client mode
will be assigned an IP address if connected to a network or device which is configured as a DHCP server.
NOTE:
Static Mode Computer: A computer operated in the static mode has a fixed IP
address and will not accept a new address offered by a DHCP server driven network. To connect a Static Mode set computer to the rear connector, the computer
IP address must be within the DHCP range and must be an otherwise unused IP
address. See "5.12.5.2 Direct Connection, Computer To VAX-C Rear Ethernet
Connector" on page 5-38.
5.12.2 Log- In Authorization Levels & Passwords
When the Ethernet connection is established to the VAX-C, three levels of login are
available. They are:
5-32
•
Two “Secure” level logins, Engineer1 and Engineer2, which allow full access to the
VAX-C programming functions.
•
One "Administrator" level login that allows the administrator to view and change
existing passwords.
•
Multiple "Monitor" level logins, which allow viewing only and does not allow programming or attribute setting.
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Section 5 Maintenance and Alignments
Platinum VAX-C Series
Table 5-1
Default Passwords
User Level
Username
Password
Engineer1
admin
admin
Engineer2
user2
pass2
Administrator
netadmin
harris
Monitor
-
-
5.12.3 Changing Passwords
VAX-C Usernames, Passwords and Session Time Out duration can be changed using
the Tx Home>Exciter Home>Setup>User Settings>Active User screen. Login to the
VAX-C using the netadmin username and password is required to access the User
Management screen.
NOTE:
The netadmin login is an administrative login used to change engineer level usernames/passwords and session time out. Changes to other transmitter parameters
are not allowed using the netadmin login.
After VAX-C administrator login navigate to Tx Home>Exciter Home>Setup>User
Settings>Active User screen. The Active Users screen in Figure 5-13 on left will be
displayed. Pressing Edit will display the NetAdmin - User Management screen (see
Figure 5-13 on right). The screen shows the current usernames and passwords. Engineer
1 and 2 usernames/passwords a can be changed by typing the new names in the boxes to
right.
The NetAdmin username and password can’t be changed at this time.
Values of Session Time Out from zero to 1440 minutes can be also set here (15 minutes
is a typical setting). If zero is entered there is no limit on time out as long as the user
requests data more frequently than every 5 minutes. If data is not requested within the
five minute window then log out occurs automatically. If a value from 1-1440 minutes
is entered then logout occurs automatically after that time value is exceeded.
If a browser session is closed or a network interruption occurs then the user will be
logged out after 5 minutes. During the 5 minute period no user can log in using the same
password.
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5-33
Section 5 Maintenance and Alignments
Figure 5-13
NetAdmin Active Users Screen
Platinum VAX-C Series
NetAdmin - User Management Screen
Once the desired changes have been made to the NetAdmin-User Management screen
press the Active button to return to the Active users screen where the current connection
information is provided. Access to other screens is not allowed while logged in as an
administrator. If access to other screens is desired the user must Logout and then Login
as an engineer.
5.12.4 Connection Via Front Ethernet Connector
When connecting to the VAX-C front panel RJ45 connector, the connecting computer
can be setup as a DHCP client, where the DHCP server associated with the VAX-C
front RJ45 port will assign an address to the computer. This method of obtaining a
computer address is described in Section 5.12.4.1.
The computer can also be set to Static IP mode, where its address must be assigned
manually. In this mode, the address must be assigned as 192.168.117.yyy, where yyy is
any value between 2 and 254, except 88.
When the computer has been assigned an IP address, connect to the VAX-C using the
procedure in Section 5.12.4.3.
When connecting to the VAX-C front panel ethernet port, if the computer being used
does not auto-detect for cross connection, a crossover cable must be used to connect the
VAX-C front ethernet port to the computer.
5-34
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Section 5 Maintenance and Alignments
Platinum VAX-C Series
5.12.4.1 Assigning Computer IP Address in DHCP Client Mode
If the computer is in the DHCP client mode, it will automatically obtain an address from
the front panel RJ45 (Ethernet) connector. Use the following procedure to obtain an
address for the computer. To avoid reboot of the computer refer to Section 5.12.4.2 for
an alternate method.
STEP 1
Connect an ethernet cable between the computer’s RJ45 connector and
the VAX-C front panel RJ45 connector.
STEP 2
Reboot the computer. The computer’s address should now be
192.168.117.yyy, where yyy ranges from 129 to 135.
STEP 3
It should be possible to connect to the VAX-C using the procedure in
5.12.4.3 .
If this procedure fails to assign a compatible IP address to the PC, use the procedure
listed below at 5.12.4.2 on page 5-35.
5.12.4.2 Assigning Computer IP Address Without Rebooting
STEP 1
Connect an ethernet cable between the computer’s RJ45 connector and
the VAX-C front panel RJ45 connector.
STEP 2
Press Start > Run.
STEP 3
The Run window should open.
STEP 4
The run window open box should display ’cmd’. If not, type ’cmd’, then
press OK.
STEP 5
The cmd.exe window will open.
STEP 6
Type in ’ipconfig /release’, then hit enter.
a. This will disassociate the computer from the previous ethernet network to which it was connected.
STEP 7
Type in ’ipconfig /renew’, then hit enter.
a. This associates the computer with the VAX-C front panel RJ45 ethernet connector.
b. The VAX-C will assign an address to the computer, which is
192.168.117.yyy, where yyy ranges from 129 to 135.
STEP 8
5/9/13
To verify the new address type in ’ipconfig /all’, then hit enter.
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5-35
Section 5 Maintenance and Alignments
Platinum VAX-C Series
a. The new IP computer ethernet address should be set.
STEP 9
Connect to the VAX-C using the procedure in 5.12.4.3 .
To reconnect to another Ethernet network, connect the computer to the desired network
and perform either of the above procedures.
5.12.4.3 Making the Connection to the VAX-C
STEP 1
Connect an ethernet cable between the computer’s RJ45 connector and
the VAX-C front panel RJ45 connector.
a. If the computer being used does not auto-detect for cross connection,
a crossover cable must be used to connect the VAX-C front ethernet
port to the computer.
b. If necessary perform the DHCP procedure found in "5.12.4.1
Assigning Computer IP Address in DHCP Client Mode" on page 535 or "5.12.4.2 Assigning Computer IP Address Without Rebooting"
on page 5-35.
STEP 2
Open Mozilla Firefox and enter the VAX-C’s front connector address:
(192.168.117.88).
STEP 3
The Log In Screen should appear.
STEP 4
Log in using user name and password.
a. The default user name and password for
Engineer1 is admin, admin. Provisions to change the login user
names and passwords are given in 5.12.2 .
STEP 5
The VAX-C web GUI is now displayed and can be navigated as needed.
5.12.4.4 Obtaining Rear Ethernet Connector Address
The VAX-C rear RJ45 connector should have already been connected to the existing
ethernet.
Connect a computer to the VAX-C front panel RJ45 connector and log in as described
above.
5-36
STEP 1
Navigate, on front panel LCD to the Setup > Communications Tab.
STEP 2
The rear panel Ethernet connector address will be given on this page in
the Ethernet #2 sub window.
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Platinum VAX-C Series
STEP 3
Section 5 Maintenance and Alignments
The Ethernet #1 window gives the front Ethernet parameters.
5.12.5 Connecting Via VAX-C Rear Panel Ethernet
Connector
Two methods are used to connect to the rear panel RJ45 connector, they are as follows:
•
•
Connecting through an existing ethernet network.
Direct connection, computer to VAX-C rear RJ45 connector.
Both of these connection methods are described below.
5.12.5.1 Connecting To VAX-C Via Existing Ethernet Network
When connecting to an VAX-C through an existing ethernet network, the connecting
computer can be setup on static IP if it has already been assigned an address on the
network in question. If it has not already been assigned an address on that network, it
must be setup as a DHCP client so the network can assign it an address.
STEP 1
Connect the VAX-C rear RJ45 connector to the existing ethernet
network.
STEP 2
Connect the computer to a connector on the existing ethernet network.
STEP 3
Go to Internet Explorer and type the VAX-C rear RJ45 connector
address found in "5.12.4.4 Obtaining Rear Ethernet Connector Address"
on page 5-36.
STEP 4
Log In Screen should appear.
STEP 5
Log in using user name and password.
STEP 6
The VAX-C web GUI is now displayed and can be navigated as needed.
NOTE:
Some network switches utilizing secure connections will require the MAC
address to be given to the switch to allow traffic to pass to and from it. The MAC
address can be found just above the IP address Field.
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5-37
Section 5 Maintenance and Alignments
Platinum VAX-C Series
5.12.5.2 Direct Connection, Computer To VAX-C Rear Ethernet
Connector
Direct connection to the VAX-C’s rear RJ45 connector is not recommended, but it
can be done. The front panel, with its DHCP server is recommended for direct
connection.
When directly connecting a computer to the VAX-C rear panel ethernet connector, the
connecting computer must be setup on Static IP mode with the first three segments of
its address set the same as the first three segments of the address of the rear connector of
the VAX-C. For example, assume the VAX-C rear panel address is 137.237.242.138.
The computer address must be set to 137.237.242.yyy, where yyy is any number below
255, excluding 138 and 0. In other words, the Static IP address must be within the
DHCP range and must be an otherwise unassigned IP address.
Direct connection to the rear panel by a computer set to the DHCP client mode may
work if both had been connected to the same network. This assumes the DHCP assigned
IP address has not changed.
STEP 1
Connect an ethernet cable between the computer and the VAX-C rear
panel RJ45 connector.
STEP 2
Go to Internet Explorer and type the rear RJ45 connector address. Using
the example given above, the rear connector address will be
137.237.242.138
STEP 3
Log In Screen should appear.
STEP 4
Log in using user name and password.
STEP 5
The VAX-C web GUI is now displayed and can be navigated as needed.
5.12.6 Changing PC Operating Mode Static/DHCP
5-38
STEP 1
Connect an ethernet cable between the computer and the VAX-C rear
panel RJ45 connector.
STEP 2
On the computer, click Start > Settings > Network Connections. The
network connections window will appear.
STEP 3
In the network connections, right click on the network connections soft
key, a drop down list will appear.
STEP 4
From the drop down list, select properties. The Local Area Connection
Properties window will appear.
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Section 5 Maintenance and Alignments
Platinum VAX-C Series
STEP 5
In the local area connection properties window, scroll down in the sub
window until the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) selection appears.
STEP 6
Click on the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) selection.
STEP 7
Click on the Properties soft key below and to the right of the sub
window.
STEP 8
The Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties window will appear.
STEP 9
In this window, two choices appear, they are:
a. Obtain an IP address automatically. This choice sets the computer in
the DHCP client mode.
1.If this choice is selected, the ethernet network to which the computer is connected will automatically give it an IP address for that
network, as long as that network has a DHCP server.
b. Use the following IP address. This choice sets the computer in the
Static address mode.
1.If this choice is selected, enter the desired IP address in the space
provided. The first three sections of the address must be the same
as the network or VAX-C to which the computer is connected
2.The last section of the address must be a number which is not
already in use by that network. It can range from 1 to 254.
3.The subnet mask address will automatically be entered when its
space is entered.
5.12.6.1 Verifying The Computer IP Address
When the previous procedure has been completed, the computer’s IP address can be
verified using the following procedure.
STEP 1
On the computer press Start > Run.
STEP 2
The Run window should open.
STEP 3
The run window open box should display cmd.
a. If cmd is not displayed, type ’cmd’.
b. Next press OK.
5/9/13
STEP 4
The cmd.exe window will open.
STEP 5
Type in ’ipconfig /all’, then hit enter.
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5-39
Section 5 Maintenance and Alignments
Platinum VAX-C Series
a. The present computer IP address and other information will appear.
5.12.6.2 VAX-C Screen Captures
VAX-C GUI screens can easily be captured using the Alt - Print Screen keys. The
procedure is as follows.
STEP 1
Connect a computer to the VAX-C.
STEP 2
Select the screen to be captured.
STEP 3
Press and hold the Alt key while pressing the print screen key.
a. Earlier Windows programs copied the captured screen to the clipboard.
b. The Windows XP program opens a window which offers many
choices including copying the captured screen to the clipboard or
saving it as a file to a specified directory.
STEP 4
It may be necessary to change the computer screen resolution if a portion
of the VAX-C GUI screen is cut off when it is captured.
STEP 5
If desired, the captured screen may be edited, using a user supplied
program, to remove the undesired information which surrounds the
captured screen.
Another option for screen captures is a Firefox add-on called screen capture elite. It
allows selection and capture of an active window and minimizes the amount of
cropping needed.
5-40
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Platinum VAX-C Series
Section 5 Maintenance and Alignments
5.13 Updating VAX-C Software
The latest revision of VAX-C software is available at the Harris Broadcast Customer
Portal web site.
NOTE:
The transmitter will go off-air during software updates.
NOTE:
If changing modulation type, enter a new ’feature key’ before programming.
NOTE:
Should this procedure result in a crashed or incomplete software download/
update, refer to 5.14 on page 5-48, ’Bootloader Recovery Procedure’.
When the software file is located and saved on your computer, use the following
instructions to load the software into the VAX-C.
STEP 1
Connect to the front ethernet connector of the VAX-C. The front
connector IP address is static 192.168.117.88.
NOTE:
Instructions for connecting directly to the VAX-C front Ethernet connector is
given in Section 5.12.4, Connection Via Front Ethernet Connector, on page -34.
STEP 2
5/9/13
When connected the VAX-C login screen, shown in Figure 5-14, will
appear. The default username is ’admin’ and the password is: admin.
Logging in to the VAX-C must be done prior to loading software.
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5-41
Section 5 Maintenance and Alignments
Platinum VAX-C Series
Figure 5-14 VAX-C Login Screen
STEP 3
Press the Exciter Home soft key on the Xmtr Home page.
STEP 4
Press the Setup soft key on the Exciter Home page.
STEP 5
Press the ISP soft key on the right side of the Setup page.The In System
Programming screen, shown in Figure 5-15, will be displayed.
Figure 5-15 VAX-C In-System Programming Screen
5-42
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Platinum VAX-C Series
STEP 6
Section 5 Maintenance and Alignments
Press the Browse soft button to the right of the file to upload box on the
In-System Programming screen. This will bring up the File Upload sub
window, shown in Figure 5-16.
Figure 5-16 File Upload Window
STEP 7
From the File Upload sub window, locate the software file to be
downloaded (.s19 file extension). This is the file which was previously
down loaded and saved to the computer. When the correct file has been
highlighted, press Open.
STEP 8
Press Submit when the In-System Programming screen reappears with
the selected file showing in the File to Upload window.
STEP 9
There will be a delay of a minute or two and the screen, shown in Figure
5-17, will appear. When it appears, select Program.
NOTE:
Selecting Upload New would bring up the File Upload screen to select a different
file.
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5-43
Section 5 Maintenance and Alignments
Platinum VAX-C Series
Figure 5-17 In-System Programming Window
STEP 10
The screen shown in Figure 5-18 will appear. Select OK to continue with
programming.
Figure 5-18 Are You Sure Window
5-44
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Section 5 Maintenance and Alignments
Platinum VAX-C Series
Figure 5-19 Programming Screen
STEP 11
STEP 12
The screen shown in Figure 5-19 will appear indicating that
programming has begun. This process will take several minutes. Once
programming is complete the web connection to the VAX-C will be
broken and communication with the VAX-C will cease (a yellow error
screen will be displayed).
When communications is reestablished a login screen will open.
NOTE:
In some instances it may be necessary to exit and then restart the Web browser to
establish a new connection.
5/9/13
STEP 13
Log into the VAX-C (name and password required). Use the web
browser to navigate to Tx Home>Exciter Home>Status >Revisions
screen. The new Build version will be displayed there. If Customer
Special appears as the Build Version it indicates a possible problem and
the software should be reloaded. The current modulator type can be
identified by navigating to the Tx Home>Exciter Home>Setup>Signal
Processor box.
STEP 14
End of procedure.
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5-45
Section 5 Maintenance and Alignments
Platinum VAX-C Series
5.13.1 Saving and Recalling Settings
The Save Settings soft key can be used to save a copy of the current user settings stored
in EEPROM in the VAX-C. All settings with the exception of the front and rear MAC
addresses and feature key, are included. These stored settings can be used to restore a
system to known user settings.
NOTE:
The EEPROM data does include calibration data, so if using to duplicate user settings on a second system, the calibration data will be copied over as well. As Calibration data is system specific this will corrupt the calibration; power readings
will be inaccurate until they are recalibrated.
To save the current EEPROM settings, select the Save Settings soft key. A new browser
tab will open showing the EEPROM file in text format. To save the file, from the Save
settings data page, select File> Save Page As
Figure 5-20
Choose where to save EEPROM file, and name the file as desired. Make sure the file
extension is ‘.s19’
5-46
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Platinum VAX-C Series
Section 5 Maintenance and Alignments
Figure 5-21
In order to restore the settings that are saved in the file, follow the process described in
"5.13 Updating VAX-C Software" on page 5-41. Use the .s19 file saved in the
previous step as the file to upload.
5.13.2 Web Browser Screen Captures
Web browser GUI screens can easily be captured using the Alt - Print Screen keys. The
procedure is as follows.
STEP 1
Connect a computer to the VAX-C.
STEP 2
Select the screen to be captured.
STEP 3
Press and hold the Alt key while pressing the print screen key.
a. Earlier Windows programs copied the captured screen to the clipboard.
b. The Windows XP program opens a window which offers many
choices including copying the captured screen to the clipboard or
saving it as a file to a specified directory.
5/9/13
STEP 4
It may be necessary to change the computer screen resolution if a portion
of the GUI screen is cut off when it is captured.
STEP 5
If desired, the captured screen may be edited, using a user supplied
program, to remove the undesired information which surrounds the
captured screen.
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5-47
Section 5 Maintenance and Alignments
Platinum VAX-C Series
5.14 Bootloader Recovery Procedure
Recovery from a crashed or incomplete ISP (In-System Programming) download
(software update) by invoking the bootloader.
In most cases this can be accomplished using the following procedure:
STEP 1
Connect to the front Ethernet port using instructions in Section 5.12.4.
STEP 2
Open a web browser session via the VAX-C front Ethernet port by
entering 192.168.117.88/isp in the navigation box.
Figure 5-22 Bootloader ISP Screen
STEP 3
5-48
Use the Browse button to locate the software file on your PC. The
filename will be similar to APEXM2X_ATSC_REVAK.s19. The
modulation type and the revision level will vary.
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Section 5 Maintenance and Alignments
Platinum VAX-C Series
Figure 5-23 Bootloader Browse Screen
STEP 4
Highlight the desired file then press Open.
STEP 5
The bootloader ISP screen will be displayed and the ’File to Update:’
window will display the filename. Press ’Submit’. The update will take
several minutes. Do not disrupt the process.
STEP 6
Upon completion of the process open a web browser session to
reestablish the connection to the VAX-C transmitter.
STEP 7
End of procedure.
In instances where the IP address is unknown or when the above procedure fails the
following procedure may be used:
5/9/13
STEP 1
Connect a serial cable from PC / laptop to the VAX-C.
STEP 2
Start a terminal program (115,200,N,8,1) and make sure it is the active
PC window/program.
STEP 3
Hold down the escape (ESC) key and power cycle the transmitter by
either plugging and unplugging the unit or by using the reset button
behind the front panel. Hold the escape key until you see the message
’Starting Ethernet Downloader’ at the bottom of the screen. It should
appear right away.
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5-49
Section 5 Maintenance and Alignments
Platinum VAX-C Series
Figure 5-24 Ethernet Downloader Screen
STEP 4
Double strike the enter key to bring up the basic Ethernet screen.
Figure 5-25 Tera Term Ethernet Screen
STEP 5
5-50
Use the static IP from the front panel or network settings of the rear IP
port that may have been previously configured. Open a web browser and
type in the appropriate IP address. The In-System Programming (ISP)
screen will appear.
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Platinum VAX-C Series
5/9/13
Section 5 Maintenance and Alignments
STEP 6
Proceed to load the complete *.s19 file.
STEP 7
End of procedure.
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5-51
Section 5 Maintenance and Alignments
Platinum VAX-C Series
5.15 Connecting to the VAX via SNMP
The VAX-C transmitter family supports monitoring and alarming functionality via
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol). Basic control of the equipment is
possible after activation in the equipment. SNMP versions V1 and V2c and V3 are
implemented.
This section assumes a good working knowledge of networking and SNMP
connectivity. The information contained here is not meant to teach networking or how
to setup/operate a network manager application, but merely provide the information
necessary for a network administrator to connect and operate the VAX-C transmitter
using the SNMP connection.
5.15.1 SNMP Configuration
Setup for SNMP operation is done via the web browser by navigating to the VAX-C
SNMP setup screen. Press Exciter Home > Setup > Remote Communications > NEXT
> NEXT.
Figure 5-26 LPU SNMP Setup Screen
The SNMP setup screen allows location setting for connection identification,
destination IP address for trap messages, R/W community, Enable/Disable of Set
commands, Port, selection of V1 or V2 traps and deletion of IP addresses.
5-52
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Platinum VAX-C Series
Section 5 Maintenance and Alignments
5.15.2 Supported MIBs
As of this printing, the Harris VAX transmitter can serve out three different MIBs:
•
•
•
Harris transmitter base MIB (basic functionality for all Harris transmitters)
IRT DVB Single Transmitter MIB
IRT DAB Single Transmitter MIB
5.15.3 Harris Base MIB Description
The Harris base MIB is usable in all NMS (Network Management Systems) and is
provided in text-format. The base MIB has the advantage of being common to many
different Harris equipment types, thus allowing many different Harris devices to be
monitored once the MIB is imported to the NMS.
Once an alarm has been signaled in SNMP, an Internet browser can be opened in the
NMS for full monitoring and control capabilities via the HTTP web remote.
5.15.4 Shortcuts
Following shortcuts are used in the MIB descriptions:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
5/9/13
• OS:Octet String
• TT: Time Tick
• OID: Object Identifier
• G32: Gauge 32
• TRV: TRuth Value
• ENU: ENUmerations
• RO: Read Only
• RW: Read Write
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5-53
Section 5 Maintenance and Alignments
Platinum VAX-C Series
5.15.5 Harris SMI (Structure of Managed Information)
Harris Transmission SMI
Harris Transmitters branch OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.290.9.2.1
iso(1).org(3).dod(6).internet(1).private(4).enterprises(1).harris(290).bcd2(9).transmissi
on(2)
Figure 5-27 Harris SMI Block Diagram
5-54
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Platinum VAX-C Series
Section 5 Maintenance and Alignments
Figure 5-28 MIB 2 Description
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5-55
Section 5 Maintenance and Alignments
Platinum VAX-C Series
5.16 DAB Single Frequency Network (SFN) Setup
A popular option for DAB/ T-DMB implementation is the single frequency network
(SFN). In a single frequency network, all transmitters in a geographic region are
synchronized in frequency and modulation content (symbol). For such a system to
work, two parameters must be tightly controlled at the transmitter site: the RF centerchannel frequency and the program modulation (symbol) delay.
For SFN operation, the RF center-channel frequency in the VAX-C is locked to an
internal 10 MHz reference oscillator. The 10 MHz oscillator is, in turn, locked to a 1 pps
reference signal from an internal or external GPS receiver. This holds the frequency to
within the 10Hz recommended precision level for SFN operation in DAB mode 1, Band
III.
The symbol delay is controlled by three different parameters in the LPU: dynamic
delay, static delay, and offset delay.
5.16.1 Dynamic Delay
Dynamic Delay is an automatic system addressing delays in the ETI distribution
network from the multiplexer to the transmitter input. The exciter compares timing
information embedded in the incoming ETI stream against a locally received GPS - 1
pps reference. Each individual transmitter site adds additional delay to synchronize its
ETI input signal to a target “maximum network delay” value added to the ETI stream at
the multiplexer. The maximum network delay set to be equal to the ETI transit delay to
the furthest site, plus a safety margin.
This forces all sites to be in synchrony at the dynamic delay control point at the input to
the COFDM encoder. Site-to-site differences in signal processing delays occurring after
the dynamic delay circuit inside the COFDM encoder (i.e. outside dynamic delay
control zone) are addressed by the static delay setting.
Dynamic delay is sometimes known as “Network Padding Delay"
5.16.2 Static Delay
Static Delay is a fixed setting to compensate for different processing delays in DAB
transmitters from different manufacturers arising after the dynamic delay circuit (i.e.
outside dynamic delay control zone). The static delay for each site may be set via the
web remote interface. Each individual transmitter site adds additional static delay to
make its output synchronized with the output of the most-delayed site in the network.
5-56
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Section 5 Maintenance and Alignments
Platinum VAX-C Series
Static delay is sometimes known as “Transmitter Trimming Delay”
5.16.3 Offset Delay
(175ms)
STATIC DELAY TARGET SET LOCALLY
OPTIONAL MINOR ADVANCE
SET BY OUTPUT PROCESS TIME
SIGNAL LEAVES TRANSMITTER
STATIC DELAY COMPENSATION
ADDED BY LPU
THE MAIN DELAY SETTING FOR THE ENTIRE
NETWORK PLUS ANY ETI OFFSET DELAY FOR
THIS INDIVIDUAL TX SITE
INHERENT PROCESSING
DELAY IN MODULATOR
DYNAMIC DELAY TARGET SET
AT MULTIPLEX
ETI SIGNAL ARRIVES AT TX SITE
DYNAMIC DELAY COMP.
ADDED BY LPU
ETI DISTRIBUTION NETWORK LATENCY
ETI SIGNAL TRANSMITTED
FROM MULTIPLEX
Offset Delay is a fine tune setting to delay the output of an individual transmitter to
alleviate real-world reception difficulties typically due to localized geographical
conditions or unequal transmitter powers. The offset delay at each site can be controlled
remotely from the multiplexer via the ETI stream.
DYNAMIC DELAY
COMPENSATES FOR CHANGING LATENCY IN THE ETI
DISTRIBUTION NETWORK TO THE TRANSMITTER SITE.
STATIC DELAY
COMPENSATES FOR DIFFERENT INTERNAL PROCESSING
DELAY FOR VARIOUS EQUIPMENT TYPES. CAN ALSO BE
USED TO MANUALLY SYNCHRONIZE TRANSMITTERS AND
MANUALLY ADD A LOCAL OFFSET FOR SIMPLE SFN
NETWORKS WITHOUT DYNAMIC DELAY ACTIVATED.
OFFSET DELAY
ADDED TO AN INDIVIDUAL TRANSMITTER TO ACCOUNT
FOR PARTICULAR GEOGRAPHICAL AND PROPAGATIONAL
CONDITIONS. MAY BE ADDED TO THE DYNAMIC DELAY
BUFFER VIA AN MSNC SETTING IN THE ETI STREAM, OR
LOCALLY TO THE STATIC DELAY BUFFER VIA THE ADJUST
ETI STATIC DELAY SETTING IN THE LPU WEB BROWSER.
OVERALL TRANSIT TIME
Figure 5-29 Graphical Representation of DAB Signal Delays
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5-57
Section 5 Maintenance and Alignments
Platinum VAX-C Series
5.17 DAB EDI/IP Input Option
NOTE:
The DAB EDI/IP board (9810274009G) consists of the MCF5484 UC Module
(9010213011G) added to the DAB ETI Input Option (9810274012G). The original ETI input board (9010215291G) is part of the 9810274012G.
Figure 5-30 Assembly DAB EDI/IP Inuput Option
5.17.1 Overview
EDI (Encapsulation of DAB Interfaces) allows the broadcaster to encapsulate the ETI
streams into an Internet Protocol stream for distribution to the DAB Modulator. The
EDI board has two 10/100 BaseT Ethernet ports in addition to the two ETI inputs. The
EDI IP stream is received by the EDI processor and is then converted to an ETI stream
for input by the DAB Modulator.
5.17.2 Installation and Setup
The card is inserted into a rear slot of an M2X exciter, VAX LPU, or VAX-C unit. Setup
is via M2X, LPU or VAX-C graphical user interface (GUI). Software updates are
performed via ISP over the ETH1 port (IP address on this port is fixed 192.168.117.88).
Figure 5-31 DAB EDI/IP Input Option Installed in VAX-C
5-58
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Platinum VAX-C Series
Section 5 Maintenance and Alignments
5.17.3 Inputs/Outputs
•
•
•
•
Two ETI, BNC, 75 ohm, female inputs - labeled ETI1 IN and ETI2 IN
One ETI, BNC, 75 ohm, female output - labeled ETI MON
Two 10/100 BaseT network, RJ45 ports on the rear panel - labeled ETH1 and ETH2
Three SMA, 50 ohm, female outputs - labeled 2.048 MHz-Out, SYNC ETI Out, &
SYNC OFDM Out
5.17.4 Operation
One EDI stream can be processed by the EDI board along with one ETI stream. If EDI
is not used then two ETI input streams can be used. The multiplexer sends EDI data to
the IP address of the EDI board. The processor on the EDI board receives the EDI data,
converts it to an ETI stream, and outputs the ETI stream to the DAB modulator.
5.17.5 M2X, LPU or VAX Interface
Interface
• EDI per ETSI TS 102 693 V1.1.2
•
•
1x Channel
10/100 BaseT (RJ45)
Protocols
• UDP/DCP
•
TCP/DCP
Processing
• 1x Stream (ETH2)
•
•
•
Forward Error Correction (RS) Code Strength 1-5 (auto-detecting)
SFN preservation
Adjustable buffer depth
Control and Management
• Exciter screens for IP setup
•
5/9/13
In-system programmable over ETH1 interface
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5-59
Section 5 Maintenance and Alignments
Platinum VAX-C Series
5.17.6 GUI Screens
Figure 5-32 EDI Setup Screens
Setup screens can be accessed by using the M2X, LPU or VAX-C GUI interface and
navigating to Exciter Home>Setup>DAB Modulator>EDI.
Figure 5-33 DAB Setup Screen and EDIStatus Screen
5.17.7 References
Technical Specification, ETSI TS 102 xxx V1.1.1 (2008-10-21) Digital Audio
Broadcasting (DAB); Encapsulation of DAB Interfaces (EDI)
5.17.8 EDI Software Update
Connect an Ethernet cable between a computer and EDI board ETH 1. The ETH 1 port
is a DHCP server and should automatically assign your computer an IP Address. Check
your computers IP address to verify that it is given a 192.168.117.# IP address. On the
computer open a Firefox session, in the address bar, type in 192.168.117.88, you should
see the below GUI screen. Select browse and navigate to location of software file
5-60
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Platinum VAX-C Series
Section 5 Maintenance and Alignments
"EDI_BETA_VERSION_0x0036.s19". Hit Submit, after a minute you should see the
"Program" button, select it. The EDI board will reboot after programming.
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5-61
Section 5 Maintenance and Alignments
Platinum VAX-C Series
5.18 Typical Test Equipment
Table 5-2
Recommended Test Equipment
Equipment Type
TV Spectrum Analyzer
Manufacturer
R&S
Demodulator
Spectrum Analyzer
Power measurement
Frequency
measurement
R&S
Agilent
Agilent
Agilent
Miscellaneous Test
Equipment
Bird
Narda
Eagle
Eagle
Fluke
Myat
Dielectric
Myat
Optional
Adapters and
connectors
Adapters and
connectors
Attenuator
5-62
Model Number
ETL
Harris Part
No.
(if applicable)
Options
ETL-B203 RF pre-select.
FSL-B4 OCXO Ref. Freq.
FSL-B7 Nar. Res. Filters
ETL-K220 ATSC Demod.
DIV7 ETL-K208 Meas. Log
EFA
instead of ETL
4402
instead of ETL
E44182B power meter with E9300B sensor, 100 uW to 3 W
53131A or 53181A
010 high stability time base
015 range extension to 1.5 GHz, OR
030 range extension to 3.0 GHz
APM-16 wattmeter, with 1W to 1kW elements
Directional coupler
620-0457-000
RLB-150 RF bridge
700-1289-000
TNF-200 VHF RF notch filter
484-0300-000
87 digital multimeter with 801-400 current probe
3-1/8 inch to 4-1/16 inch adaptor
620-2395-000
3-1/8 inch to 4-1/16 inch adaptor
620-1928-000
3-1/8 inch to 6-1/8 inch adaptor
620-2297-000
3-1/8 inch to type N adaptor
620-2859-000
Type N to BNC, male to female
620-0128-000
Type N to BNC, female to male
620-0547-000
BNC barrel, female to female
620-0604-000
BNC barrel, male to male
620-0564-000
SMA to BNC, male to female
620-2611-000
SMA to N, male to female
620-2562-000
SMB (push on) to BNC
620-0628-000
SMC to BNC, screw on jack to plug
620-2563-000
BNC to TNC, jack to plug
620-2821-000
BNC to TNC, jack to jack
620-2823-000
TNC to N, plug to jack
620-2824-000
TNC to N, jack to plug
620-2822-000
10 dB attenuator, type N, male to female
556-0074-000
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Section 5 Maintenance and Alignments
Platinum VAX-C Series
Table 5-3
DAB Test Equipment
Equipment Type
Spectrum Analyzer
Network Analyzer
Notch Filter
Manufacturer
R&S/Agilent
R&S/Agilent
Eagle
Oscilloscope
Multimeter
Tektronix
Fluke
Power Meter
R&S/Agilent
GPS Antenna
GPS Time Reference
Frequency
measurement
Panasonic
Harris
Agilent
Miscellaneous Test
Equipment
Reject Loads
Directional Coupler
Bridge
Notch Filter
Bird
Useful Adapters and
connectors
/Bird
Narda
Eagle
Eagle
Myat
Dielectric
Myat
5/9/13
Model Number
Options
FSU, FSP/ESA
ZVL-3/HP8753C,(D),(E), (ES)
TNF-210BFBF VHF RF notch
filter
TDS 3032
89 IV digital multimeter with
801-400 current probe
NRP-Z11/ HP436A, HP437B,
E44182B power meter with
E9300B sensor, 100 uW to 3 W
CCAH32ST01
Exciter
53131A or 53181A
010 high
stability time
base
015 range
extension to 1.5
GHz, OR
030 range
extension to 3.0
GHz
APM-16 wattmeter, with 1W to
1kW elements
RLB-150 RF bridge
TNF-210BFBF VHF RF notch
filter
3-1/8 inch to 4-1/16 inch
adaptor
3-1/8 inch to 4-1/16 inch
adaptor
3-1/8 inch to 6-1/8 inch adaptor
3-1/8 inch to type N adaptor
Harris Part
No.
(if applicable)
620-0457-000
700-1289-000
484-0300-000
620-2395-000
620-1928-000
620-2297-000
620-2859-000
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5-63
Section 5 Maintenance and Alignments
Table 5-3
Equipment Type
Adapters and
connectors
Attenuator
5-64
Platinum VAX-C Series
DAB Test Equipment
Manufacturer
Model Number
Options
Type N to BNC, male to female
Type N to BNC, female to male
BNC barrel, female to female
BNC barrel, male to male
SMA to BNC, male to female
SMA to N, male to female
SMB (push on) to BNC
SMC to BNC, screw on jack to
plug
BNC to TNC, jack to plug
BNC to TNC, jack to jack
TNC to N, plug to jack
TNC to N, jack to plug
10 dB attenuator, type N, male
to female
Harris Part
No.
(if applicable)
620-0128-000
620-0547-000
620-0604-000
620-0564-000
620-2611-000
620-2562-000
620-0628-000
620-2563-000
620-2821-000
620-2823-000
620-2824-000
620-2822-000
556-0074-000
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Platinum VAX-C Series
6
Section 6
Diagnostics
6.1
Introduction
This section contains diagnostic and troubleshooting information for the VAX-C series
VHF transmitter. Included is a complete description of all faults which can be displayed
via the transmitter front panel LCD, Web Interface or TCU (transmitter control unit
GUI (Graphical User Interface). Due to the complexity of the transmitter control system
and the extensive use of surface mount components, the scope of this diagnostics
section is to isolate the problems down to a PC board or module level which can then be
easily exchanged.
The buttons and icons used in the web browser use a color code system. Some examples
are given below.
a. Green with a 1 -
- ON and operating normally.
b. Green symbol -
- ON and operating normally.
c. Light Gray d. Yellow -
- "Grayed Out" - Not communicating or not available.
Warning - A non-critical sub-
system or parameter is out of tolerance and should be addressed by engineering
personnel.
e. Red - Critical Fault - This could be a sub-system fault in which the subsystem is muted or shut off (such as a PA module) or could be a system level fault
which could mute or shut the transmitter off.
When a fault occurs, one or more of the LED’s on the transmitter control panel will
illuminate red. To track down the cause of the fault, open the transmitter fault log via
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
6-1
Section 6 Diagnostics
Platinum VAX-C Series
web browser and see what faults have occurred and in what order. If you are not
familiar with web browser navigation, refer to Section 3.1 Transmitter Control and to
6.2 Web Browser Fault Log below.
The fault log on the LCD (in Status menu) will also give detailed fault information but
is smaller and will take longer to read, as it only shows 4 faults per page. If the fault
information is more than 11 characters, the description will be truncated. If this occurs
refer to the web browser for complete fault description. Fault log information is stored
on EEPROM, thus it will be retained if power is cycled.
6.2
Web Browser Fault Log
The web browser allows access to listings of any faults or warnings that have occurred.
The VAX-C fault log is accessed by pressing the Fault Log soft button on the right side
of the VAX-C Exciter Home screen. This will bring up the VAX-C Fault Log - All
Faults screen. The fault logs give the following information:
a. Order - The VAX-C fault log stores up to 500 entries, after which, faults are
deleted on a FIFO basis. The last fifty faults can be viewed in the VAX-C fault
log. The entire fault log including older faults can be viewed or exported via the
web browser by navigating to the VAX-C Status screen and pressing Export FltLog.
b. Set - Time (24 hour format) and date (month, day, year) that the fault occurred.
c. Clear - Time and date that the fault was cleared. If the fault is still active, the Clear
field will be blank.
d. Name - Name and description of the fault.
The Fault Log is color coded as follows:
•
•
•
Grey – Inactive Faults/Warnings
Yellow – Active Warnings
Red – Active Faults
Function Buttons:
a. Reset Log (VAX-C) - Erases all inactive faults in the log.
b. Active Faults (VAX-C) - Lists only active faults.
6-2
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Platinum VAX-C Series
Section 6 Diagnostics
NOTE:
Tables 6-1 and 6-2 list VAX-C transmitter faults. They also give a brief description of each fault, the trip point and the transmitter action to take in response to
the fault.
Figure 6-1 on left - All Faults Log Screen
5/9/13
on right - Active Faults Log Screen
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
6-3
Platinum VAX-C Series
Section 6 Diagnostics
6.3
Fault Tables
The following tables provide a listing of VAX-C Transmitter faults along with a brief
description, the fault level or threshold and the action taken by the transmitter.
Table 6-1
UDC Faults
Nominal Value/
Scaling
Trip Level
Mute LED red.
System and Mute
LEDs red.
1000mV +/100mV, detector
referenced to mixer
input level.
900mV NOTE: Test tone levels have
not been characterized for any special
considerations. Indicated levels are for
normal modulation.
Indicates up/down converter
LO level is out of range high
System and Mute
LEDs red.
1000mV +/100mV, detector
referenced to mixer
input level.
> 1100mV NOTE: Test Tone levels
have not been characterized for any
special considerations. Indicated
levels are for normal modulation.
Upconvertor
LO level
Indicates up/down converter
LO level is out of range low
System and Mute
LEDs red.
0dBm
LO level < -5.6dBm
Upconvertor
LO level high
U converter LO level high
warning
System LED
orange.
LO Level Input
should be 0dBm
LO level > -5.4dBm
Fault Log
Message
Fault Description
Front Panel LEDs
Upconverter IF
level
Indicates up/down converter
IF level is out of range low
Upconverter IF
level
Table 6-2
MODFPGA Faults
Fault Log
Message
Fault Description
Front Panel LEDs
Nominal Value/
Scaling
Trip Level
Modulator Not
Alive
Indicates MOD FPGA is in
known good state
System and Mute
LEDs red.
Data pattern written/
read over HPI matches
Data pattern written/read
over HPI does not match
Modulator
Temperature
Fault
Indicates MOD FPGA is
over temperature
System and Mute
LEDs red.
Over temperature less
than 4 times. 85 C
limit.
Over temperature 4 times
(no time limit). 85 C limit
Modulator DAC
Clock
Indicates DAC clock is
present in MOD FPGA
System and Mute
LEDs red.
DAC clock detected
DAC clock is not detected
Modulator
Sample Clock
Indicates MOD clock is
present in MOD FPGA
System and Mute
LEDs red.
Modulator sample
clock and 10 MHz
internal clock edges are
both detected
Either modulator sample
clock or 10 MHz internal
clock edges are not detected
Modulator 4X
Sample Clock
Indicates MOD clock x4 is
present in MOD FPGA
System and Mute
LEDs red.
Modulator 4 x sample
clock edges are
detected
Modulator 4 x sample clock
edges are not detected
6-4
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Section 6 Diagnostics
Platinum VAX-C Series
Table 6-2
MODFPGA Faults
Fault Log
Message
Fault Description
Front Panel LEDs
Nominal Value/
Scaling
Trip Level
Modulator
25MHz Clock
Indicates 25 MHz clock is
present in MOD FPGA
System and Mute
LEDs red.
25 MHz clock edges
are detected
25 MHz clock edges are not
detected
Modulator
54MHz Clock
Indicates 54 MHz clock is
present in MOD FPGA
System and Mute
LEDs red.
54 MHz clock edges
are detected
54 MHz clock edges are not
detected
Modulator User
Force Mute
Indicates user has forced
mute from GUI
System and Mute
LEDs red.
Mute not selected on
GUI
Mute selected on GUI
Table 6-3
Fault Log Message
MODFPGA Modulation Specific Faults
Fault Description
Front Panel LEDs
Nominal Value/
Scaling
Trip Level
DVB (modulation specific)
ASI 1 HP
Indicates error on
ASI 1 HP in MOD
FPGA for DVB
System LED red.
No errors
Input present:
Uncorrected byte errors,
Corrected byte errors,
Buffer overflow,
MIP errors ((CRC error OR MIP
missing) AND (SFN or MFN AND
MIP control))
Input not present:
ERRW_MODFPGA_PRBS_ON
=false
ASI 1 LP
Indicates error on
ASI 1 LP in MOD
FPGA for DVB
System LED red.
No errors
Input present:
Uncorrected byte errors,
Corrected byte errors,
Buffer overflow
Input not present:
Hierarchy mode AND
ERRW_MODFPGA_PRBS_ON
=false
ASI 2 HP
Indicates error on
ASI 2 HP in MOD
FPGA for DVB
System LED red.
No errors
Input present:
Uncorrected byte errors,
Corrected byte errors,
Buffer overflow,
MIP errors ((CRC error OR MIP
missing) AND (SFN or MFN AND
MIP control))
Input not present:
ERRW_MODFPGA_PRBS_ON
=false
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
6-5
Platinum VAX-C Series
Section 6 Diagnostics
Table 6-3
MODFPGA Modulation Specific Faults
Fault Log Message
Fault Description
Front Panel LEDs
Nominal Value/
Scaling
ASI 2 LP
Error on ASI 2 LP
in MOD FPGA for
DVB
System LED red.
No errors
Input present:
Uncorrected byte errors,
Corrected byte errors,
Buffer overflow
Input not present:
Hierarchy mode AND
ERRW_MODFPGA_PRBS_ON
=false
Modulator Illegal
Config Mute
Indicates illegal
DVB configuration
parameters in
MOD FPGA
System and Mute
LEDs red.
DVB
configuration
parameters valid
DVB-T:
MFN mode:
8k FFT AND 8k interleaver,
MIP control AND MIP bad AND
no_mip_no_mute = false
SFN mode:
MIP bad,
8k FFT and 8k interleaver,
Storage time < 0.5 us
Modulator Illegal FFT/
Interleaver
Indicates illegal
combination of 8k
FFT and 8k
interleaver in DVB
System LED red.
FFT size of 8k is
not used with 8k
interleaver mode
FFT size of 8k is set with 8k
interleaver mode AND
ERRF_MODFPGA_CONFIG_MUT
E = true
Modulator DVB
Storage Time < .5
Indicates input
storage time too
low in DVB SFN
mode
System LED red.
Storage time > 0.5
us
Storage time <0.5 us AND
ERRF_MODFPGA_CONFIG_MUT
E = true
Modulator DVB MIP
Packet Error
Indicates required
MIP packet is bad
in DVB
System LED red.
MIP packet is
good
MIP packet bad on selected input
AND
ERRF_MODFPGA_CONFIG_MUT
E = true
Modulator Input Frame
Timing Unsync
Indicates input
circuit has not
synchronized in
DVB MOD FPGA
System and Mute
LEDs red.
DVB MOD FPGA
output processing
reset line low
DVB MOD FPGA output processing
reset line high
Modulator Input A
Indicates input A
is present in MOD
FPGA. ATSC ASI
HPA
System LED red.
TS Input LED
yellow or red.
MPEG sync
indicator = 1
MPEG sync indicator = 0
AND
input A selected for primary or
auxiliary input
Modulator Input C
Indicates input C
is present in MOD
FPGA. ATSC ASI
LPB
System LED red.
TS Input LED
yellow or red.
MPEG sync
indicator = 1
MPEG sync indicator = 0
AND
input C selected for primary or
auxiliary input
Modulator Input B
Indicates input B
is present in MOD
FPGA. ATSC
SMPTE A
System LED red.
TS Input LED
yellow or red.
MPEG sync
indicator = 1
MPEG sync indicator = 0
AND
input B selected for primary or
auxiliary input
6-6
Trip Level
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Section 6 Diagnostics
Platinum VAX-C Series
Table 6-3
MODFPGA Modulation Specific Faults
Nominal Value/
Scaling
Trip Level
Fault Log Message
Fault Description
Front Panel LEDs
Modulator Input D
Indicates input D
is present in MOD
FPGA. ATSC
SMPTE B
System LED red.
TS Input LED
yellow or red.
MPEG sync
indicator = 1
MPEG sync indicator = 0
AND
input D selected for primary or
auxiliary input
Modulator Input Signal
Loss
Indicates required
inputs are not
present in MOD
FPGA.
System and Mute
LEDs red.
Depends on
modulation
standard. Relevant
inputs present.
DVB-T:
SFN mode AND hierarchy :
Auto switch mode: HP or LP bad on
both ASI 1 and ASI 2,
Manual switch mode: HP or LP bad
on selected input,
SFN mode AND non-hierarchy:
Auto switch mode: HP bad on both
inputs,
Manual switch mode: HP bad on
selected input
Modulation Mute
Indicates
modulator FPGA
has muted
System and Mute
LEDs red.
Depends on
modulation
standard.
Modulator not
muted, other
conditions ok
DVB-T:
Mute bit set in MOD FPGA
ASI1 HP Rate
Overflow/Underflow
Indicates overflow
or underflow on
ASI 1 HP in MOD
FPGA for DVB
System LED red
(overflow bit in
DDR1. Reg 15 bit
15 = 0) AND
(underflow bit in
DDR1. Reg 15 bit
13 = 0)
(overflow bit in DDR1. Reg 15 bit
15 = 1) OR (underflow bit in DDR1.
Reg 15 bit 13 = 1)
ASI1 LP Rate
Overflow/Underflow
Indicates overflow
or underflow on
ASI 1 LP in MOD
FPGA for DVB
System LED red
(overflow bit in
DDR1. Reg 15 bit
14 = 0) AND
(underflow bit in
DDR1. Reg 15 bit
12 = 0)
Hierarchy mode, (overflow bit in
DDR1. Reg 15 bit 14 = 1) OR
(underflow bit in DDR1. Reg 15 bit
12 = 1)
ASI2 HP Rate
Overflow/Underflow
Indicates overflow
or underflow on
ASI 2 HP in MOD
FPGA for DVB
System LED red
(overflow bit in
DDR2. Reg 15 bit
11 = 0) AND
(underflow bit in
DDR1. Reg 15 bit
9 = 0)
(overflow bit in DDR2. Reg 15 bit
11 = 1) OR (underflow bit in DDR2.
Reg 15 bit 9 = 1)
ASI2 LP Rate
Overflow/Underflow
Indicates overflow
or underflow on
ASI 2 LP in MOD
FPGA for DVB
System LED red
(overflow bit in
DDR2. Reg 15 bit
10 = 0) AND
(underflow bit in
DDR1. Reg 15 bit
8 = 0)
Hierarchy mode, (overflow bit in
DDR2. Reg 15 bit 10 = 1) OR
(underflow bit in DDR2. Reg 15 bit
8 = 1)
DAB (modulation specific)
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
6-7
Platinum VAX-C Series
Section 6 Diagnostics
Table 6-3
MODFPGA Modulation Specific Faults
Nominal Value/
Scaling
Trip Level
System LED red.
Timestamp is
present
Input is present, but timestamp is
missing on input 1
Indicates
timestamp is
missing on valid
input 2
System LED red.
Timestamp is
present
Input is present, but timestamp is
missing on input 2
Modulator PFRU
Undisciplined
Indicates PFRU
PLL is not
disciplined for
DAB
System LED red.
PFRU PLL is
disciplined
PLL is undisciplined AND dynamic
delay on AND PLL bypass off
Modulator Unresolved ETI
Timing
Indicates ETI timing
unresolved
System LED red.
Current input =
correct input
Current input = wrong input
DAB: ETI Missing
DAB ETI input
missing
System LED
orange.
ETI input 1 and 2
present
ETI input 1 OR ETI input 2 missing
DAB: Seamless Not
Possible
DAB Seamless
switching not
possible
System LED
orange.
Total delay of
input 1 and 2 are
equal,
Status of input 1
and 2 are equal
(total delay of input 1 and 2 are not
equal) OR
dynamic delay mode on AND (input
status 1 and 2 are not equal)
Modulator Input Signal
Loss
Indicates required
inputs are not
present in MOD
FPGA.
System and Mute
LEDs red.
Depends on
modulation
standard. Relevant
inputs present.
DAB:
Modulation Mute
Indicates
modulator FPGA
has muted
System and Mute
LEDs red.
Depends on
modulation
standard.
Modulator not
muted, other
conditions ok
DAB:
Software initiated on reset,
Mute bit set in MOD FPGA
Fault Log Message
Fault Description
Front Panel LEDs
Modulator No
Timestamp (FF FFFF)
Indicates
timestamp is
missing on valid
input 1
Modulator No
Timestamp (FF FFFF)
CTTB/CMMB (modulation specific)
Modulator Input A
Indicates input A
is present in MOD
FPGA. ATSC ASI
HPA
System LED red.
TS Input LED
yellow or red.
MPEG sync
indicator = 1
MPEG sync indicator = 0
AND
input A selected for primary or
auxiliary input
Modulator Input C
Indicates input C
is present in MOD
FPGA. ATSC ASI
LPB
System LED red.
TS Input LED
yellow or red.
MPEG sync
indicator = 1
MPEG sync indicator = 0
AND
input C selected for primary or
auxiliary input
Modulator Input B
Indicates input B
is present in MOD
FPGA. ATSC
SMPTE A
System LED red.
TS Input LED
yellow or red.
MPEG sync
indicator = 1
MPEG sync indicator = 0
AND
input B selected for primary or
auxiliary input
6-8
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Section 6 Diagnostics
Platinum VAX-C Series
Table 6-3
MODFPGA Modulation Specific Faults
Nominal Value/
Scaling
Trip Level
Fault Log Message
Fault Description
Front Panel LEDs
Modulator Input D
Indicates input D
is present in MOD
FPGA. ATSC
SMPTE B
System LED red.
TS Input LED
yellow or red.
MPEG sync
indicator = 1
MPEG sync indicator = 0
AND
input D selected for primary or
auxiliary input
Modulator Input Signal
Loss
Indicates required
inputs are not
present in MOD
FPGA.
System and Mute
LEDs red.
Depends on
modulation
standard. Relevant
inputs present.
CTTB:
SFN mode AND unmute_nosip =
false AND selected input not present
Modulation Mute
Indicates
modulator FPGA
has muted
System and Mute
LEDs red.
Depends on
modulation
standard.
Modulator not
muted, other
conditions ok
CTTB:
ATSC (modulation specific)
Modulator Input A
Indicates input A
is present in MOD
FPGA. ATSC ASI
HPA
System LED red.
TS Input LED
yellow or red.
MPEG sync
indicator = 1
MPEG sync indicator = 0
AND
input A selected for primary or
auxiliary input
Modulator Input C
Indicates input C
is present in MOD
FPGA. ATSC ASI
LPB
System LED red.
TS Input LED
yellow or red.
MPEG sync
indicator = 1
MPEG sync indicator = 0
AND
input C selected for primary or
auxiliary input
Modulator Input B
Indicates input B
is present in MOD
FPGA. ATSC
SMPTE A
System LED red.
TS Input LED
yellow or red.
MPEG sync
indicator = 1
MPEG sync indicator = 0
AND
input B selected for primary or
auxiliary input
Modulator Input D
Indicates input D
is present in MOD
FPGA. ATSC
SMPTE B
System LED red.
TS Input LED
yellow or red.
MPEG sync
indicator = 1
MPEG sync indicator = 0
AND
input D selected for primary or
auxiliary input
Modulator Input Signal
Loss
Indicates required
inputs are not
present in MOD
FPGA.
System and Mute
LEDs red.
Depends on
modulation
standard. Relevant
inputs present.
ATSC:
Modulation Mute
Indicates
modulator FPGA
has muted
System and Mute
LEDs red.
Depends on
modulation
standard.
Modulator not
muted, other
conditions ok
ATSC:
System LED red.
TS Input LED
yellow or red.
MPEG sync
indicator = 1
MPEG sync indicator = 0
AND
input A selected for primary or
auxiliary input
ISDB-T (modulation specific)
Modulator Input A
5/9/13
Indicates input A
is present in MOD
FPGA. ATSC ASI
HPA
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
6-9
Platinum VAX-C Series
Section 6 Diagnostics
Table 6-3
MODFPGA Modulation Specific Faults
Nominal Value/
Scaling
Trip Level
Fault Log Message
Fault Description
Front Panel LEDs
Modulator Input C
Indicates input C
is present in MOD
FPGA. ATSC ASI
LPB
System LED red.
TS Input LED
yellow or red.
MPEG sync
indicator = 1
MPEG sync indicator = 0
AND
input C selected for primary or
auxiliary input
Modulator Input B
Indicates input B
is present in MOD
FPGA. ATSC
SMPTE A
System LED red.
TS Input LED
yellow or red.
MPEG sync
indicator = 1
MPEG sync indicator = 0
AND
input B selected for primary or
auxiliary input
Modulator Input D
Indicates input D
is present in MOD
FPGA. ATSC
SMPTE B
System LED red.
TS Input LED
yellow or red.
MPEG sync
indicator = 1
MPEG sync indicator = 0
AND
input D selected for primary or
auxiliary input
Modulator Input Signal
Loss
Indicates required
inputs are not
present in MOD
FPGA.
System and Mute
LEDs red.
Depends on
modulation
standard. Relevant
inputs present.
ISDB-T:
Modulation Mute
Indicates
modulator FPGA
has muted
System and Mute
LEDs red.
Depends on
modulation
standard.
Modulator not
muted, other
conditions ok
ISDB-T:
Table 6-4
Fault Log
Message
EXT I/O & DUC Faults
Nominal Value/
Scaling
Trip Level
System LED red.
Data pattern
written/read over
SPI matches
Data pattern written/read over
SPI does not match AND Initial
check did match
System and Mute
LEDs red.
Data pattern
written/read over
HPI matches
Data pattern written/read over
HPI does not match
Fault Description
Front Panel LEDs
Indicates external input
option board is in known
good state
Indicates digital
upconverter FPGA is in
known good state
EXT I/O
External IO
Not Alive
DUC
Digital
Upconvertor
Not Alive
6-10
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Section 6 Diagnostics
Platinum VAX-C Series
Table 6-4
EXT I/O & DUC Faults
Nominal Value/
Scaling
Fault Log
Message
Fault Description
Front Panel LEDs
Digital
Upconvertor
Temperature
Indicates digital
upconverter FPGA is over
temperature
System and Mute
LEDs red.
Over temperature
less than 4 times. 85
C limit.
Over temperature 4 times (no
time limit). 85 C limit
Digital
Upconvertor
Input Signal
Zero
DUC input signal level is
very low
System and Mute
LEDs red.
RMS of signal
greater than 0.1
(full scale = +/- 1.0)
RMS of signal less than 0.1
(full scale = +/- 1.0) 5 times in
a row (1 second interval)
Digital
Upconvertor
Temperature
Warning
DUC FPGA Temperature
over limit
VAX: System LED
orange.
DUC FPGA
temperature less
than 80 degrees C
(DUC FPGA over 80 C OR
Temperature reading error)
AND
ERRF_DUC_FPGA_TEMP =
false
Table 6-5
Trip Level
DSP Faults
Front Panel
LEDs
Nominal Value/
Scaling
Trip Level
DSP reports HPF feedback invalid
(required for linear RTAC)
System LED red.
DSP reports HPF
feedback ok.
DSP reports HPF
feedback invalid.
Adaptive Correction
Nonlinear
DSP reports HPA feedback
invalid (required for non-linear
RTAC)
System LED red.
DSP reports HPA
feedback ok.
DSP reports HPA
feedback invalid.
Adaptive Correction
Linear RF Level High
RF attenuator level is too high for
linear
System LED red.
RF attenuator
level < 10%
RF attenuator level
> 104%
Adaptive Correction
Nonlinear RF Level
High
RF attenuator level is too high for
non-linear
System LED red.
RF attenuator
level < 10%
RF attenuator level
> 104%
Adaptive Correction
Linear RF Level Low
RF attenuator level is too low for
linear
System LED
orange.
RF attenuator
level > 10%
RF attenuator level
< 10%
Adaptive Correction
Nonlinear RF Level
Low
RF attenuator level is too low for
non-linear
System LED
orange.
RF attenuator
level > 10%
RF attenuator level
< 10%
Fault Log Message
Fault Description
Adaptive Correction
Linear
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
6-11
Platinum VAX-C Series
Section 6 Diagnostics
Table 6-6
PFRU Faults
Fault Log Message
Fault Description
Front Panel
LEDs
Nominal Value/
Scaling
Trip Level
Frequency Ref. Not
Alive
Indicates PFRU is in known
good state
System and
Mute LEDs red.
Data pattern written/
read over HPI
matches and board
ID is correct
Data pattern written/
read over HPI does not
match or board ID is
not correct
Frequency Ref.
External 1PPS
External 1 pps is not present
when it is required
System and
Mute LEDs red.
External 1pps
present
SFN mode and external
1pps not present when
selected as reference
Frequency Ref.
External 10MHz
External 10 MHz is not present
when it is required
System and
Mute LEDs red.
External 10 MHz
present
SFN mode and external
10 MHz not present
when selected as
reference
Frequency Ref. GPS
1PPS
1pps from internal GPS is not
present when it is required
System and
Mute LEDs red.
1pps from internal
GPS present
SFN mode and 1pps
from internal GPS not
present when selected
as reference
Frequency Ref. IF LO
PLL Not Locked
PFRU DAC PLL lock state
System and
Mute LEDs red.
DAC PLL lock bit
from PFRU FPGA
set
DAC PLL lock bit from
PFRU FPGA not set
Frequency Ref. RF
LO PLL Not Locked
PFRU RF PLL lock state
System and
Mute LEDs red.
RF PLL lock bit
from PFRU FPGA
set
RF PLL lock bit from
PFRU FPGA not set
Frequency Ref. PLL
Undisciplined
Selected reference for 10 MHz
OCXO missing in DAB mode
System and
Mute LEDs red.
Reference present
SFN mode and selected
reference not present
Frequency Ref. 1PPS
External 1 pps is not present
System LED
orange.
External 1pps
present
External 1pps not
present when selected
as reference
Frequency Ref.
10MHz
External 10 MHz is not present
System LED
orange.
External 10 MHz
present
External 10 MHz not
present when selected
as reference
Frequency Ref. GPS
1PPS
1pps from internal GPS is not
present
System LED
orange.
1pps from internal
GPS present
1pps from internal GPS
not present when
selected as reference
Frequency Ref. PLL
Undisciplined
Selected reference for 10 MHz
OCXO missing in DAB mode
System LED
orange.
Reference present
Selected reference not
present
6-12
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Section 6 Diagnostics
Platinum VAX-C Series
Table 6-7
MCU & SYS Faults
Fault Description
Front Panel LEDs
Nominal Value/
Scaling
Trip Level
Warning when number of
copies of application code is
exceeded
System LED orange.
Copies < 105
Copies > 105
SYSTEM +1.4VDC
Fault if over voltage
System LED red.
+1.4 V DC
10% above nominal
SYSTEM +1.4VDC
Fault if under voltage
System LED red.
+1.4 V DC
10% below nominal
SYSTEM +3.3VDC
Fault if over voltage
System LED red.
+3.3 V DC
10% above nominal
SYSTEM +3.3VDC
Fault if under voltage
System LED red.
+3.3 V DC
20% below nominal
SYSTEM +5VDC
Fault if over voltage
System LED red.
+5 V DC
10% above nominal
SYSTEM +5VDC
Fault if under voltage
System LED red.
+5 V DC
20% below nominal
SYSTEM +12VDC
Fault if over voltage
System and Mute LEDs
red.
+12 V DC
10% above nominal
SYSTEM +12VDC
Fault if under voltage
System and Mute LEDs
red.
+12 V DC
10% below nominal
SYSTEM +24VDC
Fault if over voltage
System and Mute LEDs
red.
+24 V DC
10% above nominal
SYSTEM +24VDC
Fault if under voltage
System and Mute LEDs
red.
+24 V DC
10% below nominal
SYSTEM
-12VDC
Fault if over voltage
System and Mute LEDs
red.
-12 V DC
< -14.4 V
SYSTEM
-12VDC
Fault if under voltage
System and Mute LEDs
red.
-12 V DC
> -10.8 V
System Battery Pack
Fault if over voltage
System LED red.
+12 V DC
10% above nominal
System Battery Pack
Fault if under voltage
System LED red.
+12 V DC
20% below nominal
SYSTEM Fan Tach
below minimum RPM
Fan tach low for fan 1
System and Drive
Chain LED red.
2400 rpm
< 2400 rpm
SYSTEM Fan Tach
below minimum RPM
Fan tach low for fan 2
System and Drive
Chain LED red.
2400 rpm
< 2400 rpm
SYSTEM DVBT MIP
is not OK
DVB-T mode MIP packet
missing
System and Mute LEDs
red.
MIP packet present
MIP packet missing
and DVB-T SFN
mode and Unmute
On MIP Bad = False
System Hardware Key
Invalid
SHA Hardware key
authentication fail
System and Mute LEDs
red.
Fault Log Message
MCU
Main Control
application update
count near limit.
SYS
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
6-13
Platinum VAX-C Series
Section 6 Diagnostics
Table 6-7
MCU & SYS Faults
Nominal Value/
Scaling
Trip Level
All status LEDs red.
Modulation type read
from modulator
FPGA matches
feature key
Modulation type read
from modulator
FPGA does not
match feature key
System is VAX or VAX, but
feature key is not correct
All status LEDs red.
System is VAX or
VAX, and feature key
is correct
Micron Front Panel
detected, but VAX or
VAX is not enabled
in feature key.
SYSTEM FP FPGA
programming error
System is VAX, but front
panel is not programmed
All LEDs orange.
Front panel is
programmed
System is VAX, but
front panel
programming fails.
This is a UAX/VAX
specific fault.
SYSTEM AC Loss.
UPS Active
SYSTEM AC Loss. UPS
Active
System and Mute LEDs
red.
System Max FWD
Power Exceeded
System Forward Power has
exceeded Max Forward Power
setting
System LED red.
Forward Power
Threshold setting <=
Forward power <=
Max Forward Power
setting
Forward Power >
Max Forward Power
setting
System Fwd Power
Below Alarm Level
System Forward Power is
below Alarm Setting
System LED red.
Forward Power
Threshold setting <=
Forward power <=
Max Forward Power
setting
Forward Power <
FWD LOW PWR
ALARM setting
System VSWR
Software generated VSWR
fault
System LED red. Mute
LED red.
Nominal Range for
VSWR is scaled by F/
B Threshold user
setting, settable from
1-4%. This equates to
approximately a 1.2:1
to 1.5:1 VSWR range
Trip point is set by
user: F/B Trip Level,
settable from 5-10%
50W not supported by
Amp Ctrl Rev A.0
Orion - Amp Control Rev A.0
doesn't support 50W
System LED red. Mute
LED red.
VAX50-C must run
on Amp Controller
Board Rev A.1 or
higher
VAX50-C and Amp
Control Board Rev
A.0
SYSTEM +12VDC
Battery
Fault if over voltage
System LED orange.
+12 V DC
8% above nominal
SYSTEM +12VDC
Battery
Fault if under voltage
System LED orange.
+12 V DC
18% below nominal
SYSTEM Fan Tach
below minimum RPM
Fan tach low for fan 1
System and Drive
Chain LED orange.
Between 2880 rpm
and 23040 rpm
(2400 rpm < fan tach
< 2880 rpm) OR (fan
tach > 23040 rpm)
SYSTEM Fan Tach
below minimum RPM
Fan tach low for fan 2
System and Drive
Chain LED orange.
Between 2880 rpm
and 23040 rpm
(2400 rpm < fan tach
< 2880 rpm) OR (fan
tach > 23040 rpm)
Fault Log Message
Fault Description
Front Panel LEDs
SYSTEM Feature Key
does not allow
modulation
Modulation does not match
feature key
SYSTEM Feature Key
does not allow UAX/
VAX
6-14
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Section 6 Diagnostics
Platinum VAX-C Series
Table 6-7
MCU & SYS Faults
Fault Log Message
Fault Description
Front Panel LEDs
Nominal Value/
Scaling
Trip Level
SYSTEM Foldback
active
Power fold back warning
System LED orange.
Power foldback = 0
Power foldback > 0
SYSTEM Temporary
Feature Key Installed
Test Feature enabled in
Feature Key. Feature Key
will last for 24 hours, when 24
hrs elapses, Invalid
Modulation Feature Fault will
be activated.
System LED orange.
Test Feature disabled
in Feature Key
Test Feature enabled
in Feature Key.
SYSTEM Slave mode
when TCU not present
Micron System is in slave
mode and no TCU presence is
detected.
System LED orange.
Micron System is in
Master Mode, or
system is in Slave
Mode and TCU
presence detected.
System is in Slave
Mode, and TCU
Present command not
asserted on Pin 19 of
the Top 25 pin
Connector on the
VAX-C.
This is a UAX/VAX
specific fault.
SYSTEM in Reduced
Power Mode
% of FWD Power Reference
setting < 100%
System LED orange.
% of FWD Power
Reference = 100%
% of FWD Power
Reference setting <
100%
This is a UAX/VAX
specific fault.
6.3.1
Table 6-8
PA Faults
PA Faults
Fault Log Message
Fault Description
Front Panel LEDs
Nominal Value/
Scaling
Trip Level
RF Output Level exceeding
+6dBm
RF Output Level fault
Drive Chain LED
red.
RF Output ADC
<=2125 (+6dBm)
RF Output ADC > 2125
(+6dBm)
Amp Ctrl Driver Current
Fault
Amp Controller Driver
Current Fault
Drive Chain LED
red.
200mA - 450mA
< 175mA or > 500mA
Amp Ctrl PS Fault
45V Power Supply
Fault
Drive Chain LED
red.
43V - 47V
> 40V
Amp Ctrl PA FET 1 Bias
Fault
50V Current 1 Fault
Drive Chain LED
red.
25W Amp: >= 300mA
50W Amp: >= 425mA
25W Amp: < 250mA
50W Amp: < 375mA
Amp Ctrl PA FET 2 Bias
Fault
50V Current 2 Fault
Drive Chain LED
red.
25W Amp: >= 300mA
50W Amp: >= 425mA
25W Amp: < 250mA
50W Amp < 375mA
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
6-15
Platinum VAX-C Series
Section 6 Diagnostics
Table 6-8
PA Faults
Nominal Value/
Scaling
Trip Level
Fault Log Message
Fault Description
Front Panel LEDs
PA Thermal Shutdown
PA Hardware Thermal
Shutdown Fault
Drive Chain LED
red.
< 80.0 C
Approximately 86 C trip
point
PA Overvoltage Fault
PA Overvoltage Fault
Drive Chain LED
red.
43-47V
51V trip point
PA FET 1 Overcurrent Fault
PA Overcurrent Fault
on FET 1
Drive Chain LED
red.
25W Amp: < 2A
50W Amp: < 5A
25W Amp: 2A trip point
50W Amp: 5A trip point
PA FET 2 Overcurrent Fault
PA Overcurrent Fault
on FET 2
Drive Chain LED
red.
25W Amp: < 2A
50W Amp: < 5A
25W Amp: 2A trip point
50W Amp: 5A trip point
PA VSWR Fault
PA VSWR Fault
Drive Chain LED
red.
Nominal Range for
VSWR is scaled by F/
B Threshold user
setting, settable from
1-4%. This equates to
approximately a 1.2:1
to 1.5:1 VSWR range
10dB down from full power,
or approx a 2:1 VSWR
PA Temperature Fault
S/W PA Temperature
fault
Drive Chain LED
red.
PA 1 and PA 2 Temp <
80.0 C
Fault declared when PA 1 or
PA 2 Temp >= 85.0 C. Fault
clears when both PA 1 and PA
2 Temperature <= 75.0 C
RF Input Level Low Fault
RF Input Level Low
Fault
Drive Chain LED
red.
GFX: -2dBm +/-1dBm
Cabinet Controller:
0dBm +2/-3dBm
GFX: RF Level In < -4dBm
Cabinet Controller:
RF Level In < -6dBm
Low RF Gain Fault
RF Gain Low Fault
Drive Chain LED
red.
During normal RF
ALC operations (TX
On, unmuted), PA
FWD PWR detector
should be >= 1000
Fault declared during normal
RF ALC operations if no
faults present on Amp
Control Board, and PA FWD
PWR Detector < 1000
Amp Ctrl Driver Current
Warning
Amp Controller Driver
Current Warning
Drive Chain LED
orange.
200mA - 450mA
175mA <= Driver Current <
200mA or 450 < Driver
Current <= 500mA
Amp Controller PS Warning
45V Power Supply
Warning
Drive Chain LED
orange.
43V - 47V
40V <= PS Voltage < 43V or
PS Voltage > 47V
Amp Controller PA FET 1
Bias Warning
50V Current 1 Warning
Drive Chain LED
orange.
25W Amp:
>= 300mA
50W Amp:
>= 425mA
25W Amp:
250mA <= Current < 300mA
50W Amp:
375mA <= Current < 425mA
Amp Controller PA FET 2
Bias Warning
50V Current 2 Warning
Drive Chain LED
orange.
25W Amp:
>= 300mA
50W Amp:
>= 425mA
25W Amp:
250mA <= Current < 300mA
50W Amp:
375mA <= Current < 425mA
6-16
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Section 6 Diagnostics
Platinum VAX-C Series
Table 6-8
PA Faults
Fault Log Message
Fault Description
Front Panel LEDs
Nominal Value/
Scaling
Trip Level
PA Temperature Warning
PA Temperature
Warning
Drive Chain LED
orange.
PA 1 and PA 2 Temp <
80.0 C
80.0 C <= PA 1 or PA 2 Temp
< 85.0 C
RF Input Level Low
Warning
RF Input Level Low
Drive Chain LED
orange.
GFX: -2dBm +/-1dBm
Cabinet Controller:
0dBm +2/-3dBm
GFX: -4dBm <= RF Level In
< -3dBm
Cabinet Controller:
-6dBm <= RF Level In < 3dBm
RF Input Level High
Warning
RF Input Level High
Drive Chain LED
orange.
GFX: -2dBm +/-1dBm
Cabinet Controller:
0dBm +2/-3dBm
GFX & Cabinet Controller:
RF Level In > 2dBm
5/9/13
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
6-17
Section 6 Diagnostics
6-18
Platinum VAX-C Series
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Platinum VAX-C Series
7
Section 7
Parts List
7.1
Replaceable Parts List
Table 7-1 FORMAT, XMTR, PLATINUM, VAX CC, 5W-250W - Table 7-2 KIT, 1 MIN UPS, 15 MIN HOLDOVER OPTION - - Table 7-3 KIT, ATSC OPTION - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Table 7-4 KIT, DVB T/H OPTION - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Table 7-5 KIT, MPH OPTION - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Table 7-6 KIT, CTTB OPTION - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Table 7-7 KIT, ISDB-TB OPTION - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Table 7-8 KIT, DVB T2 OPTION - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Table 7-9 VHF AMPLIFIER MODULE - - - - - - - - - - - - Table 7-10 PWA, BIII PA 881/E5600- - - - - - - - - - - - - - Table 7-11
PWA, BIII PA 881/E5600 SMT & BASIC THRU - Table 7-12 CABLE PACKAGE, PA COMPLETE- - - - - - - - Table 7-13 KIT, GPS ANT & CBL TNC TO SMA - - - - - - - - Table 7-14 ASSY, IPA, ASI OVER IP - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Table 7-15 ASSY, IPZ, ASI OVER IP - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Table 7-16 ASSY, SRD6800+, SAT RECEIVER, W/ASI IN - - - Table 7-17 ASSY, SRZ6800+, SAT RECEIVER, W/ASI IN - - - Table 7-18 XMTR, PLATINUM, BASIC, COMPACT CLASS VHF
Table 7-19 ASSY, ORION BASIC - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Table 7-20
ASSY, ORION FRONT PANEL - - - - - - - - - - Table 7-21 XMTR, VHF, COMMON ACCESSORIES - - - - - Table 7-22
*PWA, SIGNAL PROCESSOR - - - - - - - - - - Table 7-23 XMTR, PLATINUM, BASIC, COMPACT CLASS VHF
5/9/13
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
995 0337 001 ((C))
9710051012G (C1)
9710051037G (A)
9710051038G (A)
9710051039G (A)
9710051040G (A)
9710051041G (A)
9710051043G (B)
971 0051 050 (B)
901 0230 051 (B)
901 0230 052 (B)
952 9265 033 (B)
981 0090 094 (B)
9810126014G (C1)
9810126016G (B1)
9810126113G (A)
9810126115G (A)
981 0155 001 (A)
971 0051 001 (T)
943 5613 041 (B)
971 0077 001 (B)
9010215181G (H)
981 0155 002 (A)
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
7-2
7-2
7-2
7-2
7-3
7-3
7-3
7-3
7-3
7-3
7-4
7-6
7-6
7-6
7-6
7-6
7-6
7-7
7-7
7-8
7-8
7-8
7-9
7-1
Platinum VAX-C Series
Section 7 Parts List
Table 7-1 FORMAT, XMTR, PLATINUM, VAX CC, 5W-250W - 995 0337 001 ((C))
Harris PN
620 3014 000
628 0024 000
634 0424 000
646 1355 000
880 0068 001
943 5602 592
952 9265 036
952 9265 037
952 9265 038
952 9265 039
9710035030G
9710035031G
9710051011G
9710051012G
9710051032GT
9710051033G
9710051037G
9710051038G
9710051039G
9710051040G
9710051041G
9710051043G
971 0051 050
9810031023G
9810031027G
981 0090 094
9810126014G
9810126016G
9810126113G
9810126115G
981 0155 001
981 0155 002
9810274013G
9810274014G
988 2857 001
Description
Qty UM
Reference Designators
ADAPTER, SMA JACK-JACK BULKHEAD
0 EA
ADAPTER, 7/16-JACK TO N-JACK
0 EA
POWER METER
0 EA
NAMEPLATE, XMTR EQUIPMENT
0 EA
TP, UAX LPU/ UAC-C XMTR
0 DWG
BASIC 24RU
0 EA
CABLE, EXTERNAL
0 EA
CABLE, EXTERNAL
0 EA
CABLE, EXTERNAL
0 EA
CABLE, EXTERNAL
0 EA
KIT, GPS OPTION
0 EA
KIT, SFN OPTION
0 EA
ASM-POWER MODULE
0 EA
KIT, 1 MIN UPS, 15 MIN HOLDOVER OPTION
0 EA
ASSY, AC/DC CONVERTER (TESTED)
0 EA
KIT, ADJUSTABLE RACK RAILS
0 EA
KIT, ATSC OPTION
0 EA
KIT, DVB T/H OPTION
0 EA
KIT, MPH OPTION
0 EA
KIT, CTTB OPTION
0 EA
KIT, ISDB-TB OPTION
0 EA
KIT, DVB T2 OPTION
0 EA
VHF AMPLIFIER MODULE
1 EA
RACK, 37RU BASIC UAX
0 EA
KIT, 37RU, FRONT AIR PLENUM
0 EA
KIT, GPS ANT & CBL TNC TO SMA
0 EA
ASSY, IPA, ASI OVER IP
0 EA
ASSY, IPZ, ASI OVER IP
0 EA
ASSY, SRD6800+, SAT RECEIVER, W/ASI IN
0 EA
ASSY, SRZ6800+, SAT RECEIVER, W/ASI IN
0 EA
XMTR, PLATINUM, BASIC, COMPACT CLASS VHF 1 EA
XMTR, PLATINUM, BASIC, COMPACT CLASS VHF 0 EA
ASSY, DAB ETI INPUT OPTION, CC
0 EA
ASSY, DAB EDI/IP INPUT OPTION, CC
0 EA
DOC PACKAGE, PLATINUM VAX, COMPACT CLASS, ENGLISH1 EA
Table 7-2 KIT, 1 MIN UPS, 15 MIN HOLDOVER OPTION - 9710051012G (C1)
Harris PN
302 0803 006
660 0179 000
Description
SCREW, MACH M3-0.5 X 6 SEMS
BATT PK, CUSTOM, ITERNA 100304
Harris PN
861 1153 032
9710035014G
Description
SW/FW ATSC COMPLETE APP
ASM-SUB-BLANK PANEL B
Harris PN
861 1153 042
9710035014G
Description
SW/FW DVB COMPLETE APP
ASM-SUB-BLANK PANEL B
Qty UM
4 EA
1 EA
Reference Designators
Table 7-3 KIT, ATSC OPTION - 9710051037G (A)
Qty UM
0 DWG
1 EA
Reference Designators
Table 7-4 KIT, DVB T/H OPTION - 9710051038G (A)
7-2
Qty UM
0 DWG
1 EA
Reference Designators
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Section 7 Parts List
Platinum VAX-C Series
Table 7-5 KIT, MPH OPTION - 9710051039G (A)
Harris PN
861 1153 032
9710035014G
Description
SW/FW ATSC COMPLETE APP
ASM-SUB-BLANK PANEL B
Harris PN
861 1153 072
9710035014G
Description
SW/FW CTTB COMPLETE APP
ASM-SUB-BLANK PANEL B
Harris PN
861 1153 062
9710035014G
Description
SW/FW ISDB-T COMPLETE APP
ASM-SUB-BLANK PANEL B
Harris PN
302 0803 006
861 1153 082
9010215281G
9710035014G
Description
SCREW, MACH M3-0.5 X 6 SEMS
SW/FW DVB-T2 COMPLETE
*PWA, DVB-T2 FPGA EXPANSION
ASM-SUB-BLANK PANEL B
Harris PN
000 0000 010
055 0100 005
302 0803 001
302 0803 006
303 7103 008
315 0021 030
350 0114 000
380 0843 000
381 0075 000
408 0397 000
410 0490 025
626 0165 000
646 0665 000
901 0230 051
943 5613 101
943 5613 177
943 5613 178
943 5613 180
952 9265 033
Description
B/M NOTE:
*THERMAL COMPOUND, 8OZ JAR
SCREW, SEMS M2.5 X 8 SKT HD,SS
SCREW, MACH M3-0.5 X 6 SEMS
SCREW SKT HD CAP M3 X 8
LOCKWASHER, SPLIT M3 SST (DIN127)
RIVET 0.125 DIA, DOME HEAD, CLOSED END
N-MOSFET, BLF881 (SOT467C)
MOSFET,N-CHANNEL, MRFE6VP5600H
GASKET,EMI,11.8MM X 10.7MM, V
STANDOFF, HEX 25MM M3 M/F AL
RECP, N PANEL FLANGE JACK
LABEL, INSPECTION
PWA, BIII PA 881/E5600
BRACKET, PA MOUNTING
HEATSINK, VHF PA
AMPLIFIER COVER VHF
BRACKET, HEAT SINK MTG
CABLE PACKAGE, PA COMPLETE
Harris PN
000 0000 010
506 0245 000
518 0118 204
540 1600 101
540 1600 213
610 1401 040
801 0230 051
901 0230 052
Description
B/M NOTE:
CAP, 0.33UF 63VDC 5%
CAP, VAR 0.45-4PF 1000V RT ANG
RES 10 OHM 3W 5%
RES 330 OHM 3W 5%
HDR, 40C 2ROW VERTICAL (SYS 50)
SCH, BIII PA 881/E5600
PWA, BIII PA 881/E5600 SMT & BASIC THRU
Qty UM
0 DWG
1 EA
Reference Designators
Table 7-6 KIT, CTTB OPTION - 9710051040G (A)
Qty UM
0 DWG
1 EA
Reference Designators
Table 7-7 KIT, ISDB-TB OPTION - 9710051041G (A)
Qty UM
0 DWG
1 EA
Reference Designators
Table 7-8 KIT, DVB T2 OPTION - 9710051043G (B)
Qty UM
6 EA
0 DWG
1 EA
1 EA
Reference Designators
Table 7-9 VHF AMPLIFIER MODULE - 971 0051 050 (B)
Table 7-10
5/9/13
Qty UM
0 DWG
0 EA
9 EA
17 EA
2 EA
2 EA
4 EA
1 EA
1 EA
9.5 IN
7 EA
1 EA
1 EA
1 EA
1 EA
1 EA
1 EA
1 EA
1 EA
Reference Designators
Q1
Q2
J2
PWA, BIII PA 881/E5600 - 901 0230 051 (B)
Qty UM
0 DWG
2 EA
1 EA
2 EA
2 EA
1 EA
0 DWG
1 EA
Reference Designators
C27 C30
C28
R1 R2
R3 R4
J5
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
7-3
Platinum VAX-C Series
Section 7 Parts List
943 5567 060
943 5567 061
943 5567 320
943 5567 514
943 5567 928
INDUCTOR, SERIES
INDUCTOR, SHUNT
COIL, 1-1/2 TURNS
BALUN, BAND III
ASSY, COIL 1-1/2 TURNS
Table 7-11
1 EA
1 EA
1 EA
2 EA
1 EA
PWA, BIII PA 881/E5600 SMT & BASIC THRU - 901 0230 052 (B)
Harris PN
000 0000 010
358 2997 000
381 0029 000
383 0218 000
383 0277 001
383 0678 000
383 0817 000
383 0823 000
Description
B/M NOTE:
END PLATE, GREY (236)
N-MOSFET, 2N7002
IC, MIC1555 (SOT23-5)
IC LM4040CIM3-4.1
ESD
IC, INA168
IC AD8362
IC, 74LVC1G125
Qty UM
0 DWG
1 EA
1 EA
1 EA
1 EA
1 EA
2 EA
7 EA
383 0996 000
383 1021 000
383 1073 000
383 1270 000
385 0027 000
393 0081 000
393 0092 000
496 0088 015
496 0093 109
515 0040 000
515 0128 000
515 0136 417
515 0136 501
IC, AD8652AR
IC, AD7888
ESD
IC, TQP3M9009 (SOT-89)
IC, LT1963A-3.3 (SOT-223)
DIODE, SCHOTTKY, HSMS-2800
*CPLD, XC95144XL (TQFP-100)
EEPROM, AT25128A (SOIC-8)
IND CHIP 0.10UH 0805 10%
IND, AIR 22NH 2% 1812 SMT
*CAP 33PF 1206 C0G 50V 5%
*CAP 0.01UF 1206 X7R 100V 10%
*CAP 0.047UF 0805 X7R 100V 10%
*CAP 0.1UF 0805 X7R 50V 10%
2 EA
1 EA
1 EA
1 EA
2 EA
1 EA
1 EA
1 EA
1 EA
1 EA
1 EA
2 EA
10 EA
515 0137 501
*CAP 0.1UF 1206 X7R 50V 10%
6 EA
515 0138 501
515 0179 213
515 0180 317
515 0180 401
515 0180 501
CAP 0.1UF 1812 X7R 100V 10%
CAP 330PF 0603 C0G 50V 5%
CAP 4700PF 0603 X7R 50V 10%
CAP 0.01UF 0603 X7R 50V 10%
CAP 0.1UF 50V 10% X7R 0603
5 EA
2 EA
1 EA
2 EA
13 EA
515 0189 000
515 0197 000
515 0348 000
515 0430 000
CAP 22UF 1206 X5R 6.3V 20%
*CAP 1UF 25V 10% 0805 X5R
CAP 2.2UF 10% 100V X7R
CAP CER .1UF 0402 16V 10%
3 EA
1 EA
1 EA
32 EA
519 0167 023
519 0167 101
519 0167 103
519 0167 109
519 0167 115
519 0167 119
519 0176 223
CAP RF CHIP 8.2PF +-0.1PF 500V
CAP RF CHIP 10PF 2% 500V
CAP RF CHIP 12PF 2% 500V
CAP RF CHIP 22PF 2% 500V
CAP RF CHIP 39PF 2% 500V
CAP RF CHIP 56PF 2% 500V
CAP RF CHIP 820PF 2% 50V
1 EA
1 EA
1 EA
5 EA
1 EA
2 EA
4 EA
7-4
L1
L2
L6
Z1 Z2
L5
Reference Designators
TB1C
Q4
U8
CR1
U2
U3 U4
U10 U11 U12 U13 U16
U17 U18
U5 U6
U15
U1
U7
CR2 CR3
U9
U14
L4
L3
C43
C36
C94 C95
C44 C45 C46 C47 C48
C49 C50 C51 C88 C89
C16 C19 C24 C25 C26
C81
C17 C18 C97 C98 C99
C91 C92
C52
C100 C101
C1 C102 C103 C104 C105
C106 C107 C108 C109
C110 C111 C112 C113
C4 C5 C21
C40
C114
C15 C53 C54 C55 C56
C57 C58 C59 C60 C61
C62 C63 C64 C65 C66
C67 C68 C69 C70 C71
C72 C73 C74 C75 C76
C77 C78 C79 C80 C115
C116 C117
C12
C20
C31
C10 C11 C13 C14 C82
C93
C41 C42
C6 C7 C8 C9
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Section 7 Parts List
Platinum VAX-C Series
519 0202 111
519 0202 119
519 0208 102
523 0003 101
523 0070 210
523 0070 217
545 0308 301
545 0308 306
545 0308 323
545 0308 414
545 0308 510
545 0309 301
545 0309 408
545 0309 601
545 0309 999
545 0310 019
545 0310 307
545 0310 801
545 0310 925
545 0327 000
545 0331 201
545 0331 318
545 0331 523
545 0331 601
545 0331 999
545 0369 101
545 0369 109
545 0369 201
CAP RF CHIP 27PF 1% 250V
CAP RF CHIP 56PF 1% 250V
CAP RF CHIP 11PF 2% 500V
CAP 10UF 35V 20% SMT
CAP 220UF 63V 20% 105C LOW-Z
CAP 470UF 63V 20% 16MM 105C
RES 1K OHM 1% 1/8W 0805
RES 1.62K OHM 1% 1/8W 0805
RES 8.25K OHM 1% 1/8W 0805
RES 35.7K OHM 1% 1/8W 0805
RES 237K OHM 1% 1/8W 0805
RES 1K OHM 1% 1/4W 1206
RES 20K OHM 1% 1/4W 1206
RES 1M OHM 1% 1/4W 1206
RES 0 OHM JUMPER 1206
RES 5.62 OHM 1% 1W 2512
RES 1.82K OHM 1% 1W 2512
RES 0.010 OHM 1% 1W 2512
RES 0.500 OHM 1% 1W 2512
RES, 0.010 OHM 1W 1%
RES 100 OHM 1% 1/10W 0603
RES 5.11K OHM 1% 1/10W 0603
RES 825K OHM 1% 1/10W 0603
RES 1MEG OHM 1% 1/10W 0603
RES 0 OHM JUMPER 0603
RES 10 OHM 1% 1/16W 0402
RES 22.1 OHM 1% 1/16W 0402
RES 100 OHM 1% 1/16W 0402
1 EA
2 EA
4 EA
4 EA
1 EA
1 EA
2 EA
1 EA
2 EA
2 EA
1 EA
1 EA
1 EA
2 EA
1 EA
1 EA
4 EA
1 EA
4 EA
2 EA
3 EA
1 EA
2 EA
1 EA
2 EA
1 EA
2 EA
26 EA
545 0369 401
RES 10K OHM 1% 1/16W 0402
24 EA
545 0369 505
545 0369 999
551 0017 205
551 0017 401
559 0055 000
610 1070 000
610 1334 000
610 1401 040
611 0016 000
614 0790 000
620 3028 000
646 2110 000
801 0230 051
801 0230 053
RES 150K OHM 1% 1/16W 0402
RES 0 OHM JUMPER 0402
TRIMPOT 500 OHM 1/4W 4MM SQ
TRIMPOT 10K OHM 1/4W 4MM SQ
THERMISTOR, 50K OHM 5% 1206
HDR, 6C VERT 2ROW UNSHR
HDR, 3C VERT 1ROW 1-WALL
HDR, 40C 2ROW VERTICAL (SYS 50)
HEADER, 14C, 2MM, VERTICAL
TERM BLK, PCB, 1-POLE, GREY (236)
*RECP,MALE SMA PC MOUNT RT ANG
BARCODE, SN_ITEM_REV
SCH, BIII PA 881/E5600
PWB, BIII PA 881/E5600
1 EA
4 EA
4 EA
2 EA
4 EA
1 EA
1 EA
1 EA
1 EA
2 EA
3 EA
1 EA
0 DWG
1 EA
5/9/13
C37
C2 C3
C32 C33 C38 C39
C22 C23 C34 C35
C90
C29
R12 R24
R11
R25 R26
R30 R74
R10
R17
R19
R83 R84
R85
R73
R20 R21 R22 R23
R8
R6 R7 R15 R16
R9 R88
R27 R28 R29
R13
R77 R78
R60
R75 R76
R33
R14 R18
R34 R35 R36 R37 R38
R39 R40 R41 R42 R43
R44 R45 R46 R47 R48
R49 R50 R51 R52 R53
R54 R55 R56 R57 R58
R59
R61 R62 R63 R64 R65
R66 R67 R68 R69 R70
R71 R72 R100 R101 R102
R103 R110 R111 R112
R113 R120 R121 R122
R123
R5
R130 R131 R132 R133
R79 R80 R81 R82
R86 R87
RT1 RT2 RT3 RT4
J9
J7
J6
J8
TB1A,TB1B
J1 J3 J4
BARCODE
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
7-5
Platinum VAX-C Series
Section 7 Parts List
Table 7-12
Harris PN
843 5613 084
952 9265 002
952 9265 022
952 9265 023
CABLE PACKAGE, PA COMPLETE - 952 9265 033 (B)
Description
CABLE DIAGRAMS, ORION
CABLE PACKAGE, PA
CABLE #21
CABLE #22
Qty UM
0 DWG
1 EA
1 EA
1 EA
Reference Designators
Table 7-13 KIT, GPS ANT & CBL TNC TO SMA - 981 0090 094 (B)
Harris PN
742 0020 000
742 0171 000
917 2573 048
Description
ANTENNA, GPS PANASONIC CCAH32ST01
KIT, GPS ANT MOUNTING
CABLE, GPS 50 OHM TNC:SMA 100FT
Harris PN
735 0067 000
880 0274 006
9810126036G
Description
PWA, IPA6800+
TP, ASI OVER IP TEST INSTRUCTION
ASSY, CARRIER, IPA\IPZ6800+ CARD, UAX CC
Harris PN
735 0069 000
880 0274 006
9810126036G
Description
PWA, IPZ6800+
TP, ASI OVER IP TEST INSTRUCTION
ASSY, CARRIER, IPA\IPZ6800+ CARD, UAX CC
Qty UM
1 EA
1 EA
1 EA
Reference Designators
Table 7-14 ASSY, IPA, ASI OVER IP - 9810126014G (C1)
Qty UM
1 EA
0 DWG
1 EA
Reference Designators
Table 7-15 ASSY, IPZ, ASI OVER IP - 9810126016G (B1)
Qty UM
1 EA
0 DWG
1 EA
Reference Designators
Table 7-16 ASSY, SRD6800+, SAT RECEIVER, W/ASI IN - 9810126113G (A)
Harris PN
Description
302 0803 010
SCREW, MACH M3-0.5 X 10 SEMS
33-351
EMI CLIP, SMALL SINGLE
344 0117 000
SCREW, M3.5 X 8 PPH SELF-TAP
344 0252 000
SCREW, M3X6L SELF TAP PH PHIL
410 0501 000
STANDOFF, 1" PCB EDGE CLIP MNT
460 0006 000
BRACKET, PCB MTG BLOCK RT ANGL
735 0066 000
PWA, SRD6800+
880 0274 005
TP, SAT RECEIVER TEST INSTRUCTION
9010233153G *PWA, SRD/SRZ BACKPLANE W/ ASI IN
943 5613 157
CHASSIS, SRD/SRZ-6800 CARD
952 9248 101
CABLE, EXTERNAL RECLOCKER
9710051018G *PWA, UAX CC 6800 INTERFACE (TOP LEVEL)
9810126013GWI WI, SRD/SRZ SATELLITE RECEIVER, ORION
Qty UM
2 EA
3 EA
4 EA
2 EA
4 EA
2 EA
1 EA
0 DWG
1 EA
1 EA
2 EA
1 EA
0 DWG
Reference Designators
Table 7-17 ASSY, SRZ6800+, SAT RECEIVER, W/ASI IN - 9810126115G (A)
Harris PN
302 0803 010
33-351
344 0117 000
344 0252 000
410 0501 000
460 0006 000
735 0068 000
880 0274 005
9010233153G
943 5613 157
952 9248 101
7-6
Description
SCREW, MACH M3-0.5 X 10 SEMS
EMI CLIP, SMALL SINGLE
SCREW, M3.5 X 8 PPH SELF-TAP
SCREW, M3X6L SELF TAP PH PHIL
STANDOFF, 1" PCB EDGE CLIP MNT
BRACKET, PCB MTG BLOCK RT ANGL
PWA, SRZ6800+
TP, SAT RECEIVER TEST INSTRUCTION
*PWA, SRD/SRZ BACKPLANE W/ ASI IN
CHASSIS, SRD/SRZ-6800 CARD
CABLE, EXTERNAL RECLOCKER
Qty UM
2 EA
3 EA
4 EA
2 EA
4 EA
2 EA
1 EA
0 DWG
1 EA
1 EA
2 EA
Reference Designators
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Section 7 Parts List
Platinum VAX-C Series
9710051018G *PWA, UAX CC 6800 INTERFACE (TOP LEVEL)
9810126013GWI WI, SRD/SRZ SATELLITE RECEIVER, ORION
1 EA
0 DWG
Table 7-18 XMTR, PLATINUM, BASIC, COMPACT CLASS VHF - 981 0155 001 (A)
Harris PN
Description
053 0016 000
CARTON, TRIPLE WALL, 28X25X10.5
302 0803 008
SCREW, MACH M3-0.5 X 8 SEMS
306 0028 000
LOCKNUT, TOOTHWASHER M4-0.7MM
356 0004 000
CABLE CLAMP, NYLON 0.250" DIA
646 0665 000
LABEL, INSPECTION
943 5588 081
INSERT, M2X TOP PACKING
943 5588 082
INSERT, M2X BOTTOM PACKING
971 0051 001
ASSY, ORION BASIC
971 0077 001
XMTR, VHF, COMMON ACCESSORIES
9810126004GWI WI, ORION TRANSMITTER / GAP FILLER
Table 7-19
Harris PN
026 6010 007
086 0001 002
086 0001 004
165-601-000
302 0803 006
302 0803 010
302 0804 008
303 4103 006
303 4104 016
303 4104 050
303 4203 006
306 0028 000
307 0001 040
310 0037 000
311 0011 030
311 0011 040
315 0021 030
315 0021 040
315 0023 040
325 0020 000
336 1330 000
350 0058 000
350 0114 000
356 0004 000
356 0087 000
358 1214 000
358 2628 000
396 0261 000
408 0338 000
424 0001 000
430 0325 000
430 0687 000
610 1425 003
727 1519 002
727 1519 003
778-225-004
9010213011G
9010223091G
5/9/13
Qty UM
0 EA
3 EA
2 EA
1 EA
1 EA
0 EA
0 EA
1 EA
1 EA
0 DWG
Reference Designators
ASSY, ORION BASIC - 971 0051 001 (T)
Description
GROMMET STRIP, 0.063
*ADHESIVE, THREADLOCK 242
SEALANT, HIGH STRENGTH
SCREW A M3X 6 ST/ZN CROSS H3
SCREW, MACH M3-0.5 X 6 SEMS
SCREW, MACH M3-0.5 X 10 SEMS
SCREW, MACH M4-0.7 X 8 SEMS
SCREW, MACH M3-0.5 X 6
SCREW, MACH M4-0.7 X 16
SCREW, PHMS M4-0.7 X 50 SST
SCREW, FHMS M3-0.5 X 6
LOCKNUT, TOOTHWASHER M4-0.7MM
NUT, STD HEX M4-0.7 (SST)
WASHER, FLAT #4 SST (ANSI REGULAR)
WASHER, FLAT M3 SST (DIN125)
WASHER, FLAT M4 SST (DIN125)
LOCKWASHER, SPLIT M3 SST (DIN127)
LOCKWASHER, SPLIT M4 SST (DIN127)
WASHER, EXT LOCK M4
LOCKNUT, HEX KEP M3-0.5 (SST)
STDOFF-M/F-4.5MM HEX-M3X0.5X5L
RIVET 0.125 DIA, CSINK HEAD, CLOSED END
RIVET 0.125 DIA, DOME HEAD, CLOSED END
CABLE CLAMP, NYLON 0.250" DIA
CABLE TIE TY RAP
SCREWLOCK, M/F 4-40X3/16"
CABLE PUSH MOUNT
DISPLAY, LCD BLUE
GASKET, EMI, 0.13 TALL X 0.19
GROMMET 0.375 GROOVE DIA
FAN GUARD, 80MM WIRE-FORM
FAN, 80MM X 32MM 12VDC
RECP, 3C 1ROW VERTICAL
GROMMET, LIGHT PIPE
LIGHT PIPE, 0.2" L X 0.190" DIA CLEAR
HOLE BUNG DP-312
*PWA, MCF5484 UC MODULE
*PWA, FRONT PANEL
Qty UM
1.3 FT
0 EA
0 EA
2 EA
8 EA
1 EA
11 EA
4 EA
1 EA
4 EA
16 EA
5 EA
2 EA
2 EA
4 EA
4 EA
4 EA
4 EA
3 EA
5 EA
9 EA
7 EA
14 EA
2 EA
12 EA
2 EA
9 EA
1 EA
1.143 EA
3 EA
2 EA
2 EA
2 EA
7 EA
7 EA
1 EA
1 EA
1 EA
Reference Designators
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
7-7
Platinum VAX-C Series
Section 7 Parts List
943 5588 030
943 5588 059
943 5588 062
943 5613 004
943 5613 007
943 5613 009
943 5613 017
943 5613 022
943 5613 023
943 5613 029
943 5613 036
943 5613 041
952 9248 010
9710051011G
9710051032G
9710051035G
BLOCK-MOUNTING-PCA_UEP
RAMP. M2X AIR
BRACKET, AC CORD
ORION, CHASSIS
FRONT CONTROL PANEL COVER
CHASSIS, COVER
AIR DIVIDER PANEL
FRONT PANEL SHIELD
CHASSIS, BRACE
FRONT PANEL MOUNTING BRACKET
BRACKET, CONNECTOR
ASSY, ORION FRONT PANEL
CABLE, GROUND
ASM-POWER MODULE
ASSY, AC/DC CONVERTER
KIT, CE COMPLIANCE
Harris PN
843 5613 041
943 5613 006
943 5613 040
943 5613 062
Description
ASSY, ORION FRONT PANEL
CHASSIS FRONT PANEL
RETAINER, ORION FRONT FILTER
FILTER, ORION AIR
Table 7-20
Table 7-21
ASSY, ORION FRONT PANEL - 943 5613 041 (B)
Qty UM
0 DWG
1 EA
2 EA
2 EA
Reference Designators
XMTR, VHF, COMMON ACCESSORIES - 971 0077 001 (B)
Harris PN
086 0001 002
256 0227 000
302 0803 006
306 0028 000
311 0011 060
358 1214 000
410 0471 000
414 0399 000
9010215181G
943 5602 519
952 9265 032
9710035011G
9710051016G
971 0077 002
Description
*ADHESIVE, THREADLOCK 242
CABLE, FFC 40C, 2ROW 61MM LONG
SCREW, MACH M3-0.5 X 6 SEMS
LOCKNUT, TOOTHWASHER M4-0.7MM
WASHER, FLAT M6 SST (DIN125)
SCREWLOCK, M/F 4-40X3/16"
STANDOFF, HEX M3 X 16 M/F
SUPPRESSOR, SPLIT FERRITE
*PWA, SIGNAL PROCESSOR
AIR DEFLECTOR
CABLE PACKAGE, XMTR COMPLETE
ASM-SUB-TX/IO INTERFACE MODULE
ASM-SUB-PFRU
ASSY, UDC VHF
Harris PN
360 0073 000
360 0073 001
404 1007 000
410 0492 006
445 0055 000
516 0054 000
610 0900 000
610 1110 000
610 1401 040
610 1402 020
612 1184 000
612 2152 000
612 2243 009
Description
HEAT SINK, 40X40X13 MM BLACK
HEAT SINK, 30X30X10 MM BLACK
HOLDER, BATTERY 20MM COIN CELL
STANDOFF, PEM, M3-0.5 X 6 (KFSE-M3-6)
OCXO, 54MHZ, 3.3V HCMOS ESD
CAP, DISC 0.001UF 1KV 10% Z5U
HDR, 3C VERT 1ROW UNSHR
HDR, 8C VERT 2ROW UNSHR
HDR, 40C 2ROW VERTICAL (SYS 50)
*HDR (FFC), 20C 2ROW RT ANG
JUMPER SHUNT, 2C, 0.1'' PITCH
RECP, RJ45 W/ INTEGRAL LED
RECP/RECP, D, 9C/9C, METAL
Table 7-22
7-8
3 EA
1 EA
1 EA
1 EA
1 EA
1 EA
1 EA
1 EA
1 EA
1 EA
1 EA
1 EA
1 EA
1 EA
1 EA
1 EA
Qty UM
0 EA
3 EA
11 EA
2 EA
2 EA
2 EA
6 EA
1 EA
1 EA
1 EA
1 EA
1 EA
1 EA
1 EA
Reference Designators
*PWA, SIGNAL PROCESSOR - 9010215181G (H)
Qty UM
1 EA
1 EA
1 EA
2 EA
1 EA
4 EA
1 EA
1 EA
3 EA
1 EA
1 EA
2 EA
1 EA
Reference Designators
#U40
#U43
BT1
U61
C2 C6 C189 C204
JP1
J7
J23 J24 J25
J18
1/JP1
J1 J20
J5
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13
Section 7 Parts List
Platinum VAX-C Series
612 2342 000
612 2347 000
RECP, 80C, RT-ANG, BD-BD
RECP, MCX FEMALE 50 OHMS
2 EA
10 EA
620 2930 000
626 0005 000
646 2110 000
660 0054 000
801 0215 181
9010215182G
9306-0014
RECEPTACLE RT ANGLE BNC
RECP, BNC, STACKED, THRU-PANEL, 50 OHM
BARCODE, SN_ITEM_REV
BATTERY 3V LITHIUM COIN CR2032
SCH, SIGNAL PROCESSING
*PWA, SIGNAL PROCESSOR, SMT
CONN HDR,2X7 POS .10CTRS
1 EA
1 EA
1 EA
1 EA
0 DWG
1 EA
1 EA
J21 J22
J2 J3 J13 J14 J15 J16 J17
J19 J26 J27
J6
J4
#BT1
J9
Table 7-23 XMTR, PLATINUM, BASIC, COMPACT CLASS VHF - 981 0155 002 (A)
Harris PN
981 0155 001
5/9/13
Description
Qty UM
XMTR, PLATINUM, BASIC, COMPACT CLASS VHF 1 EA
Reference Designators
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
7-9
Section 7 Parts List
7-10
Platinum VAX-C Series
888-2857-001
WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.
5/9/13